Division 09 Finishes Final

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
H90
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS

To be read in conjunction with General Requirements.
GENERAL
110
-
150
-
SINGLE LAYER FABRIC COVERING SYSTEM - Type ES1

System manufacturer: Architen Landrell Associates Ltd. (Station Road,
Chepstow, Monmouthshire NP16 5PF, Telephone +44 (0) 1291 638 200, e-mail
mail@architen.com) or equivalent and approved.
Fabric: Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE).
- Warp and weft: To specialist contractors specification.
- Strength: To specialist contractors specification.
- Stiffness: To specialist contractors specification.
- Bow: To specialist contractors specification .
- Coating: Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE).
Coverage: To specialist contractors specification.
Surface quality: Smooth with no significant discontinuities or blemishes when
viewed externally from a distance of 4 m in directional sunlight.
- Colour: White.
- Fire resistance: - Integrity: Half hour
- Surface spread of flame: European class BROOF(t4).
- Testing of and classification of membrane to:
- External fire exposure roof test: BS 476-3.
- Fire propagation: BS 476-6.
- Spread of flame BS 476-7.
- Non combustibility of substrate: BS 7837
In the event of a fire the structural integrity of the system must be maintained
even when large sections of fabric are lost.
- Translucency: 25%.
Seams: To specialist contractors specification.
Connection to supporting structure: To specialist contractors specification.
Fixings: To specialist contractors specification.
Supports: To specialist contractors specification.
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
Tensile fabric coverings: Complete detailed design of the tensile fabric roof and
associated features and submit before commencement of fabrication.
Related works: Coordinate with supporting structure and interfaces in detailed
design.
155
CONTRACTOR DESIGN PROPOSALS

- The general arrangement drawings indicate design intent but do not preclude
submission with the tender of reasonable alternative proposals for
consideration.
156
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED AFTER ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER

- Submit to the CA within 4 weeks of appointment the following tensile fabric
roof assembly particulars:
- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
ODAC
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the tensile fabric roof
assembly to the structure.
- Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master
programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main
Contract master programme.
157
-
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF TESTING

OR FABRICATION OF TENSILE FABRIC ROOF
Submit the following curtain particulars:
- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.
- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance
requirements.
- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.
- Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming
their suitability for proposed locations.
- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.
160
-
EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE
Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that incorporated
components comply with specified performance.
170
-
TESTING FABRIC MATERIAL

Material: PTFE.
- Undertake tests with reference to BS 3424-0.
Test results: Submit.
PERFORMANCE
220
-
VERIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE
Reports and calculations: Based on approved laboratory testing or computer
modelling. Submit before commencement of work.
240
-
INTEGRITY: CONTRACTOR DETERMINED PARAMETERS

Requirement: Tensile fabric coverings and supporting structure must resist wind
loads, dead loads and design live loads and accommodate deflections and
thermal movements without damage.
Design wind loads: Calculate in accordance with BS 6399-2.
245
-
FACTOR OF SAFETY
Requirement: All components shall be designed to give minimum factor of safety:
- Permanent long term (dead load and pre-stress): 6 or greater.
- Transient short term (dead load, pre-stress and wind load): 6 or greater.
- Medium term (dead load, pre-stress and snow load): 6 or greater.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
ODAC
246
-
TOLERANCE
Shall be provided for the tensile fabric roof design to enable it to be installed
within agreed limits to be set by reference to the building tolerances required by
the CA. The Contractor shall also take into account the relationship of his work
with other adjacent trades and the tolerances thereon.
247
-
MATERIALS
All materials used shall be compatible with one another and with the building
fabric. Where required between contact surfaces of concrete, galvanised or
stainless steel, or aluminium, particularly in damp conditions, a separating
membrane shall be introduced. The selection of metal types and grades, for use
in the tensile fabric roof construction shall, notwithstanding any other
requirements of this specification, take into account the requirement to prevent
the occurrence of electrolytic action between metal.
248
-
INTEGRITY
Requirement: The tensile fabric roof assembly must resist wind loads, dead loads
and design live loads, and accommodate deflections and movements without
damage.
Design wind pressure: Calculate in accordance with BS 6399-2 with a minimum
design wind pressure of 1200 Pa.
Permanent imposed loads: To structural engineers direction
251
-
DESIGN LIFE OF TENSILE FABRIC ROOF ASSEMBLY

Duration (minimum): 30 years.
Maintenance: Submit a schedule for maintenance and for replacement of
secondary components.
252
-
ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS
During the life of the tensile fabric roof assembly exposure to sunlight shall not
reduce the performance or visual appearance.
253
-
SAFETY
The finished surfaces of curtain walling in all accessible internal and external
areas must not:
- Have irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.
- Release irritant or staining substances.
290
-
SOLAR AND LIGHT CONTROL

Tensile fabric coverings must have:
- Total solar energy transmission of normal incident solar radiation (maximum):
15%
- Reflectivity of normal incident solar radiation (minimum): 70% .
- Translucency (minimum) 15%.
PRODUCTS
310
-
PRODUCT SAMPLES
Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples of: Fabric (as 110),
Clamping plates (as 320), Rods (as 350) and Wire ropes (as 360) .
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
ODAC
315
-
FIXING SAMPLES
General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fixing,
with details of methods of adjustment and tolerances.
320
-
CLAMPING PLATES
Type: Stainless Steel .
Manufacturer: Architen Landrell or equivalent and approved.
Size: To specialist contractors specification
Radius to corners/ edges in contact with fabric (minimum): To specialist
contractors specification.
Bolts: To specialist contractors specification.
Other requirements: To specialist contractors specification.
330
-
STRAPS
Type: PTFE .
Weave: To specialist contractors specification. .
Size: To specialist contractors specification.
Extension at break (maximum): To specialist contractors specification.
Attachment: To specialist contractors specification.
Other requirements: To specialist contractors specification.
350
-
RODS
Type: Stainless Steel.
Manufacturer: Architen Landrell.
Accessories: To specialist contractors specification.
360
-
WIRE ROPES
Manufacturer: Architen Landrell.
Size: To specialist contractors specification. .
Testing construction stretch (measured at 15% MBL): To specialist contractors
specification.
- Test results: Submit.
Accessories: To specialist contractors specification.
370
-
CORNER PLATES
375
-
PACKING AND SHIMS

General: To be of aluminium or austenitic stainless steel.
380
-
FIXING ANCHORS
Dimensions: Not less than recommended by their manufacturers.
Adjustment capability: Sufficient in three dimensions to accommodate building
structure and curtain walling fabrication/ installation tolerances.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
391
-
ODAC
METALWORK
Requirement: As section Z11, unless specified otherwise in this section.
FABRICATION
610
-
SETTING OUT OF FABRIC COVERINGS

Centre line of panel: Along and perpendicular to the centre line of the roll.
- Accuracy: 1 mm.
Diagonal distortion of weave, faults, small tears or miscuts: Not permitted.
620
-
FABRICATING CABLE CUFFS

Type: To specialist contractors specification.
Width (minimum): To specialist contractors specification.
Attachment: To specialist contractors specification. .
Testing: Demonstrate structural capacity of cable cuffs is equal to attacing
membrane.
630
-
FABRICATING PANELS
Accuracy:
- Tolerance in weft direction (maximum): 15mm.
- Tolerance in position of cable and belt lines (maximum): +0-10 mm rela.
Testing: One strip tensile test in warp and weft directions per 100 m2 of fabric.
One trapezoidal tear test in warp and weft directions per 200m
640
-
701
-
FACTORY SEAMING OF PANELS

Junctions: Minimize number of layers to be joined.
Method: Ironed and pressure bonded .
Seam:
- Width: To specialist contractors specification.
- Number of rows/ Spacing of stitches: To specialist contractors specification.
- Quality: Continuous and of uniform width.
- Distance from edge: To specialist contractors specification.
Seam sealing: To specialist contractors specification.
Seam testing: Demonstrate ultimate strength capacity of welded seams by
physical test. Establish 100% fabric strength at 200C and long term loading of
60kN/m at 700C.
- Frequency of testing: Submit proposals .
Integrity of coating: Maintain during joining process to exclude water and air.
EXECUTION
GENERALLY:
Fabricate and install the tensile fabric roof in accordance with this specification
and the final detailed drawings.
Select and align all products to ensure uniformity of appearance.
Joints must only occur at positions indicated on final detailed drawings.
Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
710
-
760
-
761
-
ODAC
All fixings must be concealed unless indicated on final detailed drawings. Where
exposed they must match the material and finish of the products fixed.
Machine cut and drill all products in the workshop wherever possible.
Mark or tag all products to facilitate identification during assembly, handling,
storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete
installations.
Joints between frames and building surrounds shall be sealed internally where
necessary and bedded and sealed externally.
Aluminium surfaces in contact with cementitious surfaces shall be protected by a
bitumen coating to BS 3416 type 1.
ADVERSE WEATHER
Installation of fabric coverings: Unless effective temporary cover is provided,
suspend work:
- At temperatures below: 50C .
- In wet or damp conditions.
Unfinished areas of coverings: Keep dry and protect from wind action.
INSPECTION:
All fabrication and assembled units must be carefully inspected for match with
approved samples and for compliance with this specification and the final detailed
drawings before dispatch to site.
Give adequate notice of inspection arrangements to enable the CA and/or other
affected parties to be present.
PROTECTION:
All fabrications and assembled units must be protected against damage,
corrosion and disfigurement during handling, installation and subsequent site
operations.
Protective coverings must be applied before dispatch to site and must not be
detrimental to curtain walling products, finishes or installation procedures.
762
-
HANDLING AND STORAGE

Do not deliver to site any tensile fabric roof products and units which cannot be
installed immediately or unloaded into a suitable well protected storage area.
763
-
SUITABILITY OF SUPPORTING STRUCTURE

Pre-installation survey: Submit report if required accuracy or security of curtain
walling installation cannot be achieved.
764
-
FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION

Site drill or cut into structure only in approved locations.
Distances between all fixing components and edges of concrete must not be less
than recommended by manufacturers.
Obtain approval before carrying out corrective fabrication to fixing anchors.
770
-
WELDING
Is permitted, subject to completion of a hot work permit form and compliance
with its requirements.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
775
-
ODAC
DAMAGE
Do not repair the tensile fabric roof without approval. Such approval will not be
given where products and units are badly damaged or where the proposed repair
will impair performance or appearance.
Repairs may require additional site testing at the discretion of the CA.
Schedule repairs or record on drawings for inclusion in the maintenance manual.
COMPLETION
910
-
INSPECTION
Interim and final covering inspections: Submit report.
920
-
TESTING OF FABRIC
Standard: To the relevant parts of BS EN ISO 1421.
Timing of test: On completion of installation .
Test results: Submit on completion of testing.
925
-
PROJECT TESTING (LABORATORY)

At an agreed stage in detailed design work arrange for laboratory testing of a
specimen of tensile fabric in accordance with relevant clauses of this
specification.
The costs of such tests shall be identified in the tender.
Fabrication and installation of tensile fabric roof assembly must not commence
until test results and reports showing compliance with this specification have
been submitted to the CA.
926
-
PROJECT TESTING (SITE)

At an agreed stage during preliminary installation on site, arrange for testing of a
section of tensile fabric roof assembly in accordance with relevant clauses of this
specification.
Protect building structure, components and finishes from any damage
consequent upon testing.
Installation of general areas of curtain walling must not continue until site test
results and reports showing compliance with this specification have been
submitted to the CA.
930
-
DOCUMENTATION
Submit:
- Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
- Guarantees, warranties and test certificates.
940
-
COMPLETION
Cables: Not damaged, crushed or kinked.
Fabric:
- Cable cuffs: Unwrinkled.
- Colour and translucency: Consistent, free from discontinuities and
discolouration.
- Required prestress: Verified.
- Surfaces: Clean and smooth, fully sealed, weathertight and free draining.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
995
-
ODAC
Completed coverings: Protect against damage from adjacent or high level

working.
MAINTENANCE
Prepare a maintenance manual. Unless otherwise instructed or agreed the
manual must be completed and handed over to the CA at Practical Completion.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
H92 RAINSCREEN CLADDING

TYPES OF RAINSCREEN CLADDING
120
CERAMIC RAINSCREEN CLADDING : Type CW6

Drained and back ventilated Ceramic Granite system, comprising fired clay
ceramic granite tiles on aluminium support bracketry.
- Primary Support Structure: Dense concrete frame, blockwork.
- Rainscreen Cladding System:
- Manufacturer: James and Taylor Ltd, Mitchell House, 2 Montem Road, New
Malden, Surrey,
KT3 3QW. Tel: 0208 942 3688. Fax: 020 8336 2036
Email: info@jamesandtaylor.co.uk
or equal and approved.
- Reference: Ceramic Granite Rainscreen System.
- Type: Fully drained and back ventilated.
- Rainscreen panel:
- Manufacturer: James and Taylor Ltd, as above.
- Product Reference: Ceramic Granite Rainscreen System.
- Material: Ceramic tiles, free from cracks, fissures, discolorations or any other
defects, which may adversely affect strength, durability or appearance. Tile
tolerances as below.
Length max:
0.25%
Height max:
1.0%
Thickness max:
1.0mm
Flatness max
0.5% over length
Format Size:
1200 x 600mm
Impact Loads : Suitable for wall categories: C/D/E/F : BS 8200;1985:7.2 Table 2
Other System Components: Undercut anchors fixed to holes drilled in the rear of
the ceramic tiles (4 No per tile) fixed to standard, adjustable and fixed system
brackets and ref AR/130 horizontal aluminium rail.
- Thickness: Tile thickness 12mm. System thickness 46 mm from rear of horizontal
rail to front face of tile.
- Finish: TBA
- Colour: TBA
- Fasteners: Individual tiles are secured to the AR/130 Horizontal Support Rails by
means of standard, adjustable and fixed brackets.
- Number and Location of Fasteners: Each tile is to be secured by 4No fasteners.
- Joint Type:
Horizontal Joint: Open joint.
Vertical Joint: Open joint.
Joint Width: Horizontal Joint; 8mm: Vertical joint, 8mm.
- Air Gap: Not less than 50mm, as CWCT requirements for open jointed rainscreen
systems. This 50mm to be measured from the rear face of the Ceramic
tiles.Secondary Support/ Framing System: Ceramic Granite Rainscreen System
to be fixed to blockwork support structure using requisite cleats, vertical
aluminium extrusions etc, to achieve adequate performance.
- Manufacturer: James and Taylor as above.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
Product Reference: Consult James and Taylor for recommendations and details.
Material: Typically secondary aluminium support rails, with aluminium fixed and
floating cleats as necessary. Stainless steel rivets to be used to connect the
Ceramic Granite Rainscreen System to the secondary support.
- Fasteners: Consult James and Taylor for recommendations and details.
Number and Location: Consult James and Taylor for recommendations and
details.
- Backing Wall: Dense concrete blockwork.
- Thermal insulation: 100mm Rockwool Rainscreen duo insulation.
- Breather membrane: Tyvek frame wrap.
130
ALUMINIUM PANEL RAINSCREEN CLADDING: Type CW7

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.
MATRIX 1
HONEYCOMB RAINSCREEN SYSTEM
P1.1.1
METAL PROFILED COMPOSITE RAINSCREEN CLADDING FOR
EXTERNAL WALLS
Manufacturer and reference: PSP metal faade solutions
Unit 11, all saints industrial estate
Shildon, co. Durham, UK. DL4 2RD
TEL 01388 770 490
FAX 01388 778 068
Metal panel drained/back ventilated rainscreen cladding Structurally laminated
double skin and honeycomb core composite panel Bespoke.
Panel thickness:
Front skin
Internal skin material
Nominal 30 mm
0.9mm coloured anodised aluminium sheeting grade
EN AW-3004.
Rear skin: 0.7mm Galvatite substrate of hot dipped
zinc coated steel to BS EN 10 147
Internal skin finish
White liner (nominal thickness) coating of pre finished

polyester stoved to the substrate.
Internal skin colour
Standard white.
Core:
Commercial grade aluminium honeycomb designed to

offer the following features:
Use Temperatures up to 350oF
High Thermal Conductivity
Flame Resistant
Excellent Moisture and Corrosion Resistance
Fungi Resistant
Low Weight/High Strength
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
Standard core thickness 28mm

(alternative core thicknesses are available to suit
span and wind loading criteria)
Panel Supports
2 inverted galvanised channels fixed vertically, with front cloaking channel to match
from skin. Size, gauge and locations to be determined by span.
Structural support Structural concrete Framing and masonry walls.
Joints:
Fixings:
Nominal 15mm recessed Horizontal.

Panels secret fixed direct to vertical channels.
Channels fixed direct to steelwork
FIXING CLADDING
P2.1 Structure:
All primary structure is the responsibility of others. Contractors should note the
following:The primary structure should be designed to take all loads imposed by the cladding
system.
In order to achieve an acceptable elevational line on the finished facade the tolerances
of the primary structure must be considered.
The primary structure must be within tolerance before handover to following trades.
P2.6 Manufacturer/Installers:
The system, manufactured by PSP LTD, must be detailed and installed by a PSP
Approved Installation Contractor.
P2.6.1 Design:
All design details/specifications are to be approved by Architect/Agent before
manufacture.
P2.6.2 Production Information:
Drawings and manufacturing information will be prepared, based upon information
provided under P2.6 standard specifications and details (non-project specific) are
available on request.
P2.7 MANUFACTURING ACCURACY
P2.7.1
Finished dimensions of completed units to be such that the cladding, when erected,
complies with clause P2.8.1 and all sizes fall within the indicated permissible
deviations.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
P2.8 SYSTEM TOLERANCES

P2.8.1 PANELS
1. Permitted deviation of overall panel width
2. Permitted deviation in panel length
For panel lengths up to 2400mm
For panel lengths over 2400mm
3. Maximum permitted deviation in length of
two opposite sides of panels
4. Squareness of panels:
+1.5mm
-1.5mm
+1.5mm
+2mm
-1.5mm
- 2mm
+ 1mm
- 1mm
When the longest of two adjacent sides of panel is taken as the base line, the
deviation of the shorter side measured from a perpendicular to the baseline shall
not exceed.
+1.5mm
-1.5mm
5. Flatness:
The cellular honeycomb core is cut to 0.2mm tolerance, which provides an
exceptionally flat surface for skin bonding. This method of composite assembly
provides extreme optical panel flatness.
To establish panel flatness, panels should be measured under ambient factory
temperature and humidity. The tolerances do not take into account any thermal
expansion or contraction.
Manufacture Metal skins are coated with a non-flammable, two part polyurethane based
laminating adhesive, which has a low viscosity and provides foaming to ensure
maximum coverage is achieved. The adhesive is applied by an automated
diamond bead application system which has a co-ordinated conveyor-feed
system to ensure all items achieve consistent coverage. The core is positioned
between the metal skins and the assembly is structurally bonded within a heated
platen press.
P4.1 FASTENINGS GENERALLY:
Type(s), size(s), material(s) and finish(s) as
specified, or in the absence of such specification, as recommended for the
purpose by fixing specialist, as recommended in BS 5427, clause 23.
P4.2 SUB-STRUCTURE: Contractors should note the following:The sub-structure should be designed to transfer all loads back to the primary
structure.
In order to achieve an acceptable elevational line on the finished facade, the
tolerances between the sub-structure and the primary structure must be
considered and a means of adjustment should be incorporated.
Secondary steelwork tolerance must be 5mm.
The sub-structure must be within tolerance before the installation of the cladding
system.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION AND SPECIFICATIONS STATED WITHIN THIS
DOCUMENT ARE A GENERAL GUIDE ONLY AND ARE SUBJECT TO
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. PSP Ltd DO NOT ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY

FOR ERRORS OR FOR ANY INFORMATION FOUND TO BE MISLEADING.
PLEASE CHECK WITH PSP Ltd TO CONFIRM INDIVIDUAL PROJECT
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK
210
-
220
-
DESIGN
Rainscreen cladding system and associated features: Complete detailed design
in accordance with this specification and the preliminary design drawings and
submit before commencement of fabrication.
Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.
SPECIFICATION
Compliance standards: The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology
(CWCT) Standard for systemised building envelopes.
Reference information: For the duration of the contract, keep available at the
design office, workshop and on site copies of:
- The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) Standard for
systemised building envelopes.
- Publications invoked by the CWCT Standard for systemised building
envelopes.
230
-
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN

Submit the following cladding particulars:
- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the rainscreen cladding to the
structure.
- Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to the structural design and
construction with methods of adjustment and tolerances.
- A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master
programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main
Contract master programme.
- Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents
or relaxations.
232
-
Quality plan
Requirement: Submit during detailed design.
Content: In accordance with BS 5750 and including the following:
- Name of the quality manager.
- Quality assessment procedures.
- Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work.
- Stages at which check lists will be used and samples of the lists.
- List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off
site and on site.
- List of product information with latest revisions.
- Subcontractors involved in the work.
- Subcontractors quality plans.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
235
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures.

Procedure for registering and reporting non compliances.
Maintenance procedures and calibration records.
Certification that completed work complies with specification.
Check list register to ensure all items have been inspected and non
compliances discharged.
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF TESTING

OR MANUFACTURE OF RAINSCREEN CLADDING SYSTEM
Submit the following cladding particulars:
- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.
- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance
requirements.
- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.
- Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming
their suitability for proposed locations in the rainscreen cladding.
- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
- Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.
250
-
SAMPLES OF FIXINGS
General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fixing,
together with manufacturers' recommended torque figures.
260
-
FABRICATION SAMPLES
General: During detailed design, submit samples of: Typical honeycomb panel
and sill flashing
Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

310
-
335
-
CWCT 'STANDARD FOR SYSTEMISED BUILDING ENVELOPES'

General: Unless specified or agreed otherwise comply with:
Part 2 - Loads, fixings and movement.
Part 3 - Air, water and wind resistance.
Part 4 - Operable components, additional elements and means of access.
Part 5 - Thermal, moisture and acoustic performance.
Part 6 - Fire performance.
Part 7 - Robustness, durability, tolerances and workmanship.
Project performance requirements specified in this subsection: Read in
conjunction with CWCT performance requirements.
INTEGRITY OF VENTILATED RAINSCREEN CLAD WALLS
Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of panels, sizes, number and
spacing of fixings, configuration and location of secondary support systems and
incorporation of other accessories and fittings to ensure the cladding system,
primary support structure and other elements forming the rainscreen wall will
resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and accommodate
deflections and movements without damage.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
350
-
360
-
370
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2 appropriate to location, exposure, height,

building shape and size, taking account of existing and known future adjacent
structures.
Hard body impact loads to BS 8200:
- Location and category: All areas
Soft body impact loads to BS EN 14019: Location and classification: All areas
Temporary imposed loads: All areas
DEFLECTION UNDER WIND LOAD
Requirement: For listed components, at positive and negative applications of the
design wind pressure, normal deflections are not to exceed: To Contractors
Determination
Additional stiffness to CWCT Standard for systemised building envelopes clause
3.5.4.2: To Contractors Determination
WIND RESISTANCE - CYCLIC LOADING
Requirement: No reduction in the integrity of the rainscreen cladding must occur
when subjected to the test sequence given in CWCT Standard for systemised
building envelopes, clause 8.14.6.
Test method: As clause 665.
APPEARANCE AND FIT
Requirement: Design rainscreen wall:
- To ensure position and alignment of all parts and features as shown on
preliminary design drawings.
- To accommodate deviations in the primary support structure.
Primary support structure: Before commencing installation of rainscreen cladding
system, carry out survey sufficient to verify that required accuracy of erection can
be achieved.
- Give notice: If the structure will not allow the required accuracy or security of
erection.
380
-
GENERAL MOVEMENT
Requirement: Rainscreen cladding must accommodate anticipated building
movements as follows: To Structural Engineers Determination
385
-
THERMAL MOVEMENT - SERVICE TEMPERATURE RANGES

Requirement: To CWCT Standard for systemised building envelopes clause
2.7.2
420
-
WATER PENETRATION
Watertightness class to BS EN 12154
- Peak test pressure: To CWCT table 1.1
425
-
Wind load serviceability and safety of rainscreen panels - cyclic wind loading
Method of determination: To CWCT standard for systemised building envelopes
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
440
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
AVOIDANCE OF CONDENSATION
Requirement: Psychrometric conditions under which condensation must not form
within or on the interior surface of the rainscreen wall or any surface of the wall
that is on the warm side of insulation are:
- Notional outdoor psychrometric conditions as BS 6229, table A1.
- Notional indoor psychrometric conditions:
Temperature: 20C .
Relative humidity: 50%
Vapour pressure: 1.17kPa
Winter interstitial condensate:
- Calculated amount (maximum): 0.35 kg/m.
Calculated annual net retention: Nil.
450
-
VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

Interstitial condensation risk within rainscreen wall: Determine using the method
described in BS 5250, Annex D. If necessary, provide a suitable vapour control
layer to ensure that damage and nuisance from interstitial condensation does not
occur. Refer to Detail drawings CD/65662/201 - 218
495
-
DURABILITY
Relevant agents or degradation mechanisms: Coastal situation
Design life of the rainscreen cladding system: Not less than 50 years
Secondary components: Submit details together with required maintenance
regime, replacement periods and methods of replacement.
497
-
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Rainscreen components used as part of lightning protection system: To
Engineers Determination
TESTING
520
-
PROJECT TESTING (SITE)

Timing of testing: At an agreed stage during preliminary installation on site
arrange for testing of a section of rainscreen cladding in accordance with relevant
clauses of this specification.
Continuation of installation of general areas of rainscreen cladding: Not until site
test results and reports showing compliance with this specification have been
submitted.
530
-
TESTING AUTHORITY
Requirement: Project testing must be carried out by a United Kingdom
Accreditation Service (UKAS) approved independent laboratory.
535
-
TESTING AUTHORITY
Requirement: Project testing must be carried out by the rainscreen cladding
manufacturer/ contractor and is to be witnessed and certified by: agreed with CA
665
WIND LOAD FATIGUE TEST, SMALL SPECIMEN

8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
672
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
Requirement: To CWCT Standard for systemised building envelopes, Standard

test methods for building envelopes Section 14.
- Test sequence: to be agreed with CA
- Effective wind pressure: As clause 360.
SITE TESTING OF FIXINGS
Requirement: To CWCT Standard for systemised building envelope, Standard
Type of test: Serviceability
- Peak load: 1.5 times design load
Number and location of test fixings: To be agreed with CA
680
-
SITE SPRAY BAR TEST

- Area to be tested: To be agreed with CA
- Pressure difference across rainscreen wall: NA
685
-
SITE HOSE TEST

- Joints to be tested: To be agreed with CA
PRODUCTS
710
-
ALUMINIUM ALLOY FRAMING SECTIONS

Standards: To BS EN 755 alloy EN AW-6063 and suitable for the specified finish.
Structural members: To comply with BS 8118.
712
-
ALUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET

Standards: To BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573.
Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.
715
-
CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/ REINFORCEMENT

Standards: To the relevant parts of BS 7668, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10025, and
BS EN 10210.
Thickness: Suitable for the application, and for galvanizing or other protective
coating.
717
-
720
-
CARBON STEEL SHEET

Standards: To the relevant parts of BS 1449-1, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS
EN 10111, BS EN 10131, BS EN 10132, BS EN 10139, BS EN 10140, BS EN
10149, BS EN 10209, and BS EN 10268.
Grade and thickness: Suitable for the application, and suitable for galvanizing or
other protective coating.
STAINLESS STEEL SHEET
Standards: To the relevant parts of BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051,
BS EN 10095, BS EN 10258, BS EN 10259.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
725
-
730
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
Grade: To BS EN 10088-2, austenitic 1.4301 (304) generally, 1.4301 (316) when

used externally or in severely corrosive environments.
Thickness: Suitable for the application.
TIMBER BATTENS
General: Regularized softwood free from decay, insect attack (except ambrosia
beetle damage) and with no knots wider than half the width of the section.
Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and British Wood Preserving and Dampproofing Association Commodity Specification C8.
- Type: To be agreed with CA
Moisture content at time of fixing (maximum): 19%.
MECHANICAL FIXINGS - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Stainless steel: To BS EN ISO 3506 grade A2 generally, grade A4 when used in
severely corrosive environments.
Carbon steel: To BS 4190 and suitable for galvanizing or other protective coating.
Aluminium: To BS EN 755.
732
-
ADHESIVES
General: Not degradable by moisture or water vapour.
735
-
FIXINGS AND FASTENERS

Type and use: Reviewed and approved by manufacturers. Submit confirmatory
information on request.
Dimensions: Not less than recommended by their manufacturers.
Adjustment capability: Sufficient in three dimensions to accommodate primary
support structure and rainscreen cladding fabrication/ installation tolerances.
760
-
765
-
770
-
GASKETS
Material:
- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
Durability: Resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.
WEATHERSTRIPPING OF OPENING UNITS
Material:
- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
- Polypropylene woven pile, silicone treated.
Installation: Fixed in undercut grooves in framing sections using preformed
corners with any joints in the length.
GENERAL SEALANTS
Selection: In accordance with BS 6213 from:
- Silicone to BS 5889.
- One part polysulfide to BS 5215.
- Two part polysulfide to BS 4254.
- One or two part polyurethane.
Classification and requirements: To BS EN ISO 11600.
Reaction to contact products and finishes: Stable and compatible.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
775
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
THERMAL INSULATION
Material: DuoSlab rock wool insulation as per drawings 06562/CD/201 - 218
- Properties: Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or
water vapour.
Fixing: Attached to the outer face or supported within the backing wall so as not
to bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of
the rainscreen cladding.
780
-
VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

Material: Visqueen vapour barrier
- Minimum vapour resistance: 200MN.s/g
- Manufacturer Visqueen Building Products, Maerdy Industrial Estate, Rhymney,
Tredegar, NP22 5PY
tel: 01685 840672
fax: 01685 842580
Product reference: Visqueen Vapour Barrier
- Continuity: No breaks and with the minimum of joints.
- Penetrations and abutments: Seal to vapour control layer. If necessary, prime
substrates to achieve full bond.
- Sheet laps: Not less than 150 mm, seal with tape. Prime substrates as
necessary to achieve full bond.
- Sheet tape: Double sided sealant with vapour resistivity not less than the vapour
control sheet.
- Size (width and thickness): 2.45m &125mu
- Sheet repairs and punctures: Seal with lapped patch of vapour control membrane
and continuous band of sealant tape along edges.
785
-
BREATHER MEMBRANE
Material: vapour permeable membrane
Manufacturer: Tyvek Housewrap
Product reference: Tyvek Housewrap (1060b)
Continuity: No breaks. Minimize joints.
- Penetrations and abutments: Attach to breather membrane with tape. Achieve
full bond.
- Laps: Not less than 150 mm, bond with tape. Achieve full bond.
Tape: As recommended by breather membrane manufacturer.
Repairs: Lapped patch of breather membrane material secured with continuous
band of tape on edges.
Junctions at flashings, sills, gutters etc. Overlap and allow free drainage to
exterior.
FINISHES
810
-
PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/

REINFORCEMENT
Treatment: All surfaces to one of the following:
- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
- An appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944 and BS EN
ISO 14713.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
820
-
PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS

Treatment: All surfaces to one of the following:
- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
- Sherardized to BS 4921, class 1 coating thickness and passivated.
- Zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating designation of FE//Zn//C for an iridescent
(yellow passivate) chromate conversion coating or FE//Zn//D for an opaque
(olive green) chromate conversion coating.
830
-
POWDER COATING
Requirement: As section Z31.
840
850
-
ANODIZING
Requirement: As section Z33.
Polyvinylidene fluoride (pvdf) coating

Standards: To BS 4842, AAMA 2604-05 or AAMA 2605-05, subject to minimum
coating thicknesses recommended by the manufacturer on all significant
surfaces.
- Applicator: Contractors determination
Product reference: Contractors determination
Process: Prepare base metals, prime, PVDF coat, test samples, protect
components and repair damage in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Sequence: Wherever possible, apply coatings after fabrication is complete.
- Fabrication of prefinished lengths: Submit proposals beforehand.
- Uncoated edges: Invisible in completed assemblies.
FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
910
-
GENERALLY
Electrolytic corrosion: Take necessary measures to prevent.
Identification of products: Mark or tag to facilitate identification during assembly,
handling, storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete
installation.
912
-
METALWORK
915
-
TIMBER TREATMENT
Exposed cut and drilled surfaces: Treat with two flood coats of a solution
recommended for the purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.
920
-
GLAZING
Requirement: As section L40, unless specified otherwise in this section.
Directional patterned/ wired glass: Fix generally parallel to surround and align
adjacent panes where seen together at close quarters.
922
-
FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES APPLICATION

12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
925
-
SEALANT APPLICATION
930
-
ASSEMBLY
Location: Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.
Joints: Other than movement joints and designed open joints, must be rigidly
secured, reinforced where necessary and fixed with hairline abutments.
Displacement of components in assembled units: Submit proposals for
reassembly on site.
960
-
PRELIMINARY RAINSCREEN CLADDING INSTALLATION

Requirement: Complete an area of cladding as set out below for inspection and
approval of appearance.
Eest facade adjacent to existing flint building
970
-
RAINSCREEN CLADDING INSTALLATION

Tightening mechanical fasteners: To manufacturer's recommended torque
figures. Do not overtighten fasteners intended to permit differential movement.
Protective coverings: Remove only where necessary to facilitate installation and
from surfaces which will be inaccessible on completion.
975
-
WELDING
In situ welding: Not allowed
980
-
INTERFACES
Installation: Locate flashings, closers etc. correctly and neatly overlap cladding to
form a weathertight junction.
985
-
Damage
Repairs: Do not repair cladding without approval.
- Approval: Will not be given where the proposed repair will impair performance
or appearance.
Record of repairs: Prepare schedule or record on drawings for inclusion in the
maintenance manual.
995
-
Maintenance
Maintenance manual: Incorporate details within the Building Manual in
accordance with CWCT Standard for systemised building envelopes clause
7.6.1.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
K10
ODAC
PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS

TYPES OF DRY LINING

110
-
205
-
225
-
METAL STUD PARTITION SYSTEM.

Refer to GAs for location of partition type.
Partition type: single row studs 70mm, double layer linings.
Partition height: maximum 4400mm.
Head condition: concrete floor slab soffit.
- Deflection allowance: 15mm maximum.
Structural performance: severe.
- Strength grade to BS 5234-2: SD.
Additional tests: none.
- Air pressure and deflection: 200N/m and 1/240.
- Other requirements: at underside of roof extend into deck profile and form air
tight seal with foil faced tape.
Fire resistance of complete partition assembly: to BS 476-20 and -22, 60/60
minutes (integrity/insulation) partition fire rating to suit location.
Airborne sound insulation:
- Weighted sound reduction index Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: 53dB.
Board and Framing Manufacturer: British Gypsum Limited.
Stud centres: 600mm.
Insulation: Isover - Isowool apr 1200.
- Thickness: 50mm.
Linings: One layer of 13mm Wall board.
Finishing: seamless jointing as clause 670.
Other requirements: fire stopping around services as section P12.
LINING ON TIMBER TO DUCTS
Background: 50 mm x 100mm timber studs at 400mm centres.
Metal resilient (acoustic) bars: As required by manufacturer.
Linings: 13mm plasterboard to BS 1230.
- Fixing: nails.
Finishing:Jointing as clause 670.
- Primer/ Sealer: As required by manufacturer.
- Accessories: As required by manufacturer.
Other requirements: Fire stopping around service penetrations as section P31.
Insulate around pipes concealed within ducts.
SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM WITH PLASTERBOARD FINISH Type C3
Manufacturer: British Gypsum Limited .
- Product reference: Casoline MF concealed grid.
Structural soffits: Concrete.
Suspension system:
- Hanger type: steel strap hangers.
Top fixings: screwed to deck.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
ODAC
- Primary grid centres: 1200mm.

Hanger centres: 1200mm.
- Secondary grid centres: 600mm.
Linings: 13mm Gyproc wallboard.
Insulation: none.
Access units: panels to clause 431.
Finishing: seamless jointing as clause 670.
Other requirements:
- services fittings luminaries and ventilation grilles (lay-in grid and cut-outs),
fire alarm detectors, drop rods for patient hoist track.
- Requirements: drop rods for luminaries in double height spaces, fitting fire
alarm detectors
INSTALLATION
335
-
ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS
Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to:
- Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports.
- Fixtures, fittings and service outlets. Mark framing positions clearly and
accurately on linings.
- Board edges and lining perimeters, as recommended by board manufacturer to
suit type and performance of lining.
375
-
NEW WET LAID BASES

Dpcs: Install under full width of partitions/ freestanding wall linings.
- Material: Bituminous sheet or plastics.
435
-
DRY LININGS GENERALLY

General: Use fixing, jointing, sealing and finishing materials, components and
installation methods recommended by board manufacturer.
Cutting plasterboards: Neatly and accurately without damaging core or tearing
paper facing.
- Cut edges: Minimize, and position at internal angles wherever possible. Mask
with bound edges of adjacent boards at external corners.
Fixing boards: Securely and firmly to suitably prepared and accurately levelled
backgrounds.
Finishing: Neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from bowing and abrupt
changes of level.
445
455
-
CEILINGS
Sequence: Fix boards to ceilings before dry lined walls and partitions.
Orientation of boards: Fix with bound edges at right angles to supports and with
ends staggered in adjacent rows.
Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.
METAL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS/ WALL LININGS
Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb.
- Frame/ Stud positions: Equal centres to suit specified linings, maintaining
sequence across openings.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
475
-
485
-
505
-
510
-
555
-
ODAC
- Additional studs: To support vertical edges of boards.

Fixing centres at perimeters (maximum): 600 mm.
Openings: Form accurately.
- Doorsets: Use sleeved or boxed metal studs and/ or suitable timber framing to
achieve strength grade requirements for framing assembly and adequately
support weight of door.
- Services penetrations: Allow for associated fire stopping.
METAL FURRINGS FOR WALL LININGS
Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb.
- Vertical furring positions: Equal vertical centres to suit specified linings,
maintaining sequence across openings. Position adjacent to angles and
openings.
- Additional vertical furrings: To support vertical edges of boards and at junctions
with partitions.
- Horizontal furring positions: To provide continuous support to edges of boards.
Adhesive bedding to furrings:
- Dabs: Length 200 mm (minimum). Located at ends of furrings and thereafter at
450 mm (maximum) centres.
- Junctions with partitions: Continuous bed with no gaps across cavity.
SUSPENDED CEILING GRIDS
Setting out: Accurately aligned and level.
- Grid members and hangers: Centres to suit specified linings and imposed
loads.
- Additional grid members: Provide bracing and stiffening at upstands, partition
heads, access hatches, etc.
Fixing: Securely at perimeters, grid joints, top and bottom hanger fixings.
INSTALLING MINERAL WOOL INSULATION
Fitting insulation: Closely butted joints and no gaps. Use fasteners to prevent
slumping or displacement.
Services:
- Electrical cables overlaid by insulation: Sized accordingly.
- Ceilings: Cut insulation around electrical fittings, etc.
SEALING GAPS AND AIR PATHS
Location of sealant: To perimeter abutments and around openings.
- Pressurized shafts and ducts: At board-to-board and board-to-metal frame
junctions.
Application: To clean, dry and dust free surfaces as a continuous bead with no
gaps.
- Gaps greater than 6 mm between floor and underside of plasterboard: After
sealing, fill with jointing compound.
FIRE STOPPING AT PERIMETERS OF DRY LINING SYSTEMS
Material: Tightly packed mineral wool or intumescent mastic/ sealant.
Application: To perimeter abutments to provide a complete barrier to smoke and
flame.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
560
-
ODAC
JOINTS BETWEEN BOARDS

Tapered edged plasterboards:
- Bound edges: Lightly butted.
- Cut/ Unbound edges: 3 mm gap.
Square edged plasterboards: 3 mm gap.
Square edged fibre reinforced gypsum boards: 5 mm gap.
565
-
VERTICAL JOINTS
Joints: Centre on studs.
- Partitions: Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs.
- Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.
570
-
HORIZONTAL JOINTS
Surfaces exposed to view: Horizontal joints not permitted. Seek instructions
where height of partition/ lining exceeds maximum available length of board.
Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at least 600 mm.
Edges of boards: Support using additional framing.
- Two layer boarding: Support edges of outer layer.
580
-
INSULATION BACKED PLASTERBOARD

General: Do not damage or cut away insulation to accommodate services.
Installation at corners: Carefully cut back insulation or plasterboard as
appropriate along edges of boards to give a continuous plasterboard face, with no
gaps in insulation.
590
-
FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO METAL FRAMING/ FURRINGS

Partitions/ Wall linings: Fix securely and firmly at the following centres
(maximum):
- Single layer boarding: To all framing at 300 mm centres. Reduce to 200 mm
centres at external angles.
- Multi-layer boarding: Face layer at 300 mm centres, and previous layers
around perimeters at 300 mm centres.
Ceilings: 230 mm. Reduce to 150 mm at board ends and at lining perimeters.
Position of screws from edges of boards (minimum): 10 mm.
- Screw heads: Set in a depression. Do not break paper or gypsum core.
592
-
FIXING INSULATION BACKED PLASTERBOARD TO METAL FURRINGS

Fixing to furrings: In addition to screw fixings apply continuous beads of adhesive
sealant to furrings.
610
-
FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO TIMBER

Fixing to timber: Securely at the following centres (maximum):
- Nails: 150 mm.
- Screws to partitions/ wall linings: 300 mm. Reduce to 200 mm at external
angles.
- Screws to ceilings: 230 mm.
Position of nails/ screws from edges of boards (minimum):
- Bound edges: 10 mm.
- Cut/ Unbound edges: 13 mm.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
620
-
ODAC
Position of nails/ screws from edges of timber supports (minimum): 6 mm.

FIXING PLASTERBOARD WITH ADHESIVE DABS
Setting out boards: Accurately aligned and plumb.
Fixing to substrates: Securely using adhesive dabs.
Adhesive dab spacings for each board:
- Horizontally: One row along top edge and one continuous dab along bottom
edge.
- Vertically: One row along each edge and thereafter at intermediate spacings to
suit size of board:
Thickness (mm)
Width (mm)
Dab centres (mm)
9.5
1200
400
9.5/12.5
900
450
12.5
1200
600
Adhesive dab dimensions (width x length): At least 50-75 mm x 250 mm.
- Position of dabs from edges/ ends of boards (minimum): 25 mm.
625
-
FIXING INSULATION BACKED PLASTERBOARD WITH ADHESIVE DABS

Fixing to substrates: In addition to adhesive dab fixings, secure boards with
nailable plugs in locations recommended by board manufacturer.
630
-
FIXING INSULATION BACKED PLASTERBOARD WITH ADHESIVE SPOTS

Setting out boards: Accurately aligned and plumb.
Fixing to substrates: Securely using adhesive spots and mechanical fastenings.
Adhesive spot spacings to each board: Four vertical rows, at 400 mm centres in
each row.
Adhesive spot diameters (minimum): 25 mm.
Mechanical fasteners: Nailable plugs in locations recommended by board
manufacturer.
FINISHING
650
-
LEVEL OF DRY LINING ACROSS JOINTS

Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
Joint deviations: Measure from faces of adjacent boards using methods and
straightedges (450 mm long with feet/ pads) to BS 8212, clause 3.3.5.
- Tapered edge joints:
Permissible deviation (maximum) across joints when measured with feet
resting on boards: 3 mm.
- External angles:
Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 4 mm.
- Internal angles:
Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 5 mm.
670
-
SEAMLESS JOINTING TO PLASTERBOARDS

Cut edges of boards: Lightly sand to remove paper burrs.
Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointing compound and
cover with continuous lengths of paper tape, fully bedded.
Protection of edges/ corners: Reinforce external angles, stop ends, etc. with
specified edge/ angle bead.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
680
-
695
-
725
-
ODAC
Finishing: Apply jointing compound. Feather out each application beyond

previous application to give a flush, smooth, seamless surface.
Nail/ Screw depressions: Fill with jointing compound to give a flush surface.
Minor imperfections: Remove by light sanding.
SKIM COAT PLASTER FINISH
Plaster type: As required by board manufacturer.
- Thickness: 2-3 mm.
Joints: Fill and tape except where coincident with metal beads.
Finish: Tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or
trowel marks.
INSTALLING BEADS/ STOPS
Cutting: Neatly using mitres at return angles.
Fixing: Securely using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line
and level, ensuring full contact of wings with substrate.
Finishing: After joint compounds/ plasters have been applied, remove surplus
material while still wet from surfaces of beads exposed to view.
REPAIRS TO EXISTING PLASTERBOARD
Filling small areas with broken cores: Cut away paper facing, remove loose core
material and fill with jointing compound.
- Finish: Flush, smooth surface suitable for redecoration.
Large patch repairs: Cut out damaged area and form neat hole with rectangular
sides. Replace with matching plasterboard.
- Fixing: Use methods to suit type of dry lining, ensuring full support to all edges
of existing and new plasterboard.
- Finishing: Fill joints, tape and apply jointing compound to give a flush, smooth
surface suitable for redecoration.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K21
K21
ODAC
WOOD STRIP/ BOARD FINE FLOORING/ LININGS

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions
TYPES OF FLOORING/ LINING
145
-
160
-
LAMINATE FLOORING AND SKIRTING: type F12 and SK12

Substrate: Concrete Screed
Preparation: Allow screed finish to fully dry prior to installation of finishes..
Underlay: Quick step Combi floor underlay.
Flooring:
- Manufacturer: UNILIN Flooring - Quick-Step
Ooigemstraat 3
8710 Wielsbeke
Belgium. tel. +32 56 675211
- Standard: To BS EN 13329.
Class: Class 33.
Colour/ Pattern: U896 Natural varnished oak planks.
- Method of fixing: None: Floating floor with click-fix T&G joints.
Accessories: 100mm high skirtings in finish to match.
WOOD WALL LINING ON BATTENS
Substrate: New blockwork walling
Battens: Regularized softwood free from decay and active insect attack and with
no knots wider than half the width of the section.
- Finished size: 25x18mm.
- Moisture content at time of fixing: Not more than 14%.
- Spacing: 400mm ctrs .
- Method of fixing: plugged and screwed.
Strips/ Boards: Free from decay, through splits and insect attack (including
ambrosia beetle damage, unless permitted in the appearance class specified).
Planed to a smooth surface free from rippling.
Wood species: Oak.
- Appearance class/ Grade: Clear graded .
- Profile: Tougued and grooved V jointed.
- Finished face width: 100mm.
- Finished thickness: 18.
- Moisture content at time of fixing: 9-13%.
Fixing: Secret nailed.
- Fasteners: 35mm oval lost head nails .
Finish: Clear varnish finish.
GENERAL/ PREPARTION
210
-
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
Moisture content of timber supports: 12-14%.
Methods of fixing and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified.
Protection: Protect from dirt, stains and damage using suitable coverings and
boards laid as the work proceeds.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K21
220
-
ODAC
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
General requirements prior to starting work specified in this section: Building
weathertight, wet trades completed and affected areas dried out.
Temperature and humidity before, during and after installing strips/ boards:
Maintained at levels approximating to those which will prevail after building is
occupied.
250
-
FIXTURES
Fixtures around which strip flooring is to be fixed: Installed before starting work
specified in this section.
260
-
DRYNESS OF CONCRETE/ SCREED SUBSTRATES FOR FLOORING

Relative humidity above substrate when tested with a hygrometer to BS 8201,
Appendix A (maximum): 75%.
Test points: All corners, around perimeter, and random points over area being
tested.
Drying aids: Turned off for not less than four days before testing.
270
-
STRIP/ BOARD MOISTURE CONTENT TESTING

Test regime and equipment: Submit proposals.
Test results: Submit record of tests and results.
FIXING/ FINISHING
330
-
FIXING BATTENS
General: Battens spaced evenly, packed or adjusted as necessary to give a true,
level, finished surface, and fixed securely.
335
-
TREATED TIMBER
Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and drilling: Treated with two flood coats of a
solution recommended for the purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.
350
-
FIXING STRIPS/ BOARDS

Strips/ Boards: Fixed securely to each support with flat, true surfaces free from
undulations, splits, hammer marks, scratches and protruding fastenings.
Movement of timber: Allowed for when positioning strips/ boards and fastenings
to prevent cupping, springing, opening of joints or other defects.
Heading joints (where permitted): End matched, butted and, where applicable,
positioned centrally over supports and distributed across the flooring to achieve a
random effect.
360
-
EXPANSION PROVISION
Expansion gaps:
Edges of flooring: Parallel to lie of strips/ boards and 10mm wide.
Ends of flooring: 10 mm wide.
Spacer blocks and debris: Removed before fixing skirtings/ cover fillets.
Intermediate expansion/ movement joints: Formed as recommended by flooring
manufacturer/ supplier.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K21
380
-
ODAC
FINISH TO LINING
Exposed fastener heads: Punched or set below surface and filled with stopping to
match wood.
Strips/ Boards: Sanded to give a clean, smooth and flush surface free from score
marks.
Finish: Clear Varnish
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K32
K32
ODAC
PANEL CUBICLES
PANEL CUBICLES
120
PANEL CUBICLES TO TOILET AND SHOWER AREAS

Product Reference Ultima
Manufacturer: Amwell Systems Ltd, Thundridge Business Park, Cambridge Road,
Thunbridge, Herts, SG12 0SU Tel +44 (0)1920 486793 Fax +44 (0)1920 486829
Or equal and approved
210
230
-
250
-
Duct Wall, Partition Panels, Pilasters & Doors:

- Core material: 19mm high density melamine faced moisture and shower
resistant chipboard .
- Finish/Colour to Partition Panels, Pilasters & Doors: To be agreed.
- Finish/Colour To be agreed.
- Edge treatment: 1 mm solid impact resistant PVC lipping to all visible edges of
panels. Colour matched with light textured panel facing .
Headrails: Powder coated aluminium P style head rail section with 1mm PVC
insert. Colour ref: Dark Grey.
Legs: Adjustable polyester powder coated aluminium pedestal, through fixed, with
integrated polypropylene floor shroud. Colour ref: To be agreed.
Ironmongery/ Accessories:
- Continuous slender powder coated aluminium hinge, with integrated clip in
cover and nylon adjustable bearing cams. Colour ref: To be agreed.
- Powder coated aluminium lock body and slider, with polished ABS face plate.
Colour ref: To be agreed.
- Polypropylene coat hooks. Colour ref: To be agreed.
Other requirements: Pilasters to be fabricated from 17mm thick high density
melamine faced moisture resistant chipboard faced both sides with 1mm thick
textured high-pressure laminate with vertical edges in Quadra 8 pencil radius,
with polyolephin enhanced core.
SAMPLES
General: Before placing orders submit representative samples of the following:
Items listed in clause 120.
Delivered materials/ products: To match samples.
PROTECTION
Doors and panels: Stack flat on bearers and separate by spacers where
necessary to prevent damage to or from projections.
Completed cubicles: Keep clean and dry, and adequately protect from damage
until completion.
INSTALLATION
Programming: Do not install cubicles before building is weathertight, wet trades
have finished their work, wall and floor finishes are complete, and the building is
well dried out.
Accuracy: Set out to ensure frames and/ or panels and doors are plumb, level
and accurately aligned.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K32
ODAC
PANEL CUBICLES
Modifications: Do not cut, plane or sand prefinished components except where

shown on drawings.
Method of fixing: Secure cubicle components using methods and fasteners
recommended by the cubicle manufacturer. Do not distort frames, panels and
doors.
Hinges: Adjust so that doors hang open or closed with CA approval.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
K40
ODAC
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS

TYPES OF CEILING SYSTEM

110
-
112
-
UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM Type C1

Structural soffits: Concrete Slab.
Ceiling system manufacturer: SAS International Ltd. 31 Suttons Business Park,
London Road, Reading. RG6 1AZ. Tel: 0118-929 0900, Fax: 0118-929 0902, or
equal and approved.
Product reference: SAS System 150.
Grid form: Non-interlocking.
Grid exposure: Concealed.
Access: Fully demountable.
Ceiling module: Generally 600mm x 600mm.
Ceiling soffit above finished floor level: Generally 2700mm.
Components:
Suspension system: SAS concealed clip-in Omega section.
Perimeter trim: SAS polyester powder coated aluminium extrusion TCA
0128.
Access units: SAS Zintec polyester powder coated steel ceiling panels with a
bevel edge and twin locating pips, tile RAL 9010 20% gloss. Panels to have a
plain unperforated face. Panels required to receive integrated services to be
supplied with factory formed rectangular apertures to appropriate dimensions
Circular, nonflanged, apertures can be provided for downlighters, sprinklers etc.
Colour/Finish: All visible components to be finished in Polyester powder Anti
Bacterial coating Ral 9010 with 20% gloss level. Coating to be applied at
manufacturers own facility with powder from a single batch and source of supply
to ensure best colour match. Specialist ceiling contractor is to provide prior to
commencement on site, 2 number samples (hand sized) of all polyester paint
components to be incorporated in the works with Manufacturers/Suppliers
certification of 1000 hour Salt Spray (Fog) test performance.
UNIT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM Type C2
Structural soffits: Concrete Slab.
Ceiling system manufacturer: SAS International Ltd. 31 Suttons Business Park,
London Road, Reading. RG6 1AZ. Tel: 0118-929 0900, Fax: 0118-929 0902, or
similar approved.
Product reference: SAS System 205.
Grid form: Non-interlocking.
Grid exposure: Concealed.
Access: Fully demountable.
Ceiling module: 250mm x 1685mm.
Ceiling soffit above finished floor level: Generally 2350mm.
Components:
Suspension system: Suspension bracket 50 x 100 x 1.6mm with J-Bar
suspension rail 38 x 35 x 1.25mm.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
ODAC
Perimeter trim: Closure Angle 35 x 100 x 0.7mm.

Access units: 1685mm x 300mm SAS Zintec polyester powder coated steel
ceiling panels with a bevel edge and twin locating pips, tile RAL 9010 20% gloss.
Perforation pattern 1522 with a nominal 10mm plain border. A fully enclosed
mineral fibre pad incorporating black acoustic fleece shall be sealed into the tiles
in order to achieve an acoustic absorption coefficient of 0.86.
Fixed units: 1685mm x 300mm SAS Zintec polyester powder coated steel ceiling
panels with a bevel edge and twin locating pips, tile RAL 9010 20% gloss.
Perforation pattern 1522 with a nominal 10mm plain border. Luminaire mounted
within site-formed opening centred on panel face. A fully enclosed mineral fibre
pad incorporating black acoustic fleece shall be sealed into the tiles in order to
achieve an acoustic absorption coefficient of 0.86.
Colour/Finish: All visible components to be finished in Polyester powder Anti
Bacterial coating Ral 9010 with 20% gloss level. Coating to be applied at
manufacturers own facility with powder from a single batch and source of supply
to ensure best colour match. Specialist ceiling contractor is to provide prior to
commencement on site, 2 number samples (hand sized) of all polyester paint
components to be incorporated in the works with Manufacturers/Suppliers
certification of 1000 hour Salt Spray (Fog) test performance.
GENERAL/ PERFORMANCE
203
-
DEFINITIONS
Ceiling: Items collectively constituting the ceiling surface i.e. infill units/boards,
access units and grid.
Ceiling system: Ceiling plus suspension system and integrated services fittings.
COMPONENTS
215
-
SAMPLES
General: Submit representative samples.
217
-
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Extent of system: Include hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members, primary
channels, perimeter trims, splines, noggings, clips, bracing, bridging, etc., which
are necessary to complete the ceiling system and achieve performance.
Materials: galvanised steel
Top fixings: as recommended by manufacturer.
Hangers: flexible.
Grid type: T15 main runner.
Finish: standard manufacturers.
Colour: white 010.
219
-
PERIMETER TRIMS
Type: Connect angle trim, finish to match main grid.
- Fixings to perimeters: plug and screw to masonry.
- Fixing centres (maximum): 450mm.
INSTALLATION
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
305
-
ODAC
SETTING OUT
General: Accurate, continuous, even, and jointed at regular intervals.
- Soffits: Free from undulations, lipping and distortions in grid members.
Infill and access units, integrated services: Fitted correctly and aligned.
Edge/ perimeter infill units size (minimum): Half standard width or length.
Corner infill units size (minimum): Half standard width and length.
Grid: Position to suit infill unit sizes.
- Permitted deviations from nominal sizes: Allow for.
Infill joints and exposed suspension members: Straight, aligned and parallel to
walls.
Suitability of construction:Give notice where building elements and features to
which the ceiling systems relate are not square, straight or level.
310
-
BRACING
General: Secure, with additional bracing and stiffening to give a stable ceiling
system resistant to design loads and pressures.
315
-
PROTECTION
Loading: Do not apply loads for which the suspension system is not designed.
Ceiling materials: Remove and replace correctly using special tools and clean
gloves, etc. as appropriate.
320
-
TOP FIXING
Building structure: Verify suitability.
- Concrete: Drill and insert suitable expanding anchors.
- Aerated concrete: Fix through from the top of the concrete unit and provide a
system of primary channels.
- Structural steel: Drill, or use suitable proprietary clips/ adaptors.
- Hollow structural members: Submit fixing proposals.
Cartridge or powder activated methods: Do not use.
360
-
380
-
INSTALLING HANGERS
Wire hangers: Straighten and tension before use.
Installation: Install vertical or near vertical without bends or kinks. Do not allow
hangers to press against fittings, services, insulation covering ducts/pipes.
Obstructions: Where obstructions prevent vertical installation, either:
- brace diagonal hangers against lateral movement; or
- hang ceiling system on an appropriate rigid sub-grid bridging across
obstructions and supported to prevent lateral movement.
Extra hangers: Provide as required to carry additional loads.
Fixing:
- Wire hangers: Tie securely at top with tight bends to loops to prevent vertical
movement.
- Angle/strap hangers: Do not rivet for top fixing.
Spacings: 450mm.
INSTALLING PERIMETER TRIMS
Jointing: Neat and accurate, without lipping or twisting.
- External and internal corners: Mitre joints.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
384
-
386
-
ODAC
- Intermediate butt joints: Minimize. Use longest available lengths of trim. Align
adjacent lengths.
Fixing: Fix firmly to perimeter wall or other building structure.
- Fixing centres: 450mm.
CONCEALED GRIDS
Grid fixings:
Primary support channels: Install level. Adjust level with supporting hangers taut.
Do not level by kinking or bending hangers.
- Wire hangers wrapped around primary channels: Wrap twice and tightly form
loops.
- Angle/strap hangers: Do not rivet for bottom fixing.
Splines: Locate between infill units to level adjacent units and to resist air
movement at joints.
Spring-tee grids: Do not omit primary channel.
INSTALLING INFILL UNITS
General:
- Cut perimeter infill units: Trim to full space between last grid member and
perimeter trim. Prevent subsequent movement.
- Deeply textured infill units: Minimize variations in apparent texture and colour.
In particular, avoid patchiness.
Concealed grids: Install infill units uniform, straight and aligned. Avoid dimension
creep.
- Infill units around recessed luminaires and similar openings: Prevent
movement and displacement.
387
-
UPSTANDS AND BULKHEADS

Vertical ceiling systems: Support and brace to provide alignment and stability.
High upstands: Provide support at base of upstand.
390
-
OPENINGS IN CEILING MATERIALS

General: Neat and accurate. Suit sizes and edge details of fittings. Do not distort
ceiling system.
395
-
INTEGRATED SERVICES
General: Position services accurately, support adequately. Align and level in
relation to the ceiling and suspension system. Do not diminish performance of
ceiling system.
Small fittings: Support with rigid backing boards or other suitable means. Do not
damage or distort the ceiling.
- Surface spread of flame rating of additional supporting material: Match ceiling
material.
Services outlets:
- Supported by ceiling system: Provide additional hangers.
- Independently supported: Provide flanges to support ceiling system.
396
-
CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

Support: independent
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
398
-
400
-
425
-
ODAC
- Independently supported luminaires: Adjustable suspension to line and level of

ceiling.
- Ceiling supported luminaires:
Surface mounted luminaires: Do not inhibit designed grid expansion in fire.
Modular fluorescent recessed luminaires: Compatible with ceiling module.
Extension boxes must not foul ceiling system.
Recessed rows of luminaires: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units,
unless mounted above grid flanges. Retain in place with lateral restraint.
Fire protecting/resisting ceiling systems: Luminaires must maintain protection
integrity of ceiling system.
Access: Provide access for maintenance of luminaires.
MECHANICAL SERVICES
Fan coil units:
- Inlet and outlet grilles: Trim ceiling grid and infill units to suit.
- Space beneath: Sufficient for ceiling system components.
- Suspension and connections: Permit accurate setting out and levelling of fan
coil units.
Air grilles and diffusers:
- Setting out: Accurate and level.
- Linear air diffusers: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units. Provide
for displacement of ceiling grid. Retain in place with lateral restraint.
- Grille/diffuser ceiling joints: Provide smudge rings and edge seals.
Smoke detectors and PA speakers:
- Infill units: Scribe to suit.
- Independent suspension: as required by Mechanical Engineer/Structural
Engineer
- Flexible connections: Required.
Sprinkler heads: Carefully set out and level.
INSTALLING INSULATION
Fitting: Fit accurately and firmly with closely butted joints and no gaps.
Insulation within individual infill units: Fit closely. Secure to prevent displacement
when infill units are installed or subsequently lifted. Reseal cut dustproof sleeving.
Width: Lay insulation in the widest practical widths to suit grid member spacings.
Services: Do not cover electrical cables not sized accordingly. Cut insulation
carefully around electrical fittings, etc. Do not lay insulation over luminaires.
Sloping and vertical areas of ceiling system: Fasten insulation to prevent
displacement.
INSTALLING CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS
Fire resistance to BS 476-20:
- Integrity/ insulation: 30 minutes .
Material: Fire Barrier 50mm thickness .
Ceiling void subdivision areas (maximum): 20 metres .
Fixing:
- General: Fix firmly to channels or angles at abutments to building structure.
- At perimeters and joints: Secure. Provide permanent stability and continuity
with no gaps. Provide a complete barrier to smoke and flame.
Joints: Form to preserve integrity in fire.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
500
-
ODAC
Service penetrations: Cut and pack to maintain barrier integrity. Sleeve flexible
materials. Adequately support services passing through the barrier.
Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting
performance of ceiling system.
Ceiling systems not intended for fire protection: Do not mechanically interlink
barriers with ceiling system.
ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY AND EARTH BONDING
Substantial conductive parts of the ceiling system: Electrically continuous and
fully earth bonded to carry prospective earth fault currents.
- Standard: To BS 7671.
Sequence: Complete earth bonding as soon as possible after completion of each
independent area of suspension system.
Testing: After completion of the ceiling system, associated services and fittings,
test conductive parts of suspension system required to carry earth fault current,
or used as bonding connections. Give notice before testing.
- Electrical continuity: Measure from various distant conductive points of ceiling
system and to earth bar in distribution board serving the area.
- Test current: Sufficient to indicate probable electrical performance under fault
conditions.
- Test instrument: Type providing a pulse of about 25 A at safe voltage for safe
duration, and indicating resistance in ranges 0-2 W and 0-20 W.
- Resistance of measuring conductors: Deduce from test instrument readings.
- Test readings: Record and certify. Add results to resistance of other parts of
the path forming the earth fault loop.
COMPLETION
520
-
USER INSTRUCTIONS
Contents: Include the following:
- Correct methods for removing and replacing infill units and other components.
- Cleaning methods and materials.
- Recommendations for redecoration.
- Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Limitations placed on subsequent
alterations and maintenance procedures, to ensure that their fire performance
is not impaired.
- Maximum number, position and value of point loads that can be applied to
ceiling system after installation.
530
-
SPARES
General: At Practical Completion supply the following: 1 box of each of the infill
tile types.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
ODAC
CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS
M10 CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS

TYPES OF SCREED
111
-
112
-
CEMENT:SAND LEVELLING SCREED TO REINFORCED CONCRETE FLOOR

Base: In situ concrete slab.
Screed type: Partially Bonded as clause 270.
Nominal thickness:.
- Thickness): 65 mm.
In situ crushing resistance (ISCR): As clause 335 Class condition B.
- Mass of test weight: Test to BS 8204-1, Annex D.
- Depth of indentation (maximum): 4mm.
Flatness/ Surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation when measured as
clause 346: 5mm.
Finish:
- Method: Trowelled as clause 540.
CEMENT:SAND LEVELLING SCREED TO REINFORCED CONCRETE ROOF
SLAB
Base: In situ concrete slab.
Screed type: Partially Bonded as clause 270.
Nominal thickness:.
- Thickness): 20 mm min 65mm max. Laid to 1:60 falls
In situ crushing resistance (ISCR): As clause 335 Class condition B.
- Mass of test weight: Test to BS 8204-1, Annex D.
- Depth of indentation (maximum): 4mm.
Flatness/ Surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation when measured as
clause 346: 5mm.
Finish:
- Method: Trowelled as clause 540.
GENERALLY/ PREPARATION
205
210
-
DESIGN LIFE OF SCREEDS

Duration: 50 years.
- Subject to reasonable wear and tear.
Location: All areas with floor screed.
Condition of use: Subject to correct loading and traffic usage throughout duration.
SUITABILITY OF BASES
General:
- Suitable for specified levels and flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces.
Consider permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of screeds.
- Sound and free from significant cracks and gaps.
Cleanliness: Remove plaster, debris and dirt.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
215
-
ODAC
Moisture content: To suit screed type. New concrete slabs to receive fully or
partially bonded construction must be dried out by exposure to the air for
minimum six weeks.
SURFACE HARDNESS OF BASES TO RECEIVE POLYMER MODIFIED
WEARING SCREEDS
General: Bases must restrain stresses that occur during setting and hardening of
wearing screeds.
Test for surface hardness: To BS EN 12504-2 using a rebound hammer with
compliance values selected from the following:
- Screed thickness
Rebound hammer value
15 mm or less
Greater than 25
Greater than 15 mm
Greater than 30
Report: Submit details of areas where base surface hardness does not comply
with these values.
220
-
PROPRIETARY LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS

General: Materials, mix proportions, mixing methods,: minimum/ maximum
thickness and workmanship must be in accordance with recommendations of
screed
manufacturer.
270
-
PARTIALLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION

Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1.
Base surface: Brushed finish with no surface laitance.
- Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a bond over
complete area.
Bonding coat: Slurry as clause 275 .
275
-
CEMENT SLURRY BONDING

Slurry type: SBR polymer modified cement.
Application: Shortly before laying screed, thoroughly wash clean the surface and
keep well wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in cement
slurry bonding coat of creamy consistency.
Screeding: While slurry is still wet.
BATCHING/ MIXING
305
330
-
AGGREGATE STANDARDS
Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1, class 42.5 or Portland blast furnace to BS
146, class 42.5.
Sand: To BS EN 12620.
- Grading limit: To BS 8204-1, table 1.
Coarse aggregate: To BS EN 12620.
MIXING
Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to
prevent excessive water being brought to surface during compaction.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
335
-
Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency. Mixes other than nofines must be mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a
free fall drum type mixer.
Consistency: Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
Ready-mixed retarded screed mortar: Use within working time and site
temperatures recommended by manufacturer. Do not retemper.
IN SITU CRUSHING RESISTANCE (ISCR)
Standards and category: To BS 8204-1, table 4.
- For testing of bonded screeds refer to Annex D.
- For testing of floating screeds refer to Annex E.
Class
conditions
A
B
C
340
-
ODAC
Service
depth
Heavy use
Normal use
Light use
Indentation
3 mm
4 mm
5 mm
ADVERSE WEATHER
Screeds surface temperature: Maintain above 5 C for a minimum of four days
after laying.
Hot weather: Prevent premature setting or drying out.
LAYING
345
-
LEVEL OF SCREED SURFACES

Permissible deviation: 10 mm from datum (allowing for thickness of coverings).
355
-
FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF FLOOR SCREEDS

Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 3 m straightedge (between
points of contact), placed anywhere on surface using a slip gauge to BS 8204-1
or -2 (or equivalent).
Surface regularity standards:
- SR1: 3 mm high standard.
- SR2: 5 mm normal standard.
- SR3: 10 mm utility standard.
392
405
GENERAL REINFORCEMENT
Type: To BS 4483, table 1: D49.
Installation: Place between the two layers of screed and lap edges minimum 100
mm. Tie securely with steel wire. Continue through daywork joints.
Corners: Avoid a four layer build at corners.
JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS GENERALLY
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
ODAC
Laying screeds: Lay continuously using wet screeds between strips or bays.
Minimize defined joints.
Daywork joints: Form with vertical edge.
428
-
HEATED SCREEDS
Screed bays: Coordinate with heating circuits.
Heating elements: Secure properly. Prevent displacement.
Laying: Lay carefully. Compact thoroughly around heating elements. Do not
damage them.
435
-
FORMED JOINTS IN WEARING SCREEDS

Temporary forms: Square edged with a steel top surface and in good condition.
Placing screed: Compact thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints
with no lipping.
440
-
CRACK INDUCING GROOVES IN LEVELLING SCREEDS

Groove depth: At least half the depth of screed.
Cutting grooves: Straight, vertical and accurately positioned. Select from the
following:
- Saw cut sufficiently early after laying to prevent random cracking.
Locate at door threshold positions only.
Sealant as clause 930.
FINISHING/ CURING
510
-
FINISHING GENERALLY
Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to setting
and hardening of screed material.
Prohibited treatments to screed surfaces:
- Wetting to assist surface working.
- Sprinkling cement.
520
-
WOOD FLOATED FINISH

Finish: Slightly coarse, even texture with no ridges or steps.
530
-
SMOOTH FLOATED FINISH

Finish: Even texture with no ridges or steps.
540
-
TROWELLED FINISH TO LEVELLING SCREEDS

Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps.
Trowelling: To a uniform, smooth but not polished surface, free from trowel marks
and other blemishes, and suitable to receive specified flooring material.
650
-
CURING
General: Prevent premature drying. Immediately after laying, protect surface from
wind, draughts and strong sunlight. As soon as screed has set sufficiently, closely
cover with polyethylene sheeting.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
ODAC
Curing period: Keep polyethylene sheeting in position for a minimum of: 7 days.
Drying after curing: Allow screeds to dry gradually. Do not subject screeds to
artificial drying conditions that will cause cracking or other shrinkage related
problems.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
ODAC
PLASTERED/RENDERED COATINGS
M20 PLASTERED/RENDERED COATINGS

TYPES OF COATING
110
-
140
-
210
-
CEMENT:LIME:SAND EXTERNAL RENDER TO NON INSULATED

BLOCKWORK AND CONCRETE Type EW1
Substrate: Dense concrete blockwork, F10 / 352 In situ concrete
- Preparation: To Contractors specification .
Cement:lime:sand mortar:
Undercoats:
- Mix (cement:lime:sand):1:1:5-6 .
Cement type:Contractors choice .
- Thickness (excluding dubbing out and keys): First 8-12mm and second 610mm.
Final coat:
Render: LW Rockshield External Wall render manufactured by Rockwool (UK)
Ltd. See section M21
Decorative coat: Silcoplast. Grain size 1.5 mm, colour white
Accessories: Beads, stops and movement joints .
CEMENT:SAND RENDER TO RECEIVE CERAMIC TILING
Location: internal washrooms .
Background: Dense concrete blockwork, F10 / 352
Preparation: To Contractors specification
Render coat(s):
Cement: Masonry cement to BS 5224, class MC 12.5 (with air entraining agent)
or, subject to approval, Portland cement plus an air entraining admixture to BS
4887:Part 1.
Sand: To BS 1199, type A.
Additional admixture(s): To Contractors specification.
Mix proportions (masonry cement:sand): 1: 3.5 to BS 5385-1
Thickness (excluding dubbing out): 19 mm (two coats).
Finish: Wood float as clause 778.
Accessories: stainless steel lathing, angle beads and render stops to clause 636.
LIGHTWEIGHT GYPSUM PLASTER:
Location: Internal faces to new blockwork and in situ concrete columns .
Background: Dense block as F10 / 352.
Preparation: Bonding agent.
Undercoats:
Thickness (excluding dubbing out): 11mm.
Final coat:
Thickness: 2 mm
Finish: Smooth as clause 777.
Accessories: Plaster angle and stop beads.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
ODAC
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKMANSHIP

418
CONTROL SAMPLES: Complete sample area, being part of the finished work, in
an approved location, and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding:
One panel of external render M20/110.
423
UNIFORMITY OF COLOUR AND TEXTURE: Once samples of coatings have

been approved do not change type or proportion of constituent materials. Ensure
that supplies of materials are sufficient to give consistent and uniform colour and
texture. Obtain each material from one source and mix different loads if
necessary.
433
PROPORTIONS FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS: Except where specified

otherwise, mix proportions for cement gauged plaster/render undercoat mortars
are to be in accordance with the following designations:
______________________________________________________________
Mix type
Mix designation
1
2
3
4
5
______________________________________________________________
Cement:lime:
1::3
1::4
1:1:5 1:2:8
1:3:10
sand
to
to
to
to
1::4 1:1:6 1:2:9
1:3:12
______________________________________________________________
Cement:
1:3
1:4
1:5
1:8
1:10
premixed
to
to
to
to
lime & sand
1:4
1:6
1:9
1:12
(proportion of
(1:12)
(1:9)
(1:6) (1:4)
(1:4)
lime to sand
given in brackets)
______________________________________________________________
Cement:sand
1:3
1:5
1:7
(using plasticizer)
to
to
to
1:4
1:6
1:8
______________________________________________________________
Masonry
1:2
1:4
1:5
cement:sand
to
to
to
1:3
1:5
1:6
______________________________________________________________
438
-
CEMENT: As specified in the type of coating clause(s).

Where Portland cement is specified Portland blastfurnace cement or Portland
pulverized-fuel ash cement may be used as an alternative.
Where Portland cement, Portland blastfurnace cement, Portland pulverized-fuel
ash cement or Sulfate-resisting Portland cement is specified use Class 42.5 or
52.5 material as defined by the appropriate British Standard.
All cements must comply with the appropriate British Standard and be licensed
under the BSI Kitemark scheme for cement.
449
-
ADMIXTURES:
Do not use unless specified or approved.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
453
-
ODAC
Do not use admixtures of any type with proprietary mixes.

Do not use calcium chloride or any admixtures containing calcium chloride.
MIXING:
Measure materials accurately by volume using clean gauge boxes. Proportions of
specified mortar mixes are for damp sand. Adjust proportions if dry sand is used.
Mix materials thoroughly to a uniform consistency and appearance using suitable
mechanical or manual means or, for proprietary mixes, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Do not overmix gypsum plasters or cement gauged mixes containing air
entraining admixtures.
458
CONTAMINATION: Do not allow contamination of one type of material by

another, or by any set material.
461
INITIAL SET: Do not use mixes after initial set has taken place. Do not retemper
or reconstitute mixes, unless permitted by the manufacturer of proprietary mixes.
466
SCAFFOLDING: Use independent scaffolding to avoid putlog holes and other

breaks in coatings.
469
CLEANLINESS: Protect thoroughly all existing work and approaches using

suitable boards, sheets, etc. Clean off all droppings on to finished work
immediately.
474
-
COLD WEATHER:
Do not carry out external work when air temperature is below 3C and falling or
below 1C and rising.
Take all necessary precautions to enable internal coating work to proceed without
damage when air temperature is below 3C.
Do not use frozen materials and do not apply coatings to frozen or frost bound
backgrounds.
PREPARING BACKGROUNDS
507
-
511
-
ACCEPTANCE OF BACKGROUNDS: Before preparation or application of

coatings ensure that:
Backgrounds are secure, adequately true and level to achieve specified
tolerances, free from contamination and loose areas, reasonably dry and in a
suitable condition to receive specified coatings.
All cutting, chasing, fixing of concealed conduits, service outlets and the like, and
making good of the background, is completed.
PREPARATION GENERALLY:
Remove efflorescence, dust and other loose material by thoroughly dry brushing.
Remove all traces of paint, grease, dirt and other materials incompatible with
coating by scrubbing with water containing detergent and washing off with plenty
of clean water. Allow to dry before applying coatings unless specified otherwise.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
515
ODAC
KEYING/BONDING: Prepare backgrounds as specified for the type of coating to

be applied. Methods other than those specified may be submitted for approval.
BACKINGS/BEADS/JOINTS
636
640
-
650
673
BEADS/STOPS FOR EXTERNAL USE:

Material: Stainless steel.
Corrosion resistance: At least equal to grade 304 of BS 1449:Part 2.
Manufacturer and reference: Expamet Building Products ref: 546, 547.
BEADS/STOPS GENERALLY:
Provide beads/stops at all external angles and stop ends except where specified
otherwise.
Cut neatly, form mitres at return angles and remove sharp edges, swarf and other
potentially dangerous projections.
Fix securely, using the longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line
and level, ensuring full contact of wings with background. Use mechanical fixings
for external beads/stops.
After coatings have been applied, remove coating material while still wet from
surfaces of beads/stops which are to be exposed to view.
MOVEMENT JOINTS:
Form joints in coatings to coincide with movement joints in background using:
stainless steel stop beads as clause 640 with sealant as section Z22.
Ensure that joints extend through coating to background.
Joint widths to suit structural movement of joint in background.
SERVICE CHASES: Cover with galvanized steel mesh strip fixed securely at 300
mm staggered centres along both edges.
PLASTERING
710
-
APPLICATION GENERALLY:
Apply each coating firmly to achieve good adhesion and in one continuous
operation between angles and joints.
All coatings to be not less than the thickness specified, firmly bonded, of even
and consistent appearance, free from rippling, hollows, ridges, cracks and
crazing.
Finish surfaces to a true plane, to correct line and level, with all angles and
corners to a right angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals
plumb and square.
Prevent excessively rapid or localised drying out.
715
ACCURACY of plaster 13 mm thick or more: The variation in gap under 1.8 m

straight edge (with feet) placed anywhere on the surface to be not more than 3
mm.
720
DUBBING OUT: If necessary to correct background inaccuracies, dub out in

thicknesses of not more than10 mm in same mix as first coat. Allow each coat to
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
ODAC
set sufficiently before the next is applied. Cross scratch surface of each dubbing
out coat.
726
METAL MESH LATHING: Work undercoat well into interstices to obtain maximum
key.
731
UNDERCOATS GENERALLY: Apply firmly, rule to an even surface and cross

scratch each coat to provide a key for the next coat.
734
CEMENT GAUGED UNDERCOATS: Allow to dry out thoroughly, but not too
rapidly, to ensure that drying shrinkage is substantially complete before applying
next coat.
737
GYPSUM/LIGHTWEIGHT PLASTERS: Apply final coat as soon as undercoat has

set, is firmly bonded to background and has developed reasonable suction.
777
SMOOTH FINISH: Trowel or float to produce a tight, matt, smooth surface with
no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel marks. Do not use water brush and
avoid excessive trowelling and over polishing.
778
WOOD FLOAT FINISH: Finish with a dry wood float as soon as wet sheen has
disappeared from surface to give an even overall texture.
RENDERING
810
-
APPLICATION GENERALLY:
Apply each coating firmly to achieve good adhesion and in one continuous
operation between angles and joints.
All coatings to be not less than the thickness specified, firmly bonded, of even
and consistent appearance, free from rippling, hollows and ridges.
Finish surfaces to a true plane, to correct line and level, with all angles and
corners to a right angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals
plumb and square.
Prevent excessively rapid or localised drying out.
815
ACCURACY of rendering to receive tiles fixed with adhesive. The variation in gap
under a 1.8 m straight edge (with feet) placed anywhere on the surface to be not
more than 3 mm.
820
-
DUBBING OUT:
If necessary to correct background inaccuracies dub out in thicknesses of not
more than 13 mm in same mix as undercoat. Total thickness of dubbing must not
exceed 25 mm unless approved otherwise.
In areas where thickness of dubbing will exceed 20 mm, first apply an approved
keying/bonding treatment.
Comb surface of each dubbing out coat. Allow each coat to set but not dry before
the next is applied.
840
UNDERCOATS GENERALLY:
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
ODAC
Apply first undercoat or dubbing out coat by throwing from a trowel.

Allow to stiffen and comb to provide a key for the next coat. Comb to produce
evenly spaced wavy horizontal lines, approximately 20 mm apart and 5 mm deep.
Do not penetrate through the coat.
Brush down each undercoat to remove dust and loose particles and dampen to
control suction before applying next coat.
856
FINAL COAT - PLAIN FLOATED FINISH: Finish with wood or other suitably
faced float to give an even, open texture. Do not apply water while working up.
Do not draw excessive laitance to surface (either by overworking or by use of
steel trowel).
880
-
DRYING:
Work in the shade and out of drying winds whenever possible.
Keep each undercoat and final coat damp for the first 3-4 days by covering with
polyethylene sheet and/or spraying with water. Hang sheeting clear of the final
coat where it is the final finish. Thereafter prevent from drying out too rapidly.
Allow each coat to dry out thoroughly to ensure that drying shrinkage is
substantially complete before applying next coat.
890
PROTECTION: Adequately protect newly applied external coatings against frost

and rain for the first 48 hours using polyethylene sheet hung clear of the face, or
other approved method.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M21
M21
ODAC
INSULATION WITH RENDERED FINISH

GENERAL / SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
120 SURVEY OF EXISTING WALLS: Before installation carry out a survey to

confirm suitability for application of external wall insulation system and submit a report
covering all relevant matters listed below:
The form and condition of the structural background
A schedule of repairs and / or additional works necessary to render the
background suitable to receive the system
A schedule of services, fixtures and fittings requiring removal to facilitate
installation of the system.
Proposals for treatment of potential cold bridges, e.g. reveals, concrete floor
edges
Any other information considered relevant.
210 EXTERNAL WALL INSULATION SYSTEM: Type EW1
Manufacture and reference: Rockshield External Wall Insulation System as
manufactured by Rockwool (UK) Ltd.
Or equal and approved
Structural background:
Insulation: Rockshield slab
Thickness: 50mm
Density: 140 kg/m
Minimum compressive strength: 40 kN/mm
Method of fixing: Adhesive & mechanically fix with 8 per sq. mtr
-
Beads / trims: Aluminium base profile / stainless steel corner bead

Render carrier / Reinforcement: Glass fibre (polyethylene coated)
Movement and expansion joints as located on drawings
Render: LW
Decorative coat: Silcoplast. Grain size 1.5 mm, colour white
INSTALLATION
410 Installation to be carried out by the system manufacturer, or by a contractor
approved by the system manufacturer.
420 ADVERSE WEATHER
Do not use frozen materials and do not apply materials to frost bound surfaces
Do not apply adhesive, mortar or render when the air temperature is at or below
5 C on a falling thermometer or below 3 C on a rising thermometer, or when the
temperature of the air or wall surface is above 30 C and the surface is not protected.
1
in
partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M21
ODAC
Maintain temperature of the work above freezing until adhesive/mortar/render

has fully hardened
Protect newly rendered surfaces against rain and snow by covering when
precipitation occurs.
Replace coatings damaged by rain or frost
430 CONDITION OF BACKGROUNDS: Before pre-treatment or application of
coatings ensure that backgrounds are structurally sound, adequately true and level, dry,
free from contamination by dirt, dust, efflorescence or other deleterious substances, and
in a suitable condition to receive specified coatings.
450 PREPERATION OF BACKGROUNDS:
Remove efflorescence, dust and other loose material by thoroughly dry
brushing. Remove all traces of paint, dirt and other substances
incompatible with adhesive by scrubbing with water containing
detergent and washing off with plenty of clean water. Allow to dry before
applying coatings unless specified otherwise.
460 CLEANLINESS: Carefully protect all existing work and approaches using suitable
boards, sheets, etc. Clean off any droppings from finished work immediately.
480 CURING:
Allow primer coats and undercoats to dry out thoroughly before applying
subsequent coats.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent newly rendered surfaces from drying
out too rapidly.
SUPPORTS FOR SERVICES / FITTINGS: Provide secure supports for
soil and rainwater pipe brackets and the like in locations shown on
drawings. Type as recommended by system manufacturer.
2
in
partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
M40 CERAMIC TILING

TYPES OF TILING
110
-
TILING TO TOILET WALLS: Type TIL 1

Tiles: Procelain tiles.
Manufacturer:
Architectural Ceramics (UK) Ltd
112
Ceramic House, Monarch Industrial Park

198 Kings Road, Tyseley
Birmingham
B11 2AP
United Kingdom
Tel: 0121 706 6456
Fax: 0121 706 7509
- Colour: To be confirmed by client
- Finish: Matt.
- Size: 200 x 200mm (modular).
- Thickness: 5 mm.
Background/Base: rendered blockwork or plasterboard
- Preparation: as required by manufacturer.
Bedding: solid.
- Reinforcement: as required by manufacturer.
- Adhesive: as required by manufacturer.
Joint width: 3mm.
Grout: As clause 855, 875 and 885. Brilliant White
Movement joints: as required by tile manufacturer.
Accessories: all necessary tile trim and movement joint trim.
TILING TO TOILET WALLS: Type TIL 2
Manufacturer: As above
Tiles: Procelain tiles.

- Finish: Matt.
- Thickness: 5 mm.
Bedding: solid.
Joint width: 3mm.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
112
ODAC
CERAMIC

TILE SKIRTING TO TOILET WALLS: Type SK3
Manufacturer: As above
115
-
Tiles: Procelain coved skirting tiles

- Finish: Matt.
- Thickness: 5 mm.
Bedding: solid.
Joint width: 3mm.
NATURAL STONE COVERING Type F1

Stone:
- Name (traditional): ______ .
- Petrological family: Granite.
- Colour: ______ .
- Origin: ______ .
- Finish: ______ .
- Supplier: ______ .
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discoloration, or other defects
deleterious to strength/ colour.
- Size: 400mm x 400mm.
- Thickness: 20mm.
- Slip potential:
Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum) to BS EN 14231:
Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134:
- Other requirements: ______ .
Background/ Base: Screeded concrete floor.
- Preparation: as required by tile manufacturer.
Bedding: solid .
- Reinforcement: as required by tile manufacturer.
- Adhesive: as required by tile manufacturer.
Joint width: 2mm.
Grout: proprietary waterproof tile grout to be used in all applications and
as required by tile manufacturer..
- Type/ classification: To BS EN 13888
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
120
-
122
-
ODAC
CERAMIC
Movement joints: as required by tile manufacturer

Accessories: ______ .
NATURAL STONE COVERING Type F2
Stone:
- Colour: ______ .
- Origin: ______ .
- Finish: ______ .
- Size: 1000mm x 600mm.
- Thickness: 40mm.
- Slip potential:
Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum) to BS EN 14231:
Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134:
- Other requirements: ______ .
Background/ Base: Screeded concrete floor.
Bedding: solid .
Joint width: 2mm.
NATURAL STONE SKIRTING Type SK1
Stone:
- Colour: ______ .
- Origin: ______ .
- Finish: ______ .
- Size: 100mm.
- Thickness: 20mm.
Background/ Base: Blockwork.
Bedding: solid .
Joint width: 2mm.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
125
-
125
-
ODAC
CERAMIC

NATURAL STONE RISERS TO STAIRS Type F4.R
Stone:
- Colour: ______ .
- Origin: ______ .
- Finish: ______ .
- Size: To suit stair rise.
- Thickness: 20mm.
Background/ Base: concrete.
Bedding: solid .
Joint width: 2mm.
NATURAL STONE TREADS TO STAIRS Type F4.T
Stone:
- Colour: ______ .
- Origin: ______ .
- Finish: ______ .
- Size: To suit stair tread.
- Thickness: 40mm.
Bedding: solid .
Joint width: 2mm.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
127
-
ODAC
CERAMIC

NATURAL STONE LANDINGS TO STAIRS Type F4.L
Stone:
- Colour: ______ .
- Origin: ______ .
- Finish: ______ .
- Size: 300mm x 300mm.
- Thickness: 20mm.
Bedding: solid .
Joint width: 2mm.
GENERAL
210
-
SUITABILITY OF BACKGROUNDS/ BASES

Background/ base tolerances: To permit specified flatness/ regularity of finished
surfaces given the permissible minimum and maximum thickness of bedding.
New background drying times (minimum):
- Concrete walls: 6 weeks.
- Brick/ block walls: 6 weeks.
- Rendering: 2 weeks.
- Gypsum plaster: 4 weeks.
New base drying times (minimum):
- Concrete slabs: 6 weeks.
- Cement:sand screeds: 3 weeks.
215
-
FALLS IN THE BASES

General: Give notice if falls are inadequate.
250
-
SAMPLES
General: Submit representative samples and prepare laid finished samples for
approval.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
PREPARATION
370
-
NEW IN SITU CONCRETE

Backrounds/ bases to be tiled: Remove mould oil, surface retarders and other
materials incompatible with bedding.
380
-
NEW PLASTER
Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter.
Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
390
-
PLASTERBOARD BACKGROUNDS
Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings and face to receive
decorative finish exposed.
400
-
BACKGROUNDS ______
Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings.
Surfaces to be tiled: Seal or prime if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
410
-
HACKING FOR KEY

Keying: Roughen backgrounds thoroughly and evenly to a depth of 3 mm.
Backgrounds to be keyed:
420
-
RAKING OUT FOR KEY

Soft joints in existing masonry: Rake out to a depth of 13 mm (minimum).
430
-
SPATTERDASHING FOR KEY

Spatterdash mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5
- Sand: Clean coarse.
- Proportions (cement:sand): 1-1.5:2.
- Admixture: Bonding agent used in accordance with manufacturers
recommendation.
- Consistency: Thick slurry with no segregation.
Application/ finish: Thrown.
- Thickness: 3-5 mm.
Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded
finish.
431
-
STIPPLING FOR KEY

Stipple mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
- Sand: Clean coarse.
- Proportions (cement:sand): 1-1.5:2.
- Admixture: Bonding agent used in accordance with manufacturers
recommendation.
Application/ finish: Brush applied to a deep close texture.
Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded
finish.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
438
-
PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR FULLY BONDED BEDDING

Surface cement:sand matrix: Remove to expose coarse aggregate.
Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding.
444
-
PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR PARTIALLY BONDED BEDDING

Surface finish: Brushed, with no laitance.
Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding.
450
PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR UNBONDED BEDDING - WITHOUT

SEPARATING LAYER
Surface finish: Smooth.
Surface preparation: Dampen lightly before laying mortar bed.
460
-
SMOOTHING UNDERLAYMENT
Type: Recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
Condition: Allow to dry before tiling.
FIXING
510
-
530
-
FIXING GENERALLY
Colour/ shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/ room are
not permitted.
- Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly.
Adhesive: Compatible with background/ base. Prime if recommended by
adhesive manufacturer.
Cut tiles: Neat and accurate.
Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/ base and tile backs.
Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to
give true, regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting
conditions.
Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing
tiles.
SETTING OUT
Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps.
- Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners.
- Joints in floors: Parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.
Cut tiles: Minimize number, maximize size and locate unobtrusively.
Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align.
Joints in adjoining floors and skirtings: Align.
Movement joints: Where locations are not indicated, submit proposals.
540
-
LEVEL OF FLOOR TILING

Permissible deviation in level from datum: 5mm.
550
-
FLATNESS/ REGULARITY OF TILING

7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge placed

anywhere on surface. The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles and
no gap should be greater than 3 mm.
560
-
LEVEL OF TILING ACROSS JOINTS

Deviation (maximum) between tile surfaces either side of any type of joint:
- 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide.
- 2 mm for joints 6 mm or greater in width.
570
-
MORTAR BEDDING
Bedding mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
- Sand for walls: To BS 1199, type A.
- Sand for floors: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading designation: 0/4 (MP) category 1 fines and between 20%-66%
passing a 0.5 sieve.
Batching: Select from:
- Batch by weight.
- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established
weight:volume relationships of the particular materials. Use accurate gauge
boxes. Allow for bulking of damp sand.
Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistence. Use a suitable forced
action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type mixer.
Application: At normal temperatures use within two hours. Do not use after initial
set. Do not retemper.
578
-
CRACK CONTROL REINFORCEMENT

Type to BS 4483:
Installation: Place centrally in depth of bed. Lap not less than 100 mm and
securely tie together with steel wire.
Corners: Avoid a four layer build at corners.
580
-
POROUS TILES
Tiles to be bedded in cement:sand: Soak in clean water for at least 30 minutes.
Fix as soon as surface water has drained.
590
-
COVED TILE SKIRTINGS

Sequence: Bed solid to wall before laying floor tiles.
600
-
SIT-ON TILE SKIRTINGS

Sequence: Bed solid to wall after laying floor tiles.
610
-
MULTISTOREY EXTERNAL TILING

Sequence: Start fixing at the highest level and work downwards. Protect exposed
top edges.
Copings, sills, etc.: Complete as soon as practicable.
650
-
THIN BED ADHESIVE - RIBBED (WALLS)

Application: Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of
approximately 1 m. Trowel to ribbed profile.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
651
670
690
-
710
720
-
730
-
ODAC
CERAMIC
Tiling: Press tiles firmly onto float coat.

THIN BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS)
Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of about 1
m. Comb surface.
Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly
onto float coat.
Finished adhesive thickness (maximum): 3 mm.
THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS)
Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.
Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly
onto float coat.
Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.
CEMENT:SAND BEDDING (WALLS)
Preparation: Dampen background.
Application: Apply floated coat: 1:3-4 cement:sand mortar bedding.
- Thickness (maximum): 10 mm.
- Finish: Equivalent to wood float. Before tiling allow to stiffen slightly.
Tiling: Without delay, apply 2 mm thick coat of 1:2 cement:fine sand mortar to
backs of tiles, filling keys. Press tiles firmly onto float coat. Tap firmly into
position.
THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (FLOORS)
Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb surface.
Tiling: Apply coat of adhesive to backs of tiles filling depressions or keys. Press
tiles firmly into position.
CEMENT:SAND BEDDING (FLOORS)
Mortar bedding mix: 1:3-4 cement:sand.
- Consistency: Stiff plastic.
Laying: Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed. Compact thoroughly to
level.
- Finished bed thickness: 15-25 mm.
Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with
adhesive. Press tiles firmly into position.
SEMIDRY CEMENT:SAND BEDDING (FLOORS)
Mortar bedding mix: 1:3.5-4 cement:sand.
Water content: A film of water must not form on surface of bed when fully
compacted.
Preparation: Dampen base.
Laying: Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed. Compact thoroughly to
level.
Tiling: Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat backs of tiles with a
neat cement slurry. Beat tiles firmly into position.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
MOVEMENT JOINTS/ GROUTING/ COMPLETION

805
-
SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS

Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.
Joint width: To match any structural movement joint.
Sealant colour: To match finish of tile.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.
855
CEMENT:SAND GROUTING MIX

- Joint widths of 6 mm or greater: To BS 1199, table 1, Type B.
- Joint widths of 3-6 mm: To BS 5385-5, table 2.
- Pigment: To match finish of tile.Mixing: Mix thoroughly. Use the minimum of clean water needed for workability.
875
-
GROUTING
Sequence: Grout when bed/ adhesive has set sufficient to prevent disturbance of
tiles.
Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris.
Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from
blemishes.
Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.
885
-
COLOURED GROUT
Staining of tiles: Not permitted
Evaluating risk of staining: Apply grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. If
discoloration occurs apply a protective sealer to tiles and repeat trial.
920
PROTECTION GENERALLY: Adequately protect and keep clean all completed

areas. Clean off any droppings immediately.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M41
ODAC
TERRAZZO TILING/ IN SITU TERRAZZ
M41 TERRAZZO TILING/ IN SITU TERRAZZO

TYPES OF TERRAZZO
120
-
125
-
IN SITU TERRAZZO FLOOR Type F7

Terrazzo:
- Thickness (minimum): 20mm.
Substrate: Concrete .
- Preparation for bedding: Wash thoroughly and wire brush to remove adhering
dirt. Apply bonding coat
Bedding:
- Mix (cement:sand): 1:34.5.
- Attachment to substrate: Partially or full bonded.
Movement joints: As clause 440, 445.
Finishing:
- Grinding: See clause 520
- Finish: Standard (80 grit size).
IN SITU TERRAZZO SKIRTING Type SK2
Terrazzo:
- Height: 100mm.
Substrate: Concrete or blockwork .
- Preparation for bedding: Wash thoroughly and wire brush to remove adhering
dirt. Apply bonding coat
Bedding:
- Mix (cement:sand): 1:34.5.
- Attachment to substrate: Partially or full bonded.
Movement joints: As clause 440, 445.
Finishing:
- Grinding: See clause 520
- Standard (80 grit size).
GENERAL
210
-
SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES
General: Suitably dry and clean for specified bedding method.
Existing substrates: Free from loose areas and significant cracks and gaps.
New in situ concrete substrates: Allow for initial shrinkage:
- Air drying after curing (minimum): 6 weeks.
- Other methods: Submit proposals.
230
-
SAMPLES
General: Submit representative samples for approval.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M41
ODAC
235
-
CONTROL SAMPLES
General: Complete sample areas, being part of the finished work, and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding.
238
-
ANTISTATIC PERFORMANCE
Electrical resistance of flooring upper limit:
- Average value (maximum): 2 megohms.
- Single point (maximum): 5 megohms.
Electrical resistance of flooring lower limit:
- Average value (minimum): 50,000 ohms.
- Single point (minimum): 20,000 ohms.
242
-
CEMENT
Standard: To BS EN 197-1.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I. or Portland slag cement, CEM II/ B-S.
- Strength class: 42.5.
Certification: BSI Kitemark scheme.
245
-
SAND
Standard: To BS EN 13139.
248
-
ADMIXTURES
Water reducing and set retarding admixtures: To BS EN 934-2 and compatible
with other mortar constituents.
LAYING
340
-
FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF FINISHED FLOOR

Deviation (maximum) of surface measured from underside of a 2 m straightedge,
between points of contact, and placed anywhere on the surface: 3 mm.
430
-
IN SITU TERRAZZO
Mixing terrazzo materials: Before adding water, mix in a dry state to a uniform
colour and with even distribution of different size aggregates.
- Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction.
Bedding: Compact thoroughly.
Terrazzo: Lay on layer of wet slurry and compact level with the dividing strips.
- Timing: To achieve effective bond to bedding.
- Slurry type: 1:1 Cement:fine sand.
Surfaces: Free from excess laitance.
- Aggregate: Regularly distributed with minimum amount of cement matrix
visible.
440
-
DIVIDING STRIPS
To manufacturers recommendations
Installation: Set to required finished floor level.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M41
ODAC
445
-
STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS.

Installation: Extend through terrazzo and bedding to base. Set to required
finished floor level.
520
-
GRINDING
Mechanical grinding: Use wet process. Dry process permitted only where it is not
practicable to use wet process.
Coarse grinding: Remove surface grout, correct unevenness and remove lipping.
- Residue and dust: Remove. Wash and rinse surface.
Holes: Fill with matching grout.
Polishing: Use wet process.
- Residue and dust: Remove. Wash and rinse surface and leave to dry naturally.
Protection: Cover flooring and keep free from traffic for at least two days.
COMPLETION
525
-
SLIP RESISTANCE TESTING

Test: To BS 7976-2.
Report: Submit. Include:
- Name of testing authority.
- Date of tests.
- Location of test.
- Temperatures of test surfaces.
- The slider material used on the pendulum tester.
- Slip resistance values in wet and dry conditions.
532
-
TESTING ANTISTATIC FLOORING

Preparation: Surfaces clean and dry.
- Detergents: Neutral pH value. Rinse off with clean water.
Electrical resistivity test: To BS 5385-4, Appendix A.
- Report: Submit at completion.
540
-
CHEMICAL FLOOR HARDENER

Excess hardener: Prevent drying out on the surface of terrazzo. Remove with
clean water.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M50
ODAC
RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING
M50 RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING

TYPES OF COVERING
150
-
155
-
LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING Type F6

Base: Screed
Preparation: As Clause 462A
Flooring roll: Linoleum to BS EN 548.
Manufacturer and reference: Forbo, 3 Sheldon Square London W2 6PS
Registered No: 258309 London
BS EN 685 class 43.
Width: 2000 mm
Thickness: 3mm
Colour: To be confirmed by client
Adhesive: to manufacturers recommendation.
Seam welding: Hot-welding as clause 680.
Finishing: as clause 820
Special requirements: Coved skirtings see below and to manufacturers detail.
LINOLEUM COVED SKIRTING Type SK6

Base: Concrete, blockwork or plasterboard
Preparation: As Clause 462
Flooring roll: Linoleum to BS EN 548.
Manufacturer and reference: Forbo, 3 Sheldon Square London W2 6PS
Registered No: 258309 London
BS EN 685 class 43.
Width: 2000 mm
Thickness: 3mm
Colour: To be confirmed by client
Adhesive: to manufacturers recommendation.
Seam welding: Hot-welding as clause 680.
Finishing: as clause 820
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
210
-
220
-
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease,
dirt and other contaminants.
Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth and
free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.
SAMPLES
Covering samples: Before placing orders, submit representative sample of each
type.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M50
ODAC
250
LAYOUT ROLL MATERIALS

- Setting out of seams: Before placing orders agree setting out for sheeting
types M50/ 150.
330
-
COMMENCEMENT
Required condition of works prior to laying materials:
- Building is weathertight and well dried out.
- Wet trades have finished work.
- Paintwork is finished and dry.
- Conflicting overhead work is complete.
- Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which materials are
to be cut are fixed.
Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.
340
-
350
360
-
CONDITIONING
Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating in spaces where
they are to be laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in an upright position. Unroll
carpet and keep flat on a supporting surface.
Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended by
manufacturer with time extended by a factor of two for materials stored or
transported at a temperature of less than 10C immediately prior to laying.
ENVIRONMENT
Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain
approximately at levels which will prevail after building is occupied.
Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision.
FLOORS WITH UNDERFLOOR HEATING
Commencement of laying: Not before a period of 48 hours after heating has been
turned off.
Post laying start up of heating system: Slowly return heating to its operative
temperature not less than 48 hours after completing laying.
PREPARING BASES
410
-
NEW BASES
Suitability of bases and conditions within any area:
Commencement of laying of coverings will be taken as acceptance of suitability.
430
-
NEW WET LAID BASES

Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisture content testing.
- Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325, Annexe A
or BS 8203, Annexe A.
Locations for readings: In all corners, along edges, and at various points over
area being tested.
Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75% relative
humidity or less.
440
SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE THIN COVERINGS

2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M50
460
-
ODAC
Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and other
blemishes. Abrade suitably to receive specified floor covering material.
SMOOTHING/ LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND
Selection: As recommended by covering manufacturer.
LAYING COVERINGS
620
-
COLOUR CONSISTENCY
Finished work in any one area/ room: Free from banding or patchiness.
640
-
ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY

Adhesive: Type to be as specified, recommended by the manufacturer or as
approved.
Primer: Use and type as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
Application: As necessary to achieve good bond.
Finished surface irregularities: Trowel ridges and high spots caused by particles
on the substrate not acceptable.
650
-
SEAMS
Patterns: Matched.
Joints: Tight without gaps.
670
-
BORDERS/ FEATURE STRIPS IN SHEET MATERIAL

Application: Cut strips along length of sheet to prevent curl.
Corners: Mitre joints.
680
-
SEAM WELDING COVERINGS

Commencement: Not before a period of 24 hours after laying, or until adhesive
has set.
Joints: Neat, smooth, strongly bonded, flush with finished surface.
720
-
DOORWAYS
Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.
780
-
TRAFFICKING AFTER LAYING

Covering types: sheet flooring.
Traffic free period: until adhesive is set.
COMPLETION
820
-
FINISHING TO LINOLEUM
Cleaning operations:
- Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. If necessary,
lightly scrub heavily soiled areas.
- Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage to adhesive.
Allow to dry.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M50
880
-
ODAC
Emulsion polish: Two coats of a type recommended by covering manufacturer.

WASTE
Spare covering material: Retain suitable material for patching.
On completion submit pieces for selection. Hand over selected pieces to
Employer.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
ODAC
PAINTING/CLEAR FINISHING
M60 PAINTING/CLEAR FINISHING

COATING SYSTEMS
110
111
112
115
117
-
MATT EMULSION FOR PLASTERED WALLS Type PT1

Product Reference: Low odour . Colour white or to clients choice
Surfaces: new plaster
Preparation: as clause 400
Initial coats: one thinned by 10% (White undercoat).
Finishing coats: two
MATT EMULSION FOR PLASTERBOARD WALLS Type PT2
Product Reference: Low odour . Colour white or to clients choice
Surfaces: Plaster board
Initial coats: one thinned by 10% (White undercoat).
SEALER TO WALLS Type PT6
Product Reference: Low odour clear sealer.
Surfaces: Concrete and blockwork
Initial coats: one
FLOOR COATING TO PLANT AREAS Type F5
- Product reference: Two part epoxy resin
Surfaces: Screeded concrete.
- Preparation: As clause 400.
Initial coats: To manufacturers recommendation
Finishing coats: Two to manufacturers recommendation
SKIRTING COATING TO PLANT AREAS Type SK5
- Product reference: Two part epoxy resin
Surfaces: concrete or blockwork.
- Preparation: As clause 400.
Initial coats: To manufacturers recommendation
Surfaces: concrete or blockwork.
Forms part of floor coating system to be applied to walls to a height of 300mm
above floor level
GENERALLY
215
-
HANDLING AND STORAGE

Coating materials: Deliver in sealed containers, labelled clearly with brand name,
type of material and manufacturers batch number.
Materials from more than one batch: Store separately. Allocate to distinct parts or
areas of the work.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
ODAC
220
-
COMPATIBILITY
Coating materials selected by contractor:
- Recommended by their manufacturers for the particular surface and conditions
of exposure.
- Compatible with each other.
- Compatible with and not inhibiting performance of preservative/fire retardant
pretreatments.
280
-
PROTECTION
Wet paint signs and barriers: Provide where necessary to protect other
operatives and general public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.
300
-
CONTROL SAMPLES
General: Carry out sample areas of finished work, including preparation:
Approval of appearance: Obtain approval of client before commencement of
general coating work.
321
-
INSPECTION OF WORK STAGES

General: Submit a programme for inspection:
Give notice: When each stage is ready for inspection.
PREPARATION
400
-
420
425
-
PREPARATION GENERALLY
To BS 6150, Section 4.
Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the
coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating.
Efflorescence salts: Remove.
Dirt, grease and oil: Remove. Give notice if contamination of surfaces/substrates
has occurred.
Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions: Fill with stoppers/fillers. Work well in
and finish off flush with surface. Abrade to a smooth finish.
- Water based stoppers and fillers: Apply before priming unless recommended
otherwise by manufacturer. If applied after priming, patch prime.
- Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming.
Surface irregularities: Abrade to a smooth finish.
Dust, particles and residues from abrasion: Remove.
Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease before coating. Prime
resulting bare areas.
FIXTURES AND FITTINGS
Before commencing work: Remove the following:
All signage, noticeboards, advertising boards, etc.
On completion of coating work: Refix.
IRONMONGERY
Before commencing work: Remove ironmongery from surfaces to be coated.
Hinges: Do not remove.
On completion of coating work: Refix.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
ODAC
471
-
PREPRIMED TIMBER
Defective primer: Abrade back to bare timber.
Bare areas: Reprime.
481
-
UNCOATED TIMBER
General: Abrade to a smooth, even finish with arrises and moulding edges lightly
rounded or eased.
Heads of fasteners: Countersink sufficient to hold stoppers/fillers.
Resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.
500
-
PREPRIMED STEEL
Defective primer, corrosion and loose scale: Abrade back to bare metal.
Bare areas: Reprime.
511
-
GALVANIZED, SHERARDIZED AND ELECTROPLATED STEEL

Pretreatment: Apply one of the following:
- T wash/mordant solution to blacken whole surface.
- Etching primer recommended by coating system manufacturer.
521
-
UNCOATED STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING

Oil and grease: Remove.
Corrosion, loose scale, welding slag and spatter: Abrade to remove.
Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution.
Primer: Apply as soon as possible.
531
-
UNCOATED STEEL - BLAST CLEANING

Oil and grease: Remove.
Blast cleaning:
- Atmospheric conditions: Dry.
- Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil.
- Surface finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade ______ .
Primer: Apply as soon as possible and within four hours of blast cleaning.
541
-
UNCOATED ALUMINIUM/COPPER/LEAD
Surface corrosion: Remove and lightly abrade.
Pretreatment: Etching primer if recommended by coating system manufacturer.
560
-
UNCOATED CONCRETE
Release agents: Remove.
570
-
UNCOATED MASONRY/RENDERING
Loose and flaking material: Remove.
580
-
UNCOATED PLASTER
Nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes: Scrape off.
Overtrowelled polished areas: Abrade lightly.
590
-
UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD
Depressions around fixings: Fill with stoppers/fillers.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
645
-
ODAC
POINTING TO INTERNAL LOW MOVEMENT JOINTS

General: Apply to junctions of walls and ceilings with architraves, skirtings and
other trims.
Preparation and application : As section Z22.
Sealant: Water based acrylic.
- Manufacturer: to be agreed with CA.
- Product reference: To Contractors specification.
APPLICATION
711
-
COATING GENERALLY
Application: To BS 6150, Section 5.
Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during
application and drying.
Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application.
Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by
manufacturer.
Priming coats: Of adequate thickness and to suit surface porosity. Apply as soon
as possible on same day as preparation is completed.
Finish: Even, smooth and of uniform colour. Free from brush marks, sags, runs
and other defects. Cut in neatly.
720
-
PRIMING JOINERY
Preservative treated timber: Retreat cut surfaces before priming.
End grain: Liberally coat, allow to soak in and then recoat.
730
-
WORKSHOP COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES

General: Apply coatings to all surfaces of components.
731
-
SITE COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES

General: After priming, apply additional coatings to surfaces that will be
concealed when fixed in place.
- Additional coatings:
- Components:
751
-
STAINING TIMBER
Primer: Apply if recommended by stain manufacturer.
Stain: Apply in flowing coats. Brush out excess stain before set. Produce uniform
depth of colour.
760
-
VARNISHING TIMBER
First coat: Thin with white spirit. Brush well in and lay off avoiding aeration.
Subsequent coats: Rub down lightly between coats along the grain.
770
-
EXTERNAL DOORS
Bottom edges: Prime and coat before hanging doors.
782
BEAD GLAZING: Joinery which is to be painted must have the primer and one
undercoat applied to rebates and beads before glazing.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
ODAC
800
-
GLAZING
Etched, sand blasted and ground glass: Treat or mask edges before coating to
protect from contamination by oily constituents of coating materials.
810
-
WATER REPELLENT
Application: Liberally flood surface, giving complete and even coverage.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z20
Z20
ODAC
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
110
-
FIXING GENERALLY: Use fixing and jointing methods and types, sizes,
quantities and spacings of fasteners which are suitable having regard to:
Nature of and compatibility with product/material being fixed and fixed to,
Recommendations of manufacturers of fasteners and manufacturers of
components, products or materials being fixed and fixed to,
Materials and loads to be supported,
Conditions expected in use,
Appearance, this being subject to approval.
121
FASTENERS for materials and components forming part of external construction

whether exposed or otherwise to be of corrosion resistant material or have a
corrosion resistant finish.
130
-
FASTENERS for materials and components:

Forming part of external construction but not directly exposed to the weather to
be of corrosion resistant material or have a corrosion resistant finish.
Directly exposed to the weather to be of corrosion resistant material.
140
FIXING THROUGH FINISHES: Ensure that fasteners and plugs (if used) have
ample penetration into the backing.
150
-
PACKINGS:
Provide suitable, tight packings at fixing points to take up tolerances and prevent
distortion.
Use noncompressible, rot proof, noncorrodible materials positioned adjacent to
fixing points.
Ensure that packings do not intrude into zones that are to be filled with sealant.
155
-
ELECTROLYTIC CORROSION:
Installation shall avoid contact between dissimilar metals in positions where this
will permit electrolytic corrosion. In external construction or other positions which
are subject to contact with moisture, stainless steel fixings or components shall
be fixed with stainless steel screws and both shall be of a corrosion resistant
austenitic grade. In the same external or moist conditions galvanised steel fixings
or components shall be fixed with galvanised or sheradised steel screws.
160
-
CRAMP FIXING:
When not specified otherwise, position cramps not more than 150 mm from each
end of frame sections and at 600 mm maximum centres.
Secure cramps to frames with matching screws as masonry work proceeds, and
fully bed in mortar.
170
-
NAILING:
Nails: To BS 1202.
In joints, use not less than two nails and opposed skew nailing unless specified
otherwise.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z20
ODAC
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
Drive nails fully in without splitting or crushing the material being fixed.
Punch nail heads below surfaces that will be visible in the completed work.
180
MASONRY NAILS: Do not use without approval.
210
-
PLUGS:
Proprietary types selected to suit the background, loads to be supported and
conditions expected in use.
Locate plugs accurately in correctly sized holes in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
220
-
SCREW FIXING:
Screws: To BS 1210.
All screws to have clearance holes. Screws of 8 gauge or more and all screws
into hardwood to have pilot holes about half the diameter of the shank.
Before using brass, aluminium or other soft metal wood screws precut the thread
with a matching steel wood screw.
Do not hammer screws unless specifically designed to be hammered.
Drive countersunk heads flush with timber surface, or not less than 2 mm below it
if they are to be stopped.
Washers and screw cups, where specified, to be of the same material as the
screw.
230
PELLETING: Countersink screw heads 6 mm below timber surface and glue in

grain-matched pellets not less than 6 mm thick, cut from matching timber. Pellets
to occupy the whole depth of the holes and be finished off flush with surface.
240
PLUGGING: Countersink screw heads 6 mm below timber suface and glue in

plugs. Plugs to occupy the whole depth of the holes and project from the surface.
250
-
POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS:

Do not use without approval.
Tools to be to BS 4078:Part 2 and Kitemark certified, and used in accordance
with BS 4078:Part 1. Operatives to be trained and certified as competent by tool
manufacturer.
Fasteners, accessories and consumables to be types recommended by the tool
manufacturer.
Ensure that operatives take full precautions against injury to themselves and
others.
Remove all unspent cartridges from the site when no longer required.
Apply zinc rich primer to heads of fasteners used externally, in external walls or in
other locations subject to dampness.
Use top hat section plastics washers to isolate cartridge fired nails from stainless
steel components fixed externally, in external walls or in other locations subject to
dampness.
510
-
ADHESIVES:
Adhesive types: As specified in the relevant section.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z20
ODAC
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
Surfaces to receive adhesive to be sound, unfrozen, free from dust, grease and
any other contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces
using methods and materials recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
Adjust surface regularity and texture as necessary to suit bonding and gap filling
characteristics of adhesive.
Ensure that operatives observe manufacturer's and statutory requirements for
storage and safe usage of adhesives.
Do not use adhesives in unsuitable environmental conditions or beyond the
storage period recommended by the manufacturer.
Apply adhesives using recommended spreaders/applicators to ensure correct
coverage. Bring surfaces together within recommended time period and apply
pressure evenly over full area of contact to ensure full bonding.
Remove surplus adhesive using methods and materials recommended by
adhesive manufacturer and without damaging surfaces.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z22
Z22
ODAC
SEALANTS
SEALANTS
120
-
130
-
160
-
SUITABILITY OF JOINTS
Presealing checks:
- Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant.
- Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable.
Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification. Inform CA if
joints are not suitable to receive sealant and submit proposals for rectification.
PREPARING JOINTS
Surfaces to which sealant must adhere:
- Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material, dust, oil,
grease, surface water and contaminants that may affect bond.
- Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing with
primer or sealant.
Primer, backing strip, bond breaker: Types recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
- Backing strip and/ or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint to correct depth,
without stretching or twisting, leaving no gaps.
Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage until sealant is applied.
APPLYING SEALANTS
Ensure that operatives observe manufacturers and statutory requirements for
storage and safe use of sealants.
Use equipment and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer and apply
within the recommended application life of primer and sealant, and the
recommended air and substrate temperature ranges.
Do not apply to damp surfaces (unless recommended otherwise), to surfaces
affected by ice or snow or during inclement weather. Do not heat joints to dry
them or raise the temperature.
Fill joints completely, leaving no gaps, excluding all air and ensuring firm
adhesion of sealant to required joint surfaces. Tool the sealant to a neat, slightly
concave profile unless specified otherwise.
Protect finished joints from contamination or damage until sealant has cured.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z31
Z31
ODAC
POWDER COATINGS
POWDER COATINGS
15
25
-
GUARANTEE: Work shall be carried out and administrative procedures shall be

followed in compliance with the terms of any guarantee offered. Only a guarantee
produced by the applicator (which may incorporate or be accompanied by a
guarantee given by the powder supplier) will be acceptable. A sample guarantee
shall be submitted with the tender.
Submit signed project specific copies on completion of work.
INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED WITH TENDER:
Name of proposed powder manufacturer with all relevant proprietary and
technical information including Agrement or equivalent certification.
Name of proposed applicator with all relevant proprietary and technical
information including Agrement or equivalent cerification.
Name of proposed testing organisation (with reference to clause 241).
Minimum coating thickness proposed.
Details of projects on which the proposed finish has been used.
Samples of each colour specified.
Details of any guarantee offered.
Test results showing compliance with test requirements of BS 6496/6497.
Full technical and proprietary details of proposed joint sealant.
Failure to provide this information may result in the tender not being considered.
45
COATING THICKNESS: For aluminium alloy components, coated in accordance

with BS 6496, the minimum local thickness of the coating shall be not less than
40 micrometers. For galvanised steel components coated in accordance with BS
6497, the minimum local thickness of the polyester coating shall be not less than
60 micrometers. Both local thicknesses shall be increased to such greater values
as may be recommended by the powder manufacturer for the purposes of his
guarantee, or to such greater values as may be required by any quality
organisation of which the applicator is a member for the purposes of his
guarantee. The minimum thicknesses should also be increased where required to
obtain the necessary cover for the colour selected and /or for the environmental
conditions prevailing at a particular location. The coatings shall be consistent and
dense and no clumping, seeding, pin holing, entrapped particles, dirt, porosity or
other surface defects will be accepted. No double coating of processed materials
will be permitted; coated materials rejected by the applicator or by the inspector
shall be stripped and recoated.
50
COLOUR AND APPEARANCE PROPERTIES: The properties of coated products

must conform to those defined by two agreed colour control samples approved by
the CA which show the lightest and darkest acceptable shades. These shall be
approved and deposited with the CA prior to commencement of any production
finishing. The gloss level of the finish shall be defined by the accepted samples
and that of the production finishes shall fall within a tolerance of +/- 7% of the
defined value unless otherwise agreed. Gloss will be measured with light incident
at 60 degrees. The surface texture which is acceptable shall also be defined by
the approved colour samples.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z31
55
120
211
-
212
-
221
ODAC
POWDER COATINGS
UNFINISHED EDGES: Shall be sealed with a sealant that will be minimally

visible in the final installation. The sealant is to be of a sympathetic colour to
match the coating.
POWDER COATING MATERIALS
Selected manufacturer: Submit details before commencement of powder coating.
POLYESTER POWDER COATING WORKING PROCEDURES FOR
ALUMINIUM
Application and performance of the finish shall comply with:
- BS 6496 for aluminium alloy backgrounds.
- British Coatings Federation: Code of safe practice - Application of
thermosetting powder coatings by electrostatic spraying.
- the coating thickness for each colour as recommended by the powder supplier.
- Powder coating manufacturers guarantee and any other additional
requirements.
POLYESTER POWDER COATING WORKING PROCEDURES FOR
GALVANISED STEEL
Galvanising, preparation of the galvanised surface and application and
performance of the finish shall comply with:
- BS 6497 for galvanised steel backgrounds.
- BS EN ISO 1461 for steel sections.
- BS EN ISO 10143 for aluminium alloy backgrounds.
- British Coatings Federation: Code of safe practice - Application of
thermosetting powder coatings by electrostatic spraying.
- the coating thickness for each colour as recommended by the powder supplier.
- Powder coating manufacturers guarantee and any other additional
requirements.
WORK DESCRIBED IN THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION: Shall be carried out
by a powder coatings applicator:
- Approved by powder coating manufacturer.
- Currently certified to BS EN ISO 9001.
- Comply with quality procedures, guarantee conditions, standards and tests
required by powder coating manufacturer.
- which has internal chemical stripping facilities.
- Each applicator to use only one plant.
Selected applicator: Submit details before commencement of powder coating.
230
-
CONTROL SAMPLES
Sequence: Prior to ordering materials for the works, obtain approval of
appearance for:
- Powder coated samples: Of various grades and forms of background metal to
be used, showing any colour, texture and gloss variation.
- Fabrication samples: Showing joint assembly, how powder coating is affected
and how any cut metal edges are protected.
241
-
INDEPENDENT INSPECTION ON SITE

Requirement: Where coating specification compliance at plant is unresolved, or
there is evidence of coating failure of components on site, contractors/ suppliers
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z31
ODAC
POWDER COATINGS
must commission an approved Independent Inspection Authority to carry out site

acceptance inspections.
Acceptance inspections: Carry out in accordance with BS 6001-2 with a limiting
quality of 5% where the probability of acceptance is 10%. Each component of a
fabricated unit will be assessed as an individual part for sampling procedures.
Components failing inspection: Remove and reprocess/ replace.
250
-
COMPONENT DESIGN
Condition of components to be powder coated:
- To comply with relevant recommendations of BS 4479-1, -3, and -4.
- Of suitable size to fit plant capacity.
- Of suitable thickness to withstand oven curing.
310
-
PRETREATMENT
Condition of components to be powder coated:
- Free from corrosion and damage.
- Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment and powder coating process.
Process: Clean, conversion coat, condition, rinse in demineralised water, drain
and dry components in accordance with the powder coating manufacturers
requirements and the pretreatment suppliers recommendations.
430
-
EXTENT OF POWDER COATINGS

Application: To visible component surfaces, and concealed surfaces requiring
protection. Coated surfaces will be deemed significant surfaces for relevant BS
6496/ BS 6497 performance requirements.
435
-
APPLICATION OF POWDER COATINGS

Surfaces to receive powder coatings: Free from dust or powder deposits.
Completion of powder coatings: Within 48 hours of pre-treatment of components.
Jig points: Not visible on coated components.
Curing: Controlled to attain metal temperatures and hold periods recommended
by powder coating manufacturer.
Stripping and recoating of components: Only acceptable by prior agreement of
powder coating manufacturer. Stripping, pretreatment and powder coating are to
be in accordance with manufacturers requirements and must be carried out at
applicators plant.
Overcoating of components: Not acceptable.
440
-
PERFORMANCE AND APPEARANCE OF POWDER COATINGS

Standard: To BS 6496/ BS 6497.
450
-
ALUMINIUM ALLOY FABRICATIONS

Units may be assembled:
- Before powder coating.
- From components powder coated after cutting to size.
- Where approved, from components powder coated before cutting to size.
Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.
Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour if
sealants are visible after fabrication.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z31
ODAC
POWDER COATINGS
460
-
STEEL FABRICATIONS
Unit assembly: Wherever practical, before powder coating.
Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.
Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour if
sealants are visible after fabrication.
470
-
FIXINGS
Exposed metal fixings: Powder coat together with components, or coat with
matching repair paint system applied in accordance with the powder coating
manufacturers recommendations.
480
-
FABRICATION DAMAGE REPAIR/ REPLACEMENT

Inspection: Check all components before delivery to site for damage to powder
coatings. Submit proposals for repair or replacement.
510
-
PROTECTION
Powder coated surfaces of components: Protect from damage during handling
and installation, or by subsequent site operations.
Protective coverings: Must be:
- Resistant to weather conditions.
- Partially removable to suit building in and access to fixing points.
Protective tapes in contact with powder coatings: Must be:
- Low tack, self adhesive and light in colour.
- Applied and removed in accordance with tape and powder coating
manufacturers recommendations. Do not use solvents to remove residues.
Inspection of protection: Carry out monthly. Promptly repair any deterioration or
deficiency.
530
-
SITE DAMAGE REPAIR/ REPLACEMENT

Damage to powder coatings: Rectify immediately damage caused during
handling and installation, or by subsequent site operations. Submit proposals for
extensive repair or replacement.
540
-
COMPLETION
Cleaning and maintenance of powder coatings: Carry out in accordance with
procedures detailed in powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees.
- Duration: From removal of protection until Practical Completion.
550
-
MAINTENANCE
Supply for compilation as part of the employers maintenance manual, sufficient
copies of detailed instructions covering cleaning and maintenance requirements
of finished surfaces.
Number of copies to CA instruction.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09200 - Lath and Plaster
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this Section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment, scaffolding and
materials and performing all operations in connection with internal plastering and external rendering.
1 01 01
01.0
Section Includes
Cement based plaster,
02.0 Cement-lime based plaster

03.0 Gypsum plaster
1 01 04
Related Sections
09250 Gypsum Board

05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies
07900 Joint Sealers
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM C 22 : 00
Standard Specification for Gypsum
ASTM C 28 : 00
Standard Specification for Gypsum Plasters
ASTM C 35 : 01
Plaster
Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum
ASTM C 59: 00
Plaster
Standard Specification for Gypsum Casting and Gypsum Moulding
ASTM C 61: 95
Standard Specification for Gypsum Keenes Cement
ASTM C 88: 99
Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of

Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate
ASTM C 305: 99
Standard Practice for Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes

and Mortars of Plastic Consistency
ASTM C 471M: 96
Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Gypsum and Gypsum

Products (Metric)
ASTM C 472: 99
Standard Test Method for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters

and Gypsum Concrete
ASTM C 587: 97
Standard Specification for Gypsum Veneer Plaster
ASTM C 631: 95
Plastering
Standard Specification for Bonding Compounds for Interior Gypsum
ASTM C 841: 99
Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring

1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM C 842: 99
Standard Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster
ASTM C 843: 99
Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster
ASTM C 847: 95
Standard Specification for Metal Lath, R (2000)
ASTM C 897: 00
Based Plasters
Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-mixed Portland Cement-
ASTM C 926: 98
Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster
ASTM C 932: 98
Plastering
Standard Specification for Surface-applied Bonding Agents for Exterior
ASTM C 1063: 99
Standard Specifications for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive

Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster
1 02 01 06
British Standards
BS 1191: 73
Gypsum building plasters
BS 1199: 76
Building sands from natural sources
BS 1369 -1: 87
Steel lathing for internal plastering and external rendering
BS 1449
Steel plate, sheets and strip
BS 1449-1: 91
Carbon and carbon-manganese plate, sheet and strip.
BS 1449-2: 83
Stainless and heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip
BS 1521: 72
Waterproof Building Paper
BS 3797: 90
Lightweight aggregates for masonry units and structural concrete
BS 4887-1: 86
Mortar mixtures Part 1: Air-entraining (plasticizing) admixtures
BS 6452-1: 84
Beads
Beads for Internal Plastering and Dry Lining; Galvanized Steel
BS 8000-10: 95
Workmanship on Building Sites: Code of Practice for Plastering and

Rendering
1 02 01 07
German Standards
DIN 18550-1: 85
Plaster; terminology and requirements
DIN 18550-2: 85
Plaster; plasters made of mortars containing mineral binders, application
1 02 02
Codes
BS 5262: 91
Code of Practice for External Renderings
BS 5492: 90
Code of Practice for Internal Plastering
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Admixture - material other than aggregate, cement or water, added to the binder to modify the
properties of the plaster or rendering.
Anhydrite - the mineral consisting primarily of anhydrous calcium sulphate (CaSO4) from which
the water of crystallisation has been removed by heating
Base coat - see scratch coat
Bead - profiled corrosion resistant lightweight metal section that is incorporated in plasterwork
and serves as a guide, former or reinforcement (e.g. angle bead, edge bead, depth bead, joint
bead etc.)
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Bonding agent - material applied to a surface to improve adhesion

Brown coat - the second coat of plaster applied in either two (2) coat or three (3) coat work.
To calcine - to alter composition or physical state by heating
Calcined gypsum - a dry powder, primarily calcium sulphate hemi-hydrate, resulting from
calcination of gypsum; without any added set retarder; also called plaster of Paris. This is
normally not used for internal plastering but for fibrous castings etc.
Catfaces - blemishes or rough depressions in the final coat caused by variation in base coat
thickness
Coat - the thickness of plaster applied in a single operation
Control joint - a designated separation in the system materials that allows for movement caused
by expansion or contraction of the system.
Crazing - the fracture of a finishing coat into a network of hair cracks
Dash-bond coat - thick slurry of Portland cement, sand and water, machine-sprayed or handdashed to an acceptable surface, to improve adhesion and a key for the subsequent plaster
Dry-dash or pebble-dash finish - a rough finish of exposed pebbles or crushed stone, produced
by throwing the aggregate on to freshly applied plaster or rendering coat.
Dubbing out - the process of filling in depressions in a solid background before the first coat of
plaster is applied
Expanded metal lath - sheet metal stretched to form open meshes to provide a plaster base
Final coat - see finishing coat
Finishing coat - the final coat in a two (2) or three (3) coat work
Floating coat - see brown coat and undercoat
Float finish - a smooth and level surface finished with a wood, cork or other suitably faced float.
Gauge box - a box, normally of wood or plastic, used for proportioning materials by volume
Gauging plaster - a calcined gypsum plaster used with lime for a finish coat
Gypsum - a natural mineral deposit and the raw material from which gypsum plaster is made
Gypsum lath - a gypsum board used as a base for application of gypsum plaster
Gypsum neat plaster - a calcined gypsum plaster without aggregate; common use is for base
coats. The addition of aggregates, if any, is required on the job.
Gypsum plaster - the generic name for a family of powdered cementitious products consisting
primarily of calcined gypsum with additives to modify physical characteristics
Keenes cement - an anhydrous gypsum plaster with a low mixing water requirement and special
setting properties; primarily used with lime to produce hard, dense finish coats or used for fibrous
plaster
Lath - material applied to walls and ceilings as a base for plaster, e.g. metal lathe or gypsum lath
Lime putty - a paste of water and hydrated lime
Mechanical key - grooves or the roughness of a surface which enables plaster to make a
mechanical bond with it
Movement joint - see control joint
Neat gypsum plaster - gypsum plaster that does not contain factory added aggregate (See
gypsum neat plaster)
One coat work - application of plaster in one coat that combines the properties of a first
undercoat and a finishing coat. One-coat plaster may be applied by hand or as projection plaster.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
The thickness shall be 8 -10 mm. If the background is level and of even suction, thickness of
plaster may be reduced to a minimum of 5 mm.
Perlite - a lightweight aggregate produced from siliceous volcanic glass expanded by heat.
Plaster of Paris - see calcined gypsum
Plaster or plastering screed - narrow band of hardened plaster used as a thickness and
alignment guide when applying a plaster coat.
Projection plaster - one-coat in which the plaster is applied by high velocity projection and
subsequently worked with tools to obtain a smooth surface finish
Rendering - external cement based plaster
Retempering - addition of water and re-mixing of plaster which has lost workability
Ready-mixed plaster - referring to material combinations that have been formulated and dryblended by the manufacturer, only addition and mixing with water
Rough cast - a rough finish produced by throwing on a wet mix containing a proportion of coarse
aggregate.
Scraped finish - treatment of the surface of the final coat, at the appropriate stage of setting, with
a steel brush or a similar professional tool to produce a scraped finish.
Scratch coat - the first coat of a plaster applied to a surface, raked and scratched to form a
mechanical key with the following coat
Setting coat - see finishing coat
Spatter dash - see dash bond coat
Spattered (spray textured) finish - the final coat is spattered on by a machine. The texture is
determined by the type of machine and the mix. (mostly proprietary material)
Set or setting - the hardening and hydration of a plaster
Smooth trowelled finish - a finish resulting from steel trowelling with a minimum of water after
the plaster has become firm. A smooth finish free of trowel marks, blemishes or other
imperfections
Straight edge - a rigid, straight piece of wood or metal used to strike off or screed a surface to
proper grade or to check the plainness of a finished surface
Texture - any surface appearance as contrasted to a smooth surface
Three (3) coat work - application of plaster in three (3) successive coats (two undercoats and
one finishing coat) with time between coats for setting or drying, Overall thickness shall be at
least 19 mm unless otherwise indicated. A spatter dash is not part of a three (3) coat work.
Trowel textured finish - treatment of the surface of the final coat, at the appropriate stage of
setting, with different tools.
Two (2) coat work - application of plaster that is formed of one undercoat (scratch coat) and one
finishing coat. Overall thickness shall be at least 13 mm unless otherwise indicated. A spatterdash is not part of a two (2) coat work.
Undercoat - first (scratch) coat in a two coat or first (scratch) and second (brown) coat in a three
coat plaster work. A spatter dash is not defined as an undercoat.
Vermiculite - a lightweight aggregate produced from micaceous material when exfoliated by heat
1 03 02
Q.C.
Abbreviations
Quality Control
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 05 Submittals
In compliance with conditions of contract and provisions of section 01300, the following shall be
submitted thirty (30) days before plastering and rendering works are scheduled to commence.
1 05 01
Product Data
Product data consisting of manufacturers product specification and installation instructions for
each product to be furnished and installed, including data showing compliance with the
requirements.
For initial selection purpose manufacturers colour charts consisting of actual units or sections of
units showing full range of colours, textures, and pattern available for each type of plaster finish
indicated.
1 05 02
Shop drawings
1 05 03
Samples
The Contractor shall submit samples of each item of adequate size and construction, in sets
showing full range of variations expected.
In addition, the Contractor shall fabricate mock-up panels 1,0 m by 1,0 m, at locations indicated
or directed by the Engineer, for each type of plaster finish and application required to verify
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate compliance with specification and
referenced standards.
Mock-up panels shall be erected in presence of the Engineer in full thickness using materials
indicated for final work and shall demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects including
colour, surface smoothness, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work.
Engineers approval of mock-ups shall be obtained before start of plasterwork.
Mock-ups shall be retained and maintained during construction in undisturbed condition as a
standard for acceptance or rejection of completed plaster work.
When directed by the Engineer, mock-ups shall be demolished and removed from the project site.
1 05 04
Quality Control Submittals
Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor(s).

Reports and records of Contractors internal Q.C.
1 05 06
Other Submittals
Manufacturers certificates of compliance, not more than 12 months old, showing compliance with
referenced standards, for ready-mixed plaster, and miscellaneous materials.
Manufacturers instructions for the application of ready-mixed plasters.
1 06 Quality Assurance
Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e. indicating day,
month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor or supplier if necessary.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than three (3)
days after testing and checking.
Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure tractability.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Arrangements shall be made in Contractors work schedule and time allowed for checking and
testing as indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least five (5)
years of documented experience in plasterwork and shall have successfully completed plaster
applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the project.
Installers shall be familiar with the material and application procedures necessary and shall be
skilled and trained.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Internal Quality Control
Contractors Internal Quality Control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to specification
and referenced standards prior to first delivery.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and compliance with
supply order and specification.
Checking of labels and the condition of material and components of each delivery, in particular to
ensure that:
- Materials and components are clean, undamaged and dry
- Where a surface is not to be decorated, sufficient supplies of consistent materials are
available to exclude colour variations.
- Plaster is of the right type for the type of background to which it is to be applied.
- Sands, if required, are clean and sharp.
- Metal lathings are of specified type and that they are corrosion resistant.
- All fixings e.g. nails, staples, tying, wire etc. are corrosion resistant and compatible with
the type of lathing.
Checking if plants and tools are in a clean and serviceable condition at least every week.
Checking the suitability of background provided for the type of plaster to be applied prior to first
application.
Checking of correct storage of material at least every week.
1 07 Delivery, Storage and Handling

1 07 01
Packing and Shipping
All packaged material shall be delivered in factory-sealed, unopened, and unbroken bags,
packages, containers or bundles.
Bulk materials shall be delivered in clean transport vessels, free of contaminates.
1 07 02
Storage and Protection
Different material shall be kept in different stocks.

Cement, lime, and ready-mixed plaster and all other material delivered in bags, packages or
containers shall be stored in a dry weatherproof room or shed off ground on a timber platform.
Bags shall be stocked away from walls not more than eight (8) bags high and stored so that
consignments can be used in the order of delivery.
Different sands and aggregates shall be stored on separate stockpiles on a hard clean base.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Lathing, beads, fixings, building paper and similar associated items shall be stored off ground and
protected from damage and contamination.
1 08 Project and Site Conditions

1 08 02 01
Dust Control
Dust on and near work shall be controlled by use of all means necessary if such dust is caused
by Contractors operations during performance of work.
1 08 02 02
Pollution Control
Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of ground with fuel, oil, chemicals or
other harmful materials.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
2 01 Basic Materials
2 01 01
Cement
Cement shall comply with ISO 680: 90, DIN 1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96
2 01 02
Lime
Lime for cement based plaster shall contain not more than 8% by weight of unhydrated oxide and
shall comply with one of the following standards:
ASTM C 206 or BS 890 or DIN 106 or an equivalent standard.
Lime for gypsum based plaster shall comply with one of the following standards:
ASTM C 206 or ASTM C 5 or BS 890 or DIN 106 or an equivalent standard.
2 01 03
Gypsum
Gypsum shall be calcinated gypsum with a purity of not less than 66% by weight of CaSO4 1/2
H2O when tested in accordance with ASTM C 471 unless otherwise indicated.
2 01 04
Aggregate
2 01 04 01
Aggregate for Gypsum Based Plaster
Sand shall be natural sand resulting from the natural disintegration of rock or from the crushing of
friable limestone or manufactured sand resulting from crushing and classification by screening of
rock, gravel or blast furnace slag in compliance with ASTM C 35, ASTM C 842 or BS 1199 type 1.
Grading shall comply with one of the following Tables of Annex 6: Table 1, Table 2, Table 3,
Table 4
Perlite aggregate shall have a weight of 96 -192 kg/m3 and shall comply with ASTM C 35 or
ASTM 842 C as appropriate or BS 3797.
Vermiculite aggregate shall have a weight of 96 - 160 kg/m3 and grading shall comply with ASTM
C 35 or ASTM C 842 as appropriate or BS 3797.
Other standards, approved by the Engineer, may be used as material references, provided that
material characteristics and durability are at least equal in performance to those standards
indicated.
2 01 04 02
Aggregate for Cement Based Plaster
2 01 04 02 01 General
Aggregates shall be natural sand resulting from the natural disintegration of rock or manufactured
sand resulting from crushing and classification by screening of rock, gravel or blast furnace slag
in compliance with ASTM C 897.
Aggregates shall be sound. The loss of weight shall not exceed 20% when sodium sulphate is
used or 15% when magnesium sulphate is used for a soundness test in compliance with ASTM C
88.
If lightweight aggregate are used they shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 35.
Other standards, approved by the Engineer, may be used as material references provided that
material characteristics and durability are at least equal in performance to those standards
indicated.
2 01 04 02 02
Base Coats
Aggregates shall comply with the gradation of Table 5, Annex 6

8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 04 02 03
ODAC
Finish Coats
Grading shall comply with base coat grading, except that all aggregate shall pass the 2,36 mm
sieve as indicated in Table 6, Annex 6.
2 01 04 02 04
External Rendering
Grading of sand for external rendering shall comply with Table 5, 6 or 7 of Annex 6.
2 01 06
Water
Water used in mixing, application, and finishing plaster shall be clean, fresh and suitable for
domestic water consumption and free of such amounts of mineral or organic substances that may
affect the set, the plaster, or any metal accessory incorporated in the work.
2 02 Miscellaneous Materials
2 02 01
Metal Lath
Metal Lath shall be fabricated from steel sheet and shall comply with the following:
01.0
Galvanized diamond mesh, 3,2 mm thick, in compliance with ASTM C 847,
01.1
paper backed,
01.2
minimum weight 1,35 kg/m2.
01.3
minimum weight 1,84 kg/ m2
02.0
847,
Galvanized flat rib metal lath, 9,5 mm thick, in compliance with ASTM C
02.1
paper backed,
02.2
minimum weight 1,60 kg/ m .
02.3
minimum weight 1,90 kg/ m2.
02.4
03.0
Galvanized (grade G 275) expanded, corrugated or ribbed metal lath, for
internal use, minimum weight 1,60 kg/ m2, in compliance with BS 1369.
04.0
Galvanized (grade G 450) ribbed lath, for external use, minimum weight
2,22 kg/ m2, in compliance with BS 1369.
0.5
stainless steel expanded metal lath, for external use, minimum weight 1,09
kg/ m2, in compliance with BS 1369.
06.0
stainless steel ribbed lath, for external use, in compliance with BS 1369,
06.1
06.2
All fixings for metal lath shall be made of compatible material.
2 02 02
Plaster Beads
Beads for internal plaster shall be manufactured from galvanized mild steel, steel grade Z2, zinc
coating grade G275 minimum in compliance with BS 6452 or an equivalent standard. The
nominal material thickness shall be not less than 0,45 mm.
Flanges and wings of the beads shall be perforated or expanded to provide a mechanical key,
with straight or scalloped edges.
Depth of beads shall be co-ordinated with thickness and number of plaster coats required.
Beads for external rendering shall be stainless steel with a corrosion resistance at least equal to
grade 304 of BS 1449-2 or galvanized steel with an equivalent corrosion resistance. The nominal
material thickness shall be not less than 0,40 mm.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
All fixings for beads shall be made of compatible material.
2 02 03
Strip Reinforcement
Strip reinforcement shall be smooth-edge strips of galvanized expanded metal lath, glass-fibre or
an equivalent material approved by the Engineer, suitable to reinforce joints between dissimilar
plaster bases.
2 02 04
Movement Beads
Control and movement joint profiles shall be one-piece type, prefabricated, and folded, in Mshaped configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges, protected with a removable tape on
plaster face.
Material shall be galvanized mild steel for internal plastering and stainless steel at least equal to
grade 304 of BS 1449 or galvanized steel with equivalent corrosion resistance for external
rendering.
For other type of movement joints see Section 5810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies.
2 02 05
Bonding Agents
Bonding agents shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
Bonding agents shall be a film-forming composition, suitable for brush, roller, or spray application
and shall be tinted to show by visual inspection where it has been applied.
Bonding agents shall be non-toxic and non-flammable.
Bonding agents for external rendering shall comply with ASTM C 932 or an equivalent standard.
Bonding agents for internal plastering shall comply with ASTM C 631 or an equivalent standard.
2 02 06
Pigments
Pigments shall be stable, unaffected by lime or exposure to light and shall have no adverse effect
upon cement or other constituents of the plaster or rendering.
2 02 07
Plasticizers
Plasticizers to improve workability shall comply with BS 4887 Part 1 or an equivalent standard or
may be a proprietary product certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
2 02 08
Building Paper
Building paper shall comply with BS 1521 or an equivalent standard.
2 03 Plaster and Plaster Mixes

2 03 01
General
All plaster shall be proportioned and mixed in accordance with referenced tables and
accompanying requirements unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Before first application, trial mixes shall have shown acceptable results.
Mixes shall be proportioned by volume, using measuring gauges of known volume with
successive batches proportioned alike.
Factory-prepared mixes (ready-mixed) shall require the addition of water only.
Admixtures shall be proportioned, mixed, and applied in accordance with written instructions and
directions of the manufacturer and when trial mixes have shown acceptable results.
Plaster mixes that has stiffened and lost workability because of evaporation of water shall not be
re-tempered and discarded off site immediately.
All plaster shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 03 02
Cement Based Plaster Mixes
2 03 02 01
Spatter dash Mixes
Spatter-dash mixes to provide a key on smooth backgrounds shall consist of one (1) part Portland
cement and one to two (1 - 2) parts of sharp, coarse sand mixed to a creamy consistency with
water.
A bonding agent to provide a mechanical key may be incorporated if appropriate and approved by
the Engineer.
The mix shall be kept well stirred to prevent segregating.
2 03 02 02
Cement Based Base Coat Mixes for Internal Plaster
Base coat plaster mixes (by volume) shall comply with Table 8 or 9 of Annex 6.
2 03 02 03
Cement Based Base Coat Mixes for External Rendering
Base coat rendering mixes (by volume) shall comply with Table 10 or 11 of Annex 6.
2 03 02 04
Cement Based Finish Coat Mixes for Internal Plaster
Finish coat plaster mixes (by volume) shall comply with Table 12 or13 of Annex 6.
2 03 02 05
Cement Based Finish Coat Mixes for External Rendering
Finish coat plaster mixes shall comply with Table 14 or 15 of Annex 6.
2 03 03
Gypsum Based Plaster Mixes
2 03 03 01
Gypsum Base Coat Plaster and Plaster Mixes
Base coat plaster shall be of type as follows:

01.0
Gypsum neat plaster in compliance with ASTM C 28.
02.0
Gypsum ready-mixed base coat plaster in compliance with ASTM C 28.
03.0
Premixed lightweight gypsum plaster in compliance with BS 5492
Aggregates when added shall not exceed proportions given in Table 16, Annex 6.
2 03 03 02
Gypsum Finish Coat Plaster and Plaster Mixes
Finish coat plaster shall be of type as follows:

01.0
Gypsum gauging plaster in compliance with ASTM C 28.
02.0
Lime putty gauged with gypsum gauging plaster in compliance with
ASTM C 28.
03.0
Gypsum Keenes cement in compliance with ASTM C 61.
04.0
Gypsum casting and moulding plaster in compliance with ASTM C 59
colour as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturers standard
colour chart by the Engineer.
05.0
Class B hemi-hydrate gypsum plaster in compliance with BS 1191.
06.0
Premixed lightweight gypsum plaster in compliance with BS 1191.
07.0
Projection plaster in compliance with BS 1191/BS 5492.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
3 01 General Examination
Before applying plaster, the Contractor shall ensure
- That backgrounds are sound, stable, and free from contamination and reasonably dry.
- That backgrounds are true and even in line and plumb. The plane tolerance shall not exceed 3
mm per m for solid backgrounds such as masonry, stone, insitu and precast concrete.
- That backgrounds provide an adequate mechanical key.
- That work of earlier trades have been completed.
- That all corrodible metallic surfaces are protected against corrosion.
If the background is considered to be unsuitable, the Engineer shall be informed in writing. In no
case plaster and rendering shall be applied until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3 02 General Preparation
Concrete fins or projecting joint mortar shall be removed or trimmed back even with the surface of
the background. Dissimilar materials e.g. metallic ties, reinforcing steel etc. shall be cut back at
least 3 mm below the surface and treated with a corrosion-resistant coating.
Form release agents shall be cleaned off, rinsed with water and surface allowed to dry.
Surface salts shall be removed by dry brushing. If the efflorescence is significant, the brushing
shall be repeated at 48 hours intervals.
On solid bases such as insitu- or precast concrete, where bond to plaster depends on its ability to
absorb water (suction) and surface roughness (mechanical key) one of the following shall be
applied as approved by the Engineer:
- Sandblasting, steel wire brushing, chipping or a combination of these.
- Application of a bonding agent suitable for exterior or interior exposure in accordance
with manufacturers written directions.
All surfaces shall be brushed down with a hard broom to remove dust and loose particles.
All existing work and components which are liable to be damaged during plastering and rendering
operations shall be protected.
If the building to be plastered is subjected to hot dry winds and not yet glazed, all openings shall
be screened with cheesecloth or similar materials to prevent rapid drying-out.
3 03 Application
3 03 01
General
All cement-based plaster and rendering shall receive a spatter-dash.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
All cement-based final coats shall be applied only to cement based undercoats, of comparable
strength, which have dried out thoroughly.
Plaster thickness specified shall be used for normal plasterwork unless greater thickness is
required for the purpose of overcoming variations in the background. Thickness given will not
apply to thin coat proprietary plasters, which shall be applied to the thickness recommended by
the plaster manufacturer.
Cement based plaster and rendering shall be wood float finished unless otherwise indicated.
Where plaster abuts other construction materials or openings, such as wood or metal door or
window frames etc., a separation shall be provided to produce a continuous small joint of uniform
depth and width. The joint shall be sealed with an appropriate sealant certified by the
manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
Small pipes, conduits, etc. in chases shall be isolated from plaster by covering the chase with a
strip of metal lathing securely fixed along each edge with corrosion resistant nails or screws at
least at 300 mm centres.
Where a plaster or rendering coat is continuous and joints are not expressed in the finish,
discontinuity in any featureless flat plane shall be avoided as far as practical. Day-work joints
(cold joints) shall be combined where possible into features or changes of direction.
Plaster screeds shall be installed on hand-applied plastered and rendered surfaces.
Plaster shall not be applied when ambient air temperature is above 35 deg. C. and in hot drying
winds.
External surfaces shall be protected with burlap or similar material after rendering has been
applied.
3 03 02
Spatter-dash
High suction bases shall be dampened with clean water prior to application of spatter-dash.
The spatter-dash shall be applied by dashing the mix on to the surface to give a complete
coverage with a rough texture of about 3 mm thickness. It shall be left untrowelled.
The spatter-dash shall be dampened periodically over one day until it has set and then shall be
allowed to dry.
3 03 03
Undercoat and Final Coat for Internal Plastering
Plaster shall be applied to an entire wall, ceiling, or soffit panel without interruption to avoid cold
joints and abrupt changes in the uniform appearance of succeeding coats.
High suction bases such as concrete masonry, porous clay bricks, etc. shall be dampened with
clean water prior to application of plaster or rendering. Low suction solid bases such as dense
concrete shall not be dampened.
Sufficient time shall be allowed between coats to permit each coat to set before the next coat is
applied.
The first undercoat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to form a good bond and
to cover the background completely. Before the coat has set, it shall be double backed with
material of the same proportions to bring the coat to the required thickness. After being flattened
with a straight edge the surface shall be left porous and sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical
key for the second undercoat or final coat.
Final coats shall be trowelled to a true and even surface free from slick spots, catfaces, and other
blemishes or irregularities.
Internal plastering shall be applied as one-coat, two-coat, or three-coat work as indicated. The
thickness of plaster shall comply with Table 17, Annex 6 unless otherwise indicated.
The surface of gypsum based final coats shall be steel trowelled finish and of cement-based final
coats wood float finish unless otherwise indicated.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 04
ODAC
Undercoat and Final Coat for External Rendering
Application of first undercoat shall be carried out in two operations. First, a tight thin coat shall be
applied using considerable pressure on the float. This shall be followed quickly by a second
application to bring the coat to the required thickness.
The thickness of the first undercoat shall be as uniform as possible and shall be not less than 8
mm and not more than 12 mm thick.
The surface shall be flattened with a straight edge and surface texture left open.
If the undercoat is to receive a hand-applied finish coat, the surface shall be scratched. The
surface shall not be scratched, however, when it is to receive a machine-applied finish, instead,
after being levelled with a straight edge, it shall be lightly rubbed with a wooden float.
When rendering on a background which has been coated with a bonding agent, the undercoat
shall be applied while the bonding agent is still wet unless otherwise indicated by written
instructions of the bonding agent manufacturer.
Before applying a second undercoat (if any), the first undercoat shall be brushed down to remove
any dust and loose particles and if dry, it shall be lightly and uniformly wetted. The second
undercoat shall be 6 - 10 mm thick unless it is to receive a machine-applied final coat. In this
case, the second coat (if any) shall be as thick as recommended by the manufacturer of the final
coat.
Before applying the final coat, the undercoat(s) shall be allowed to set and to dry out sufficiently
to provide an adequate key.
The suction of the undercoat(s) shall be reduced by uniformly wetting.
The final coat shall be applied from top to bottom unless otherwise required by instructions of the
rendering manufacturer.
For wood float finishes, the final coat shall be thinner than the undercoat and shall be applied with
a laying trowel.
Other surfaces of the final coat shall be applied in compliance with manufacturers written
instructions.
External rendering shall be applied as two or three coats to the thickness as indicated.
The surface finish of the final coat shall be as indicated.
3 03 05
Plaster Beads
Plaster beads shall be installed where indicated, and if not indicated, at locations as
recommended by the referenced standards and the plaster manufacturer.
Plaster beads shall fixed with dabs of plaster or corrosion resistant nails or screws at not more
than 600 mm centres.
Beads shall be fixed in such a manner that flanges and clips are completely embedded in the
plaster.
If dabs are used, they shall be of the same material as the base coat.
3 03 06
Metal Lath Fixing.
All wire ties shall be twisted tight and the ends of tying wire shall be bent away from the finish
face of the plaster.
All metal lathing shall be fixed so that it is taut and securely fixed.
Where areas of galvanized metal lath are damaged or at cuts, a coat of bituminous paint shall be
applied.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 07
ODAC
Dissimilar Backgrounds
At junctions between dissimilar solid backgrounds in the same plane which are to be plastered or
rendered, a metal lath or glass-fibre strip reinforcement or an equivalent reinforcement shall be
fixed over junctions or a separation at lines of junctions shall be formed by plaster beads as
approved by the Engineer.
If lathing is used, it shall be fixed securely over building paper with corrosion resistant nails or
screws. Over single junctions lathing shall be not less than 300 mm wide and fixed along each
edge at approx. 300 mm centres. The fixings shall be staggered. Over columns and beams and
similar constructions not wider than 450 mm, which are in plane with the surrounding background,
the metal lathing and building paper shall be extended in one width across the face of the column
or beam or similar construction not less than 125 mm beyond each side. Each edge shall be fixed
at approx. 300 mm centres.
3 03 08
Movement Joints
Movement joints shall be installed at locations indicated, and if not indicated, at spacings and
locations required by referenced standards and where a joint occurs in the background.
Movement joints shall be formed through the whole thickness of plaster or render by using
prefabricated joint profiles.
3 03 09
Plastering and Rendering to receive Tiling
Cement based plaster or rendering to receive wall tiling shall be one-coat work with a thickness
of 13 mm or two-coat work with an overall thickness of 25 mm.
In case of two-coat work, the first coat shall be scratched to provide a key for the second.
For surfaces where tiles are to be fixed with adhesive, the surface shall be wood float finished
unless otherwise indicated or required by the adhesive manufacturer.
3 03 10
Tolerances
Application of plaster and rendering to solid backgrounds shall produce a flat surface, which does
not deviate by more than 3 mm in any consecutive 1800 mm when a straight edge is placed
against it.
3 03 11
Cutting and Patching
Plaster and rendering shall be repaired, cut, patched, pointed up as necessary to accommodate
other work and to restore cracks, dents and imperfections.
Blisters, buckles, excessive crazing, dry outs, efflorescence, and similar defects shall be repaired
or replaced.
Plastered and rendered areas where the bond to the background has failed shall be replaced.
3 05 Adjusting and Cleaning

Any splashes and/or spillage arising from application of plaster shall be cleaned before they set.
All unused materials, containers, equipment, and temporary protection shall be removed and
floors shall be cleaned of all plaster debris.
All surfaces that have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work shall
be cleaned, repaired or replaced as required by the Engineer.
3 07 Protection
Adequate conditions shall be maintained to ensure that plaster work remains without damage or
deterioration. In particular, adequate ventilation shall be maintained in all interior areas with little
or no natural air movement.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 4: Method of Measurement

4 01 General
The quantities to be paid will be measured from drawings.
Plaster and rendering will be measured separately by type of plaster or rendering.
Work will be measured on the exposed surface.
Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding 0,5 m2.
Plaster thickness will be measured from the face of the solid backing to the outer surface
exclusive of texture variations
On metal lath the thickness of plaster will be measured from the face of the lath.
The spatter-dash shall not replace one of the specified number of coats.
4 02 Units of Measurement
Work measured by area (m2) will be classified as follows:
- Walls and columns
- Soffits, ceilings including sloping ceilings
- Sides and soffits of beams
Plaster beads will be measured by length (m) separate for each type.
Metal lath will be measured by area (m2)
Covings, cornices and similar decorative items will be measured by length (m)
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 5: Basis of Payment

5 01 General
Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material, equipment, tools, scaffolding,
storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, mixing, samples and mock-ups, co-ordinating work with
other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cutting and patching, cleaning and
protecting and including but not limited to the following ancillary works.
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused, shall be replaced at Contractors expense.
No payment will be made for unauthorised operations.
Material or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be removed and replaced at
Contractors expense.
5 02 Ancillary Works to be included in the Unit Rate

Plastering around openings, connections to adjacent components including sealing the joint.
Preparation of backgrounds.
Metal angle beads, stop beads and the like including working thereto
Dubbing out.
Suspension system, panels and framed members including method of fixing, and any depth of
suspension system
Support work and accessories for fittings including bridgings
Layout and treatment of joints and expansion joints, including extra material for laps
Edge trims, angle trims and fire barriers,
Work of any width, height or girth,
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Annex: Tables and Figures

6 01
Tables
6 01 01
Table 1: Grading Requirements according to ASTM C 35

Sieve Size
Perlite (by volume)

Max.% Min.%
Vermiculite (by volume)

Max.% Min.%
2,36 mm
10
1,18 mm
60
75
40
30
0,60 mm
95
45
95
65
65
30
0,30 mm
98
75
98
75
95
65
0,15 mm
100
85
100
90
100
90
100
95
Table 2: Grading Requirements of Sand according to BS 1199 Type 1

Sieve Size
Mass
6 01 03
Max.% Min.%
4,75 mm
0,015 mm
6 01 02
Sand (by weight)
Percentage by
5,00 mm
100
2,36 mm
90 100
1,18 mm
70 100
0,60 mm
40 - 80
0,30 mm
5 - 40
0,15 mm
0 - 10
Table 3: Aggregate for Gypsum Finish Coats according to ASTM C 842

Perlite, Natural and Manufactured Sand
Sieve Size
Volume
Max.% Min.%
Weight
Max.% Min.%
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0,850 mm
0,600 mm
10
0,5
0,150 mm
100
40
100
40
0,075 mm
100
70
100
70
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 01 04
ASTM C 842
ODAC
Table 4: Sand for Lime-Putty Gypsum Gauged Sand Float Finish according to
Sieve Size
Weight
Max.%
6 01 05
Min.%
1,18 mm
0,60 mm
50
20
0,30 mm
70
50
0,15 mm
100
80
Table 5: Sand for Base Coats according to ASTM C 897

Sieve Size
Weight
Max.%
Min.%
6 01 06
4,75 mm
2,36 mm
10
1,18 mm
40
10
0,60 mm
65
30
0,30 mm
90
70
0,15 mm
100
95
Table 6: Sand for Finish Coats according to ASTM C 897

Sieve Size
Weight
Max. %
Min.%
6 01 07
4,75 mm
2,36 mm
1,18 mm
40
10
0,60 mm
65
30
0,30 mm
90
70
0,15 mm
100
95
Table 7:Grading of Sand for External Rendering according to BS 1199 Type 1

Sieve Size
Percentage by Mass
5,00 mm
100
2,36 mm
90 100
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 01 08
ODAC
1,18 mm
70 100
0,60 mm
40 - 80
0,30 mm
5 - 40
0,15 mm
0 - 10
Table 8: Base Coat Propotions in Compliance with ASTM C 926

Cementious Material
Sand
Portland Cement
6 01 09
6 01 10
Lime
1.Coat
2.Coat
1. and 2. Coat
0 to 3/4
2 1/2 to 4
3 to 5
3 to 4
3/4 to 1 1/2
2 1/2 to 4
3 to 5
2 to 3
Table 9: Base Coat Proportions in Compliance with BS 5492

Portland Cement
Lime
Sand
5 to 6
8 to 9
Table 10: Base Coat Proportions in Compliance with ASTM C 926

Cementious Material
Sand
See Table 8
6 01 11
Table11: Base coat Proportions in Compliance with BS 5262

Portland Cement
1
Lime
Sand
1/4
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 01 12
C 926
ODAC
1/2
4 to 4 1/2
5 to 6
8 to 9
Table 12: Finish Coat Cement Based Plaster Mixes in Compliance with ASTM
Cementious Materials
Portland Cement
Aggregate
Lime
Sand
Perlite*
3/4 to 1 1/2
1 1/2 to 2
2 1/2
* Recommended only over base coat plaster containing perlite aggregate

and areas not subject to impact and abrasion
6 01 13
Table 13: Finish Coat Plaster Mixes in Compliance wit BS 5492

Portland Cement
Lime
Sand
1/4
1/2
4 to 4 1/2
5 to 6
8 to 9
3 to 4
5 to 6
7 to 8
* Using a plasticizer
6 01 14
Table 14: Finish Coat Rendering Mixes in Compliance with ASTM C 926.
Cementious Materials
Portland Cement
Aggregate
Lime
Sand
Perlite*
See Table 12
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 01 15
ODAC
Table 15: Finish Coat Rendering Mixes in Compliance with BS 5262

Cement
Lime
Sand
1/4
1/2
4 to 4 1/2
5 to 6
8 to 9
10 to 12
3 to 4
5 to 6
7 to 8
* Using a plasticizer
6 01 16
Table 16: Aggregate Proportions for Gypsum Base Coat Plaster complying
with ASTM C 28
Aggregates by Volume
Plaster Base
Sand
Perlite or Vermiculite
Over Unit Masonry

Two-Coat Work
Base Coat
2 1/2
Three-Coat Work
Scratch Coat
Brown Coat
2 1/2
Scratch Coat
Brown Coat
2 1/2
Or
Scratch and Brown Coats
Over Metal Lath

Three-Coat Work
Or
Scratch and Brown Coat
Over Monolithic Concrete
See Unit Masonry, provided that the

Background is coated with a bonding
agent!
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 01 17
ODAC
Table 17: Thickness of Internal Plaster (BS 8000-10)

Type of Work
Two-coat work using

cement, cement-lime, or
gypsum based plaster
Background
Overall Thickness
Solid other than concrete

------------------------------------------
13 mm exclusive keys or
dubbing out.
10 mm
Concrete exclusive key
Three- coat work using

cement, cement-lime or
gypsum based plaster
Solid
19 mm exclusive keys or
dubbing out
One-coat work using

gypsum based
projection plaster
Walls and soffits of dense

concrete and bricks when
recommended by the
plaster manufacturer
5 - 10 mm
Thin wall plaster
As recommended by the
manufacturer
As recommended by the
manufacturer
All types of plaster
Metal lathing
13 mm from face of
lathing
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09250 - Gypsum Board
Part 1:
General
1 01
Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and
materials, and performing all operations in connection with production and installation
of gypsum plasterboard and the relevant metal support systems.
1 01 01
Section includes
01.0 Dry-Lining
02.0 Dry-wall Partition
03.0 Suspended Ceiling
1 01 04
Related Sections
07250 Fireproofing
1 02
References
1 02 01
1 02 01 06
British Standards
BS 476 BS 476 - 6: 89
BS 476 - 7: 87(93)
1 02 01 07
1 02 03
Fire tests on building materials and structures

Method of test for fire propagation for products
Method for classification of the surface spread of flame of
products
German Standards
DIN 1168 - 1: 86
Building plasters; term and definition, types and application,

delivery and marking
DIN 18180: 89
Gypsum plasterboard; types, requirements, testing.
DIN 18181: 90
Dry lining and partitioning using gypsum plasterboard
DIN 18183: 88
Prefabricated gypsum plasterboard metal stud partitions
Other References
UL 263
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM A 580
(1991b) Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Wire.
ASTM A 853
(1991) Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use.
ASTM C 36
(1993) Gypsum Wallboard.
ASTM C 79
(1993) Gypsum Sheathing Board.
ASTM C 442
(1992) Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard.

1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM C 475
Board.
(1989) Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum
ASTM C 514
(1990) Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board.
ASTM C 557
(1993) Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood

Framing.
ASTM C 630
(1993) Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
ASTM C 645
(1992) Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and

Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
ASTM C 754
(1988) Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive ScrewAttached Gypsum.
ASTM C 840
(1988) Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
ASTM C 931
(1992) Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board.
ASTM C 955
(1993) Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners

(Track), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum
Board and Metal Plaster Bases.
ASTM C 960
(1991) Predecorated Gypsum Board.
ASTM C 1002
(1993) Steel Drill Screws for the application of Gypsum Board or

Metal Plaster Bases.
FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

FM P8016
(1993) Specification Tested Products Guide.

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
FM QQ-N-281
(Rev D; Am 2) Nickel-Copper Alloy Bar, Rod, Plate, Sheet, Strip,

Wire, Forgings and Structural and Special Shaped Sections.
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)
GA 600(1992)
Fire Resistance Design Manual.

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL-05
(1993; supple) Fire Resistance Directory.
1 03
Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Dry lining - cladding of a solid wall with prefabricated boards
Dry-wall - wall consisting of a metal support system, sheathed both sides with
prefabricated boards
Edges - paper covered longitudinal sides
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Ends - cut sides transverse to the edges

Face - the surface on which the paper extends continuously to cover the edges
Furring channels - steel profiles running crosswise to main carriers, mechanically
fastened to it, onto which the plasterboard is then screwed
Gypsum plasterboard - building board consisting of a core encased in and firmly
bonded to paper liners selected to suit the particular application
Gypsum wallboard - building board consisting of a core encased in and firmly
bonded to paper liners with a finish suitable for painting or wallpapering
Length - dimension of the board parallel to the paper covered edges
Main (intermediate) carriers - row of steel profiles for suspended ceilings which is
fixed by hangers to the substructure
Runners - U-shaped steel profiles used as floor and ceiling members for dry walls;
main carriers of T-grid suspended ceiling systems are also called runners
Studs - C-shaped steel profiles used as vertical support members for dry walls
1 03 02
Abbreviations
max.
min.
NFPA
Rw
STC
UL
1 05
maximum
minimum
National Fire protection Association (US)
Sound Transmission Value (German)
Sound Transmission Class (US)
Underwriters Laboratories (US)
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification
section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of gypsum wallboard, gypsum tiles and metal
support system for walls and ceilings specified, including label compliance, fireratings, finishes and maintenance instructions.
Provide manufacturers certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance with
referenced standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide samples for initial selection purposes for all gypsum wallboard, gypsum tiles
and metal support system for walls and ceilings.
1 05 04

Documented experience of contractors site supervisor(s)
Reports and records of contractors Internal Quality Control.
Reports and records of contractors External Quality Control.
1 06
Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers
regularly engaged in manufacture of gypsum plasterboards, gypsum ceiling tiles and
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
steel profiles for support systems and with a history of successful production
acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work .
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01

Contractors internal quality control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to
specification and referenced standards prior to assembly or installation.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and
specification.
1 07
Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 07 01

Protect materials during delivery to comply with manufacturers directions.
1 07 02

Store materials at building site strictly according to manufacturers instructions. Protect
it against humidity, dust and dirt. Take special care for ceiling tiles, since they will be
delivered with finish surface.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2:
Products
2 01
Gypsum Plasterboard
2 01 01
Standard Gypsum Wallboard

Gypsum wallboard used for building construction shall meet the requirements of
DIN 18180 or an equivalent Standard. It shall consist of a core of gypsum, encased in
and firmly bonded to paper liners. It shall be available in thickness of 9.5, 12.5, 15,
and 18 mm. Edges shall be square, bevelled or tapered.
2 01 02
Fire Resistant Gypsum Wallboard

Fire resistant gypsum wallboard used for building construction shall meet the
requirements of DIN 4102 Part 1, Class A2 (non-combustible) or an equivalent
Standard. Provide a certificate! It shall consist of a core of gypsum, enriched with
fibres, encased in and firmly bonded to impregnated paper liners. It shall be available
in thickness of 12.5, 15, and 18 mm. Edges shall be square, bevelled or tapered.
2 01 03
Impregnated Gypsum Wallboard

Impregnated gypsum wallboard used for building construction shall meet the
requirements of DIN 18180 or an equivalent Standard. It shall consist of a core of
impregnated gypsum, encased in and firmly bonded to impregnated paper liners. It
shall be available in thickness of 9.5, 12.5, 15, and 18 mm. Edges shall be square,
bevelled or tapered.
2 01 04
Impregnated, Fire Retardant Gypsum Wallboard

Gypsum wallboard meeting both requirements - see paragraphs above.
2 02
Steel Profiles
Steel profiles for studs, runners, furring channels, main carriers (intermediate
channels) etc. shall be made of steel complying with ASTM A 525M and A 527M or
an equivalent Standard. Galvanising shall be G90 (275g/m2).
2 03
Mineral Fibre Insulation

Mineral fibre insulation used for dry walls shall not breed or sustain mold, fungus,
bacteria or rodents. It shall be non-combustible when tested according to ASTM E84.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 3:
Execution
3 01
General Examination
ODAC
Examine structure where work of this section will be installed. Make sure that
installation work, such as electrical, heating, ventilating and plumbing work, which has
to be carried out before the Works specified herein, is complete. Correct conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02
General Preparation
Verify that materials to be used for the works are complying with requirements in
specifications and schedules.
3 03
Installation
3 03 01
Dry Lining
Independent dry lining is used where space is needed for installation of ducts,
pipework etc., to provide shafts between the different floors. Fire rating is an important
matter for this type of installation.
For jointless surfaces use tapered gypsum wallboards. Fill joints after fixing with
specially formulated gypsum jointing compound, complying with DIN 1168 - 1, or
another suitable compound and reinforce with jointing tape. Also fill holes of screws to
receive a flat and smooth surface, ready for painting or application of wallpaper. Any
cut-outs in impregnated boards shall be sealed with elastic joint filler after installation
of pipework. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
3 03 01 01
Dry Lining with Pads and Daps

Provide dry lining with plasterboards of type and thickness indicated in schedules.
Clean walls, which shall receive plasterpads or adhesives thoroughly with a steel
broom to remove all loose material. Fix small pads of plaster within recommended
spacings for wallboards to substructure of bricks, blocks or concrete to provide a true
flat ground for plasterboards. Then use daps of plaster or adhesive to bond the
plasterboard onto the prepared substructure. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
3 03 01 02
Dry Lining with Metal Furring

Provide dry lining with plasterboards of type and thickness indicated in schedules.
Fix furring channels to substructure of bricks, blocks or concrete with adhesive to
provide a true flat ground for plasterboards. Fasten plasterboards with self-tapping
dry-wall-screws. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
3 03 01 03
Independent Dry Lining

Provide dry lining with gypsum wallboards of type and thickness indicated in
schedules.
Wallboards shall be fixed to steel studs by means of self-tapping dry-wall-screws ,
which are erected independently in front of the solid wall in a distance indicated in
drawings. Studs shall be fixed with runners at bottom and top. Brackets may be used
to stabilise high walls if they do not interfere with the installation. Follow
manufacturer's instructions.
Provide fire rating as indicated in schedules.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 03 02
Dry-wall
3 03 02 01
Steel Support System

Double stud walls generally provide higher sound and fire ratings,
depending also on the details of the construction. The following double
stud systems are available: studs separated by felt strips from each
other; studs fixed to each other by brackets; studs completely
independent.
01.0 Provide studs, runners, furring channels etc. of size and material thickness
complying with manufacturer's data or as indicated in schedules and drawings.
02.0 Installation of dry-wall system shall commence with floor and ceiling runners,
being aligned, plumb and secured in position with suitable fastenings. Steel studs
shall be of one piece, placed in runners at appropriate centres: less than 40 cm
for 9,5 mm and less than 60 cm for 12,5 mm board. Location of studs shall not be
more than 5 cm from abutting partitions, partition corners and other construction.
Openings for doors shall be additionally reinforced to withstand the dynamic load
of doors.
Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the adequate connection at the top,
taking care for the given deflection of the slab. A flexible connection may be
necessary to avoid later cracks in the finish surface.
3 03 02 02
Gypsum Plasterboard Sheathing

01.0 Provide gypsum wallboard of type, thickness and layers indicated in schedules.
Plasterboards shall be applied as one piece from floor to ceiling. If they are not
available in the necessary lengths, they shall be supported at joints with
horizontal profiles (runners). Fastening of plasterboards with self-tapping drywall-screws shall be done in two faces. Electrical and mechanical installation has
to be completed before fastening of the second face.
02.0 For jointless surfaces use tapered gypsum wallboards. Fill joints of abutting
plasterboards with specially formulated gypsum jointing compound, complying
with DIN 1168 -1, or another suitable compound and reinforce with joint tape.
Also fill holes of screws to receive a flat and smooth surface, ready for painting,
application of wallpaper or tiles.
03.0 Wherever joints are existing in the building structure they shall be provided in
dry-walls too.
04.0 Cut-outs shall be made for installation outlets. Where sanitary fixtures are
installed at impregnated wallboards, cut-outs shall be sealed after piping
installation with sealing compound or an equivalent material acceptable to the
Engineer.
05.0 Where pipes and ducts are passing through the wall above false ceilings the
joints shall be sealed to comply with required fire and sound ratings
3 03 02 03
Insulation
Dry-walls shall be insulated with mineral fibre board of 40 mm thickness and minimum
density of 40 kg/m3, if not otherwise indicated in schedules.
Mineral fibre insulation boards shall be set between studs in a manner that they
cannot sag. Follow manufacturer's instructions!
3 03 02 04
Sound Rating
Gypsum board dry-walls may have sound ratings between 25 and 50 dB (decibel),
depending on the overall thickness, single or double stud system, number of layers
and the insulation with mineral fibre mats. Use manufacturer's data for selection!
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Provide wall with sound rating indicated in schedules. Sound rating shall be tested by
an independent laboratory.
3 03 02 05
Fire Rating
Gypsum board dry-walls may have fire ratings between 30 and 120 min., depending
on the overall thickness, single or double stud system, number of layers and the
insulation with mineral fibre mats. Use manufacturer's data for selection!
Provide wall with fire rating indicated in schedules. Fire rating shall be tested by an
independent laboratory.
3 03 03
Gypsum Board Fireproofing

Gypsum board used for fireproofing shall comply with DIN 4102 Part 1, Class A2 (non
combustible). Only boards of 12,5 mm or thicker shall be used. Boards shall be
applied to elements indicated in schedules in single or multiple layers to meet the
required fire rating. Provide a certificate. They shall be fixed by means of adhesives or
clamps, whatever is suitable for the respective base. Fill joints with specially
formulated gypsum jointing compound, complying with DIN 1168 Pt 1, or another
suitable compound acceptable to the Engineer. Edges shall be protected by
galvanized or aluminium angles as indicated in schedules.
3 03 04
Suspended Ceiling
For installation of suspended ceilings establish finish floor level and mark it securely in
each room.
3 03 04 01

01.0 Provide main carriers (intermediate channels), furring channels, perimeter angles
and adjustable hangers of size and material thickness complying with
manufacturer's data or as indicated in schedules and drawings.
02.0 Main carriers (intermediate channels) shall be fixed by means of adjustable
hangers to the substructure. Spacing of hangers shall follow manufacturer's
instructions for the weight of the ceiling, including installation objects like
luminaries or air diffusers. The maximum deflection under the nominal drop shall
be less than 3 mm.
03.0 Furring channels shall be fixed to main carriers with manufacturer's special
clamps. Spacing of main carriers and furring channels shall be done according
to manufacturer's data.
3 03 04 02
Gypsum Plasterboard Sheathing

01.0 Provide gypsum wallboard of type, thickness and layers indicated in schedules.
Gypsum wallboards shall be screwed onto the suspension system by means of
self-tapping dry-wall-screws. For jointless surfaces use tapered gypsum
wallboards and fill joints after fixing with specially formulated gypsum jointing
compound, complying with DIN 1168 - 1, or another suitable compound
acceptable to the Engineer, and reinforce with joint tape. Also fill holes of screws
to receive a flat and smooth surface, ready for painting.
02.0 Provide cut-outs as indicated in drawings for mounting of electrical or mechanical
equipment.
03.0 Provide finish along the perimeter of the ceiling according to detail drawings.
Follow manufacturer's instructions!
3 03 04 03
Fire Rating
Fire rated ceilings shall be tested as a system which includes steel support, gypsum
sheathing and eventually mineral wool overlay. Provide a certificate.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 04
Field Quality Control
3 05
Adjusting and Cleaning

Prior to acceptance of the work (Substantial Completion) thoroughly clean wall
surfaces. Prefinished ceiling tiles shall be laid only when no major dust development
by other works is to be expected.
3 07
Protection
Protect all works as recommended by manufacturer to ensure that it is without
damage at time of Substantial Completion.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01
General
The quantities to be paid for will be measured from drawings.
Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding
2,5 m2.
4 02
Units of Measurement
Suspension systems whether visible or non-visible may be measured by m2.
Gypsum board dry lining, dry-walls, ceiling lining as well as ceiling tiles will be
measured by m2.
Gypsum board dry-walls will be measured vertically between floor and upper
substructure (slab etc.), and horizontally from wall to wall. Lining both sides of the wall
with plasterboards, whether single or double layers, will be regarded as one unit.
Provision for joints in dry lining and dry-walls where joints are existing in building
structure may be measured by linear m.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01
General
Payment will be made for complete work including, but not limited to furnishing all
material, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour,
samples and mock-ups, co-ordinating work with other trades, checking, examination,
testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
5 02
Ancillary Works to be included in the Unit Rate

The following ancillary works will be included in the unit rate:
PLASTERBOARD LININGS AND PARTITIONS
Providing openings in walls.
Reinforcing of door openings.
Cut-outs for electrical and mechanical components and mounting of equipment in cooperation with the respective trades.
Provision of wall angles for suspended ceilings.
Filling of joints within plasterboards and sealing of joints with penetrating elements
(pipes, etc.).
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09275 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09275 - Pre Fabricated Glass Fiber

Reinforced Gypsum Columns and Forms
Part 1: General
1 01
Summary
The work covered by this section consists of manufacture of GRG (Glass Fiber
Reinforced Gypsum) Forms.
1 01 04
Related Sections
A. Light gauge metal framing.
B. Veneer gypsum plaster.
C. Gypsum board.
D. Finishing glass fiber reinforced gypsum.
E. Miscellaneous metals.
1 05
Submittals
Samples and shop drawings to conform to Section 01300.
A. Samples submitted as required by architect.
B. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings completely detailing prefabricated glass fiber reinforced gypsum
members, including locations, sizes and shapes of members, proposed jointing
arrangements, details of anchorages and supports, suspension systems, outlet boxes,
and other items which occur in or are affected by prefabricared gypsum members
shall be prepared at the factory by manufacturer only for those items indicated on
approved shop drawings.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of GRG needed products and support system for
walls and ceilings specified, including label compliance, fire-ratings, finishes and
maintenance instructions.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide samples for initial selection purposes for all GRG needed products and
support system for walls and ceilings.
1 05 04

Documented experience of contractors site supervisor(s)
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 06
Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers
regularly engaged in manufacture of GRG products and steel profiles for support
systems and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01

specification.
1 07
1 07 01

Protect materials during delivery to comply with manufacturers directions.
1 07 02

Store materials at building site strictly according to manufacturers instructions. Protect
it against humidity, dust and dirt. Take special care for ceiling tiles, since they will be
delivered with finish surface.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
2 01
MATERIALS
2 01 01
Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum (GRG)

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF GRG
a. Shell Thickness: 3/16" minimum except for small components which may be 1/8"
minimum, large components such as wall panels shall be of the thickness
recommended by the manufacturer for the size and location of components.
b. Weight: 1.5 lbs. per square foot
c. Flexural Strength:
4,192 psi
d. Tensile Strength:
1,340 psi
e. Compressive Strength: 5,800 psi

f . Density:
110 lbs. per cubic foot
g. Hardness:
105
h. Flammability:
Flame Spread
Smoke Developed
ASTM E-84
i. Glass Content:
Zero
Zero
Class A
38.7%
All parts to contain supports as required to keep within allowable tolerances.

Finish surfaces shall be true or textured according to design requirements.
2 02
FABRICATION
Molds to be constructed of reinforced fiberglass to produce units conforming to the
required profiles, dimensions and tolerances.
Allowable Tolerances:
Dimensional Tolerances: + 1/8"
Wall Thickness:
Nominal 3/16"
Out of Plumb:
+ 1/8"
Bowing:
L/360 Maximum
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 3:
3 01
ODAC
Execution
General Examination
installation work, such as electrical, heating, ventilating and plumbing work, which has
to be carried out before the Works specified herein, is complete. Correct conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
3 02
General Preparation
specifications and schedules.
3 03
Installation
3 03 01
General:
Employ only workmen experienced, skilled and trained on this type of quality erection
work.
3 03 02
Workmanship:
Install work of this section complete, straight, plumb, level, in true alignment and
securely anchored.
3 03 03
Erection:
GRG forms shall be installed per drawings, including the approved shop drawings,
and the manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction for this project.
3 03 04
Sealing and Caulking:

Shall conform to requirements of Caulking and Sealing and requirements indicated
and specified herein.
3 03 04 01
Joints and Sealants:

Joints (quantity, sizes, and shapes) indicated on contract drawings are minimum
requirements.
3 03 05
Finishing Materials:
3 03 05 01
Fasteners:
As indicated on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's
printed recommendations.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 05 02
ODAC
Joint treatment materials:

01.0
General: ASTM C-475; type recommended by the
manufacturer for the application indicated, except as
otherwise indicated.
02.0
Joint tape: Perforated type.
03.0 Joint Compound: Ready Mixed vinyl-type for interior use. (1) Grade: 2
separate grades; one specifically for bedding tapes and filling
depressions, and one for topping and sanding.
3 03 05 03
Miscellaneous Materials:
01.0 General: Provide auxiliary material for work of types and grades
recommended by manufacturer.
02.0 Adhesive: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum
plaster.
3 03 02 06
Replacements:
3 03 02 06 01
In-place GRG forms may be rejected for the following reasons.

01.0
02.0
3 04
Nonconformance to detail requirements specified previously.

Nonconformance with approved samples.
03.0
Nonconformance to specified fabrication or installation tolerance.
04.0
Damage beyond satisfactory field repair, as determined by the

Architect.
CLEANUP
General:
Perform cleaning procedures as recommended by GRG unit manufacturer.
3 05
GUARANTEE
One year from Substantial Completion.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
4 01
General
2,5 m2.
4 02
Suspension systems whether visible or non-visible will not be measured .
GRG walls, ceiling lining as well as ceiling tiles will be measured by m2 or number
(unit).
No provision for joints .
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
5 01
General
Payment will be made for complete work including, but not limited to furnishing all
material, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour,
samples and mock-ups, co-ordinating work with other trades, checking, examination,
testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
5 02
Ancillary Works to be included in the Unit Rate

Providing openings.
Cut-outs for electrical and mechanical components and mounting of equipment in cooperation with the respective trades.
Provision of all suspension systems.
Filling and sealing of joints with penetrating elements (pipes, etc.).
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09300 - Tile
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour and materials
and performing all operations in connection with ceramic tiling.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
Ceramic tiles
02.0
Quarry tiles
03.0
Split tiles
Related Sections
05810
07100
07900
09200
09400
09450
Expansion Joint Cover Assembly

Waterproofing
Joint Sealers
Lath and Plaster
Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Natural Stone Facing
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01

ASTM C 171: 97
Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing

Concrete
ASTM C 373: 88
Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk

Density, Apparent Porosity and Apparent Specific
Gravity of Whiteware Porous Products. R (99)
ASTM C 501: 84
Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear

of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser
ASTM C 920: 01
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C 1027: 99
Standard Test Method for Determining Visible Abrasion

Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile
ASTM C 1028: 96
Standard Test Method for Determining the Static

Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like
Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter
Method
ASTM D 4068: 01
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Polyethylene

CPE) Sheeting
ASTM D 4397: 01
Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for

Construction, Industrial and Agriculture Applications
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 01 04 03
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

A 137.1: 88
1 02 01 05
1 02 01 06
1 02 01 07
Standard Specification for Ceramic Tiles
European Standards
EN 87: 92
Ceramic floor and wall tiles/Definitions, classification,

characteristics and marking
EN 159: 91
Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of E >10%
EN 176: 92
Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with low water absorption of E <3%
EN 177: 91
Ceramic tiles/Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with a water

absorption of 3% <E<6%
EN 178: 91
Ceramic tiles/ Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with a water

absorption of 6% <E <10%
EN 186: 91
Ceramic Tiles/ Extruded ceramic tiles with a water absorption of

3% <E <6%
EN 187: 91
Ceramic tiles/ Extruded ceramic tiles with a water absorption of

6% <E <10%
EN 188: 91
Ceramic tiles/ Extruded ceramic tiles with a water absorption of

E > 10%
British Standards
BS 747: 00
Reinforced Bitumen Sheets for Roofing
BS 1199: 76
Building Sands from Natural Sources
BS 1521: 72
Specification for waterproof building paper
BS 5075: 82
Concrete Admixtures
BS 5980: 80
Adhesives for use with ceramic tiles and mosaics
BS 6213: 00
Selection of constructional sealants Guide (R)
German Standards
DIN 18156-2: 78
1 02 02
Materials for ceramic linings by thin mortar bed

technique; hydraulic mortar
DIN 18156-3: 80
Material for ceramic linings by thin mortar bed

technique; dispersion adhesive
DIN 18156-4: 84
Materials used for the application of ceramic tiling by

the thin bed method; epoxy resin adhesive
Codes
BS 5385-1: 95 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of Internal
Ceramic Wall Tiling and Mosaics
BS 5385-2: 91 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of External
Ceramic Wall Tiling and Mosaics
BS 5385-3: 89 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of Ceramic
Floor Tiles
BS 5385-4: 92 Code of Practice for Tiling and Mosaics in Specific Conditions
BS 8000-11: 89 Workmanship on building sites/Code of practice for wall and
floor tiling.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
TCA
Tile Council of American Institute
ES
Egyptian Standards
ANSI
A 118.6
Specifications for Ceramic Tile Grouts
ANSI
A 136.1
Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic
ASTM A 185
Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C 144
Standard Specifications for Aggregate for Masonry

Mortar
ASTM D 4397
Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting

for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural
Applications
ASTM A 497-97
Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete

Reinforcement.
ASTM C 150-97a
Specification for Portland cement.
ASTM C 206-84(1997) Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.

ASTM C207-91(1997)
Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
ASTM C307-94
Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical

Resistant Resin Mortars.
ASTM C308-95
Test Methods for Working and Setting Times of

Chemical Resistant Resin Mortars.
ASTM C321-94
Mortars.
Test Method for Bond Strength of Chemical Resistant
ASTM C531-95
Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of

Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars,
Grouts and Monolithic Surfacing.
ASTM C579-96
Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical

Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacing.
ASTM C884-92
Test Method for Thermal Compatibility between

Concrete and an Epoxy-Resin Overlay.
ASTM D905-94
Test Method for Method for Strength Properties of

Adhesive Bonds in Shear by Compression Loading.
ASTM D2103-97
Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
TCA
Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Ceramic tile - thin slabs made from clay, silica, fluxes, colourings and other
mineral raw materials generally used as coverings for floors and walls.
Cleavage membrane - see separating layer
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Dust pressed tile - tile formed from a body reduced to powder or small grains
and shaped in moulds at high pressure. It may be glazed or unglazed.
Engrobe - clay based covering with a matte finish which can be permeable or
impermeable.
Extruded tile - tile whose body is shaped in the plastic state in an extruder
(e.g. quarry tiles), the column obtained being cut into tiles before fired. They
may be glazed or unglazed and are thicker and tougher than dust pressed
tiles, generally used for surfaces receiving heavy traffic
Floating method - the practice of setting ceramic tile in a thin cement: sand
bond coat on a floated cement: sand mortar bed that is still workable
Fully vitrified dust-pressed tile - dust pressed ceramic tile with a water
absorption (E) not exceeding 0,5%.
Glaze - a vitrified covering which is practically impermeable.
Mosaic - Small sized tiles assembled in sheets, the individual tessera (tile)
being glued either face side down to paper (paper faced mosaic), or bed side
down to synthetic mesh.
Quarry tile - extruded tile that are cut in succession from a single extruded
column, pressed or not pressed, glazed or unglazed. They are thicker and
tougher than normal tiles, generally used externally or for surfaces receiving
heavy traffic.
Separating layer - thin sheeting to separate the base from the mortar bed
(floor tiling) to prevent stress between base and mortar bed caused by
bending and deflection of the base.
Slip-resistant tile - tile having greater slip resistant characteristics due to an
abrasive admixture, abrasive particles in the surface, grooves or patterns in
the surface.
Split tile - tile formed as extruded double tiles, which are separated after firing
to obtain single tiles. They may be glazed or unglazed.
Trim units (fittings) - units of various shapes consisting of pieces such as
angle beads, corners, coves, mouldings etc., necessary to cover ends of tiled
surfaces.
Water absorption (E) - the water absorption (% by mass) measured in
accordance with EN 99 for tiles that shall comply with EN standards and in
accordance with ASTM C 373 for tiles that shall comply with ANSI 137.1
1 03 02
Abbreviations
Q.C.
Quality Control
1 05 Submittals
In compliance with conditions of contract and provisions of Section 01300 the
following shall be submitted thirty (30) days before tiling works are scheduled to
commence.
1 05 01
Product Data
Complete material list and product data for each type of product proposed to be
furnished and installed under this section, including manufacturer's colour charts
showing full range of colours, textures, pattern, and trim units (fittings) available for
each type and composition of tile as indicated or required for completion of work for
initial selection purposes.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Manufacturers recommended installation procedures for tiles, adhesives, grouts and

all accessories.
1 05 02
Shop drawings
Accompanying the submittal, the following shall be submitted:
01.0
1 05 03
Shop drawings indicating sizes, dimensions, sections of units,

arrangements and provisions for jointing, and other details showing
relationship with, and attachment to related works.
Samples
Accompanying the above submittal, samples of each item prepared on samples of
adequate size and construction, in sets showing full range of variations expected
Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturers colour charts
consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colours, textures, and
patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include samples of
grout and accessories involving colour selection.
Master grade certificates for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by
manufacturer and installer.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified for furnishing and installation of
Porcelain tiles.
Samples for verification purposes of following items:
1 05 04
Each type and composition of tile for each colour and texture required, at least
300mm square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each colour required.
Metal edge strips in 150 mm lengths.

Documented experience of site supervisor(s) and tile installers.
Reports and records of examination as specified in ref. 3 01 Examination
Reports and records of checking the quality of tiles in accordance with ref. 2 01.
Reports and records of Contractor's internal Q.C.
Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e.
indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than
three (3) days after testing and checking.
Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure
traceability.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Arrangements shall be made in Contractors work schedule and time allowed for
checking and testing as indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience in tiling work and shall have
successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for the project.
Installers shall be familiar with all materials and installation procedures and shall be
Installers using epoxy adhesive shall have at least one (1) year of documented
experience with installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated
for the project.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01

Contractor's Internal Quality Control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance for tiles, adhesive,
grout, and all other material delivered to the site prior to first delivery to conform
compliance with specifications.
Checking suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and
compliance with supply order and specification.
Checking correct storage of material at least every 2 weeks.
Examination of backgrounds to receive tiling.
Checking of surface temperatures of backgrounds just before tiling operation
commences.

1 07 01

Delivery, storage and handling shall be so arranged as to minimise handling.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to guard against any damage.
Ceramic tiles and/or their packaging shall be marked with country of origin,
manufacturer's trademark, the standards with which they comply, their quality,
nominal size and nature of the surface (glazed, unglazed, abrasion resistance)
When delivered to the site, tiles shall be shrink- or equally wrapped and edge
protected.
Sensitive material (e.g. adhesive, grout, sealant etc.) shall be labelled with date of
manufacture, service life, instructions for proper storage and use, and any necessary
precaution related to toxicity and flammability.
1 07 02

Tiles and fittings and all material associated with tiling work shall be stored packaged
in original unopened containers in a clean and dry lockable storage with labels intact
until time of use.
Cementitious materials shall be stored under dry conditions and used in order of
delivery. Material, which contains air set lumps, shall not be used and discarded off
site.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Part 2: Products
2 01 Ceramic Tiles
All tiles shall be of the best commercial quality (first quality) unless otherwise
indicated.
Min. 95% of the tiles shall be free from visible defects that impair the appearance of
a major area of tiles.
Criteria for assessing the surface quality are cracks, crazing, unevenness,
depressions, holes, glaze devitrification, specks and spots, underglaze faults,
decorating faults, shading, nipped edges, and nipped corners in accordance with EN
98.
All trim units (fittings) and accessories including but not limited to skirting, interior
and exterior angles, step treads, sills, channels etc. shall be from the same source
and shall match the ceramic tiles.
2 01 01
Dust-pressed Ceramic Tiles

Dust-pressed ceramic tiles and mosaics shall have a
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
low water absorption (< 0,5%, fully vitrified, frost resistant) and shall
comply with EN 176.
01.1
Surface finish: glazed (glossy, matte or semi-matte as

approved by the Engineer), abrasion resistance class as
indicated.
01.2
Surface finish: unglazed, abrasion resistance value < 205

mm3.
low water absorption (< 3%, vitrified) and shall comply with EN 176.
02.1

indicated.
02.2

mm3.
Medium water absorption (>3% but <6%, semi-vitrified) and shall

comply with EN 177.
03.1

indicated.
03.2

mm3.
medium water absorption (>6% but <10%) and shall comply with EN
178.
04.1

indicated.
04.2
05.0`

mm3.
high water absorption (> 10 %) and shall comply with EN 159.

05.1

indicated.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
05.2
06.0
High water absorption (< 20%) and shall comply with ANSI A 137.1
(standard grade).
06.1
07.0

mm3.
Surface finish: glazed (glossy, semi-glossy, matte or semimatte as approved by the Engineer).
Impervious, vitreous body, water absorption > 0,5% and < 3,0% when
measured as described in ASTM C 373 and ANSI A 137.1 (standard
grade).
07.1
Surface finish: unglazed, abrasion resistance index greater

than 100 when measured ACC. to ASTM C 501.
08.0
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum thickness of internal ceramic wall

tiles shall be 4 mm.
09.0
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum thickness of external ceramic wall

10.0
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum thickness of internal ceramic floor

11.0
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum thickness of external ceramic

floor tiles shall be 10 mm.
Nominal sizes (length x width) and colour/pattern of tiles shall be as indicated or, if not
indicated, as approved by the Engineer.
2 01 03
Dust-pressed Slip-Resistant Tiles

Slip-resistance expressed by the coefficient of friction. (See e.g. ASTM C 1028
testing standard) The results are to be believed one important factor relative to slipresistance. Other factors can affect slip-resistance, such as degree of wear on the
shoe and flooring material; presence of foreign material, such as water, oil, dirt etc.
Therefore, test results of this test method should be regarded as defining a slipresistance under laboratory conditions and should not be used to determine slipresistance under field conditions. Slip-resistance can be achieved by special
textured surface finishes, special abrasive admixtures, or a special glaze designed
for an increased coefficient of friction. Slip-resistance is not required as standard
property for tiles in compliance with EN and ANSI standards. However, some
manufacturers indicate the coefficient of friction of their floor tiles in their product
information.
2 01 04 01
Quarry Tiles
Special type of floor tile. Quarry tiles will be normally used in public areas with heavy
traffic and high requirements regarding abrasion properties.
Quarry tiles shall have
01.0 a low water absorption (<3 %).
01.1

indicated.
01.2
Surface finish: unglazed, abrasion resistance values <
300 mm3.
02.0`
a medium water absorption (3% <E <6%) and shall

comply with EN 186.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
03.0
04.0
05.0
02.1

approved by the Engineer), abrasion resistance class
as indicated.
02.2

393 mm3.
a medium water absorption (6% <E <10%) and shall comply

with EN 187.
03.1

as indicated.
03.2

649 mm3.
a water absorption < 5% and shall comply with ANSI A 137.1

(standard grade).
04.1
Surface finish: glazed (glossy, semi-glossy, matte or

semi-matte as approved by the Engineer).
04.2
Surface finish: unglazed, abrasion resistance index not

less than 35 when tested in compliance with ASTM
501.
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum thickness of quarry floor

tiles shall be:
05.1
10 mm.
05.2
12 mm.
Nominal sizes (length x width) and colour/pattern of tiles shall be as indicated

or, if not indicated, as approved by the Engineer.
2 01 04 04
Split Tiles
Split tiles are a special type of extruded tiles with similar properties as quarry tiles.
However, after extrusion and firing, two connected tiles are coming out of this
process and, subsequently, have to be split to single tiles
Split tiles shall have a
01.0
02.0
03.0
low water absorption (<3%).

01.1

as indicated.
01.2
Surface finish: unglazed, abrasion resistance value <

300mm3
medium water absorption (3% <E <6%) and shall comply with
EN 186.
02.1

approved by the Engineer), abrasion resistance
classes a indicated.
02.2

393 mm3
medium water absorption (6% <E <10%) and shall comply with
EN 187.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
04.0
03.1

as indicated.
03.2

649 mm3
Unless otherwise indicated, min. tile thickness shall be:

04.1
10 mm.
04.2
12 mm.
04.3
15 mm.
Nominal sizes (length x width) and colour/pattern shall be as indicated or, if not
2 03 Tile Bedding Material

2 03 01
Cement
Cement for cement: sand backing mortar shall be ordinary Portland cement shall
comply with ISO 680: 90, DIN 1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96.
2 03 02
Sand
Sand used for cement: sand backing mortar shall be a building sand (0-3 mm) from
natural sources in accordance with BS 1199 or an equivalent standard.
2 03 03
Water
Water shall be fresh and clean drinking water. Seawater will not be allowed for
mixing water. All containers used for storing water shall be clean and sun protected.
2 03 04
Adhesive
All adhesives shall be certified by manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
The mixing of components supplied before use shall be carried out in accordance
with the adhesive manufacturer's instruction.
2 03 04 01
Cement-based Adhesive
Cement-based adhesive shall comply with one of the following standards:
- BS 5980 type 1 or 3
- DIN 18156-Part 2
2 03 04 02
Organic Adhesive
Organic adhesive shall comply with one of the following standards:
- BS 5980 type 2 or 4
- DIN 18156-Part 3
2 03 04 03
Epoxy Adhesive
Epoxy adhesive shall be water cleanable prior to initial setting and shall comply with
one of the following standards:
- BS 5980 type 5.
- DIN 18156-Part 4.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
2 04 Admixtures
2 04 01
Admixtures to cement: sand Mortar

Admixtures to cement: sand mortar may be air entraining-, water reducing-,
plasticizing-, retarding agents and shall comply with BS 5075 or an equivalent
standard.
2 04 02
Admixtures to Adhesives
Admixtures to adhesives shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. They shall not be added to any adhesive unless approved by the
manufacturer of the adhesive.
2 04 03
Bonding Agents
Bonding agents shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and shall be certified
as suitable for the intended use.
2 05 Grouts
Grout shall have low shrinkage and good adhesion and shall be certified by the
Neat cement mixed with water shall not be used as grout.
2 05 01
Sand: Cement Grout

The proportions of cement: sand shall be 1:1 for joints not exceeding 3 mm, 1:2 for
joints between 3 mm and 6 mm and 1:3 for joints wider than 6 mm.
For joint width up to 6 mm, sand for grouts shall not exceed 2,36 mm.
Necessary alkali-resistant pigments shall be added to achieve white or coloured
joints as indicated or, if not indicated, as approved by the Engineer.
2 05 02
Proprietary Grouts
Any proprietary grout used shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the
intended use. All mixtures shall be in compliance with manufacturers instructions.
2 05 02 01
Cement based Proprietary Grout

Cement based grout shall consist of factory mixed cement and other
ingredients/admixtures to achieve white or coloured joints as indicated or, if not
indicated, as approved by the Engineer and shall comply with ANSI A 108.10 or an
equivalent standard. Clean water shall be added at job-site in compliance with
manufacturers instructions to obtain the required consistency.
2 06 Sealant and Back-up Material for Movement Joints

Any sealant and back-up material used shall be certified by the manufacturer as
suitable for the intended use.
Any sealant used shall match the colours of grout in tiled surfaces adjoining sealed
joints unless otherwise indicated.
2 06 01
Back-up Material
Back-up strips shall be flexible, compressible types of closed-cell foam polyethylene,
butyl rubber, or open or closed cell polyurethane, rounded at surface to contact
sealant as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
Bond breaker tapes shall be self-adhesive polyethylene or polytetrafluorethylene
(PTFE) tapes.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 06 02
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Sealant
Sealant material to be used shall be:
01.0
Epoxy Polysulphide sealant (See Section 07900)
02.0
Polyurethane sealant (See Section 07900)
03.0
Polysulphide sealant (see Section 07900)
04.0
Silicon sealant (see Section 07900)
2 08 Separating Layer/Cleavage Membrane

Separating layer/cleavage membrane shall be of:
01.0
polyethylene film, thickness > 0,10 mm and shall comply with ASTM D
4397 or ASTM D 4068.
02.0
building paper to comply with BS 1521 or ASTM C 171.
03.0
bituminous felt to comply with BS 747 or an equivalent standard.
2 10 Accessories
2 10 01
Trim Units (fittings)

All trim units (fittings) shall match the tiles and shall be from the same source unless
otherwise indicated. Type, size, colour and pattern of trim units shall be as indicated.
2 10 02
Sanitary Fittings
Sanitary fittings such as towel bars, soap-, paper holders etc. shall match the tiles
and shall be from the same source as the tiles unless otherwise indicated.
Type, size, colour and pattern of sanitary fittings shall be as indicated.
2 10 03
Division Strips
Division strips to separate floor tiles from other floor finishes shall be made of:
01.0
stainless steel,
02.0
brass,
03.0
aluminium
with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed, layer of adhesive or substrate
unless otherwise indicated.
2 11 Mixes
2 11 01
General
Materials shall be batched by weight wherever possible and water addition
controlled.
Where weight batching is impracticable, mortar ingredients shall be measured by
volume using suitable containers of fixed, measurable volume. Batching by shovel
will not be allowed.
When mortar is mixed by hand, it shall be done on a clean non-absorbent surface.
No water shall be added once mixing has been completed.
Any mortar not used within two (2) hours after adding mixing water shall be
removed.
Admixtures shall be used when certified by the manufacturer for the intended use.
Cement: sand mixes shall comply with BS 5385 or an equivalent standard.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
2 11 02
Bedding Mortar Mixes
2 11 02 01
Cement: sand Mortar Bedding for Wall Tiling ref. 3 03 02 03

Cement: sand-bedding mortar shall be 1:3 to 1:4 by volume. (1:3,4 to 1:4,6 by
weight)
2 11 02 02
Cement: sand Mortar Bedding bonded to Base for Floor Tiling ref. 3 03
03 03
Cement: sand-bedding mortar shall be 1:3 to 1:4 by volume. (1:3,4 to 1:4,6 by
weight)
2 11 02 03
Cement: sand Semi-dry Mix for Floor Tiling ref. 3 03 03 04

Cement: sand semi-dry mix shall be 1:3,5 to 1:4 by volume. (1:4 to 1:4,6 by weight)
The water-cement ratio shall be between 0,55 and 0,60.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Part 3: Execution
All backgrounds to receive tiling shall be inspected for structural soundness, for
existing surface conditions, contamination, and any potentially deleterious material
prior to commencing tiling work.
All surfaces to receive tiling shall be plumb, level, and true with square corners.
Where falls have been incorporated in the base, they shall be examined for
correctness.
The trueness of backgrounds required for adhesive beds (thin bed method) shall be
such that when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap behind the straightedge
between points of contact does not exceed 3 mm, for backgrounds required for a
cement: sand mortar bedding any gap does not exceed 6 mm.
All backgrounds to receive tiling shall be checked for surface temperature.
Backgrounds to receive cement: sand mortar backing shall have a temperature not
exceeding 38 degree C. For background to receive an adhesive backing, instructions
given by the adhesive manufacturer shall be followed.
The (tile) Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any defects or conditions
that will prevent a satisfactory tile installation.
Installation work shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided.
Before tiling commences at least 6 weeks shall be allowed for new concrete or
masonry to dry out. If rendering is subsequently to be applied, it shall be left for at
least further 2 weeks.
Provisions shall be made for the completion of all subsidiary works necessary before
the application of tiles begins i.e. installation of anchors, recessed frames, electrical
and mechanical installations, and similar items located in or behind tiled surfaces
has been completed.
Backgrounds not built accurately or having true surfaces or corners that are uneven
or surface conditions that are not suitable shall be corrected and sufficient additional
time shall be allowed for setting and curing. If such backgrounds are of bricks,
blocks, stone, or concrete, an intermediate substrate, approved by the Engineer,
shall be applied to provide a true surface to receive tiling.
Any laitance on the surface of the background and contamination by oil, grease,
wax, dust or any other substances that inhibits adhesion of the tiles shall be
removed.
All loose material on the surface of backgrounds shall be removed by suitable
professional tools.
The finished floor level shall be established and properly marked in each room to
receive tiling.
3 03 Installation
The nature of the background is a prime consideration in deciding the choice of the
installation method, intermediate substrate or other additional preparatory treatment
necessary for tiling.
3 03 01
General
Tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated. If no special pattern is required, surfaces to
receive tiling shall be centred and balanced.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Tile work shall be extended into recesses and under or behind equipment and
fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions.
Tiles shall be closely fit to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so
that plates, collars or covers overlap tile.
Cuts shall only be made where no alternative is possible. Generally, cuts shall be
positioned on the outer edges of surfaces and no cuts shall be smaller than half tile
size.
Wall tiles shall be laid in full courses to the nearest obtainable dimension unless
To ensure that courses of tiles are exactly horizontal, a level line shall be established
to position the starting course.
All joints shall be straight and of even width.
All finished areas and surfaces shall be flat, level and true. The surface will be true,
when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap found does not exceed 3 mm and
the straightedge will not be obstructed by tiles. The max. Deviation between tiles
surfaces on any side of a joint shall not exceed 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide
and 2 mm for joints 6 mm or more wide.
Expansion joints shall be located in tiled surfaces to coincide and be continuous with
structural movement joints.
Additional movement joints (control-, contraction-, and isolating joints) shall be
positioned where tile work abuts restraining surfaces such as walls, columns, door
frames, windows, pipes etc., at internal vertical corners, at changes of alignment
(wall/floor), where tiling is continuous across junctions of different backgrounds and
in large tiled areas at 3 m to 4,5 m centres (wall tiling) and where areas are to be bay
jointed (floor tiling).
Such movement joints shall be at least 5 mm wide. The minimum depth of sealant
shall be 6 mm unless tiles thinner than 6 mm are being used.
Before sealant is applied, edges of tiles shall be primed when recommended by the
sealant manufacturer.
If a cement: sand mortar backing is applied, movement joints shall be filled up with a
back-up material before being sealed. If thin adhesive bedding is applied and where
depth of joints is insufficient to accommodate a compressible back-up material, a
self-adhesive tape shall be used as bond breaker.
No greater area of mortar or adhesive shall be applied than can be worked before
setting.
3 03 02
Wall Tiling
3 03 02 01
General
Where prepared backgrounds are of plaster, render, plaster board, wood base panel
boards, fair faced finished concrete or the like, tiles may be fixed with an appropriate
thin bed adhesive provided that the trueness of the background is suitable unless
Where backgrounds are of concrete-, clay-, calcium silicate brick/blockwork or rough
concrete, tiles may be fixed with a cement: sand mortar bedding provided that the
trueness of the background is suitable and the background has been prepared as
required.
Any surplus bedding material remaining on the surface of the tiles or in the joint
spaces shall be removed before hardening.
Unless otherwise indicated, joint widths shall be 2 mm for tiles up to 150 x 150 mm.
For larger sizes they shall no exceed 5 mm.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
External wall tiles shall be supported on footings, foundations or other noncombustible supports.
Any fixing method used shall be approved by the Engineer.
3 03 02 02
Thin-Bed Adhesive Bedding

Instructions given by the adhesive manufacturer shall be observed and followed. If
required, background surfaces shall be primed.
Where gaps in the background exceed 3 mm, local corrections by dubbing out up to
6 mm thick may be done by using the same adhesive. However, this method shall be
certified by the manufacturer of the adhesive and shall be approved by the Engineer.
Tiles shall be fixed dry; they shall not be soaked.
The area of surface to receive thin bed adhesive shall be limited to an area that can
be covered with tiles within the open time of the adhesive. The open time will depend
on the type of adhesive and the prevailing atmospheric conditions.
For thin bed adhesive bedding, the notched trowelling method shall be used: The
adhesive shall be applied to the surface as a floated coat with a trowel, pressing the
adhesive into the surface to give a bed thickness not exceeding 3 mm unless
otherwise specified by adhesive manufacturer, which should then be combed
through with a notched trowel of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the
adhesive. This will give a series of ribs into which the dry tiles shall be pressed with
a twisting or sliding action to obtain maximum bonding. Average contact area of
adhesive shall be not less than 80% except on exterior or wet installations where the
contact area shall be at least 95% when not less than three tiles are removed for
inspection.
All tiles shall be fixed in position before surface drying of the adhesive commences.
For external surfaces only cement-based or epoxy resin based adhesive shall be
used.
3 03 02 03
Cement: sand Mortar Bedding

Where a cement: sand mortar bed is to be applied directly to a background, the back
joints shall be raked out and the surface shall be treated in addition to ref. 3 02 to
achieve a mechanical key by one of the following methods:
-Mechanical Preparation: The surface is removed to a depth of about 3
mm by means of a hand scabbler, by bush-hammering, or shot-blasting
as appropriate.
-Intended Keys: These are formed in concrete by special surfaces of
the formwork or are available on masonry units by the manufacturing
process.
-Spatter dash: A mix of cement and sand is applied over the surface in
the form of closely spaced globules.
-Bonding Agents: Bonding agents may be applied either as a coating,
slurry formed by mixing with cement, or as an admixture to the
cement: sand bedding mortar (partially or completely replacing the
mixing water).
Any method used by the Contractor shall be approved by the Engineer.
Dry background surfaces shall be wetted prior to fixing of tiles to prevent excessive
absorption of water from the mortar bed.
Tiles with water absorption greater than 6% shall be soaked in clean water for at
least 30 minutes before fixing. After soaking they shall be stacked tightly together on
a clean surface and allowed to drain.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Tiles shall be fixed on the prepared background by either the floating- or buttering
method.
Floating Method
The mix shall be floated on to the background by trowelling to a thickness not
exceeding 10 mm and finished with a wooden float. The bed should be allowed to
stiffen slightly before any tiles are applied. A mix of 1 part cement and 1 part fine
sand and sufficient water shall be prepared to produce a mortar capable of being
trowelled 1-2 mm thick as bonding coat. This shall be trowelled over the backs of the
tiles before they are placed in position on the floated bed and tapped back firmly.
Buttering Method
Tiles shall be evenly buttered with mortar and tapped back firmly into position. The
resultant thickness of the mortar bed shall be not less than 6 mm and not exceed 12
mm.
Any method used by the Contractor shall be approved by the Engineer.
3 03 03
Floor Tiling
3 03 03 01
General
Where floor tiles are bonded directly to concrete floors with a thin bed adhesive
bedding, the floor shall have a steel trowel and fine broom finish.
Where floor tiles are bonded to concrete floors by cement: sand mortar bed on a
separating layers (cleavage membrane), the slab shall be steel trowel finished.
Surfaces exceeding 25 m2 shall be bay jointed unless otherwise indicated.
Where floor tiles abut to other materials, dividing strips shall separate them.
Joint width shall be at least 3 mm but not exceeding 6 mm unless otherwise
indicated. Joint width for extruded floor tile shall be between 6 mm and 10 mm
Any fixing method used shall be approved by the Engineer.
3 03 03 02
Thin Bed Adhesive Bedding

See ref. 3 03 02 02
3 03 03 03
Cement: sand Mortar Bedding bonded to Base

The clean and properly prepared concrete slab shall be kept wet for several hours
prior to placing the mortar bed.
Within a period of 30 minutes before placing the mortar bed, a thin layer of a neat
cement slurry shall be spread on the concrete surface and brushed to a thin uniform
coating.
The stiff, plastic mortar bed shall be applied immediately over the thin cement
coating between wooden fillets while the slurry is still wet and shall be levelled,
tamped and fully compacted. A slurry of neat cement and water or a cement-based
adhesive shall be applied to the back of the tiles. Alternatively, the levelled mortar
bed shall be dusted with a thin dry cement layer sprinkled with a fine sieve and
lightly trowelled assuring that the cement becomes dampen.
Tiles shall then be laid on the mortar bed to proper positions and pressed in while
the mortar bed is still workable.
The thickness of mortar bed shall not exceed 20 mm but shall be not less than 15
mm.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 03 04
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Cement: sand Semi-dry Mix Bedding

The dryness of the mix shall result in less adhesion between the bed and the
concrete base that cleavage can occur.
Before the semi-dry mix is laid, the base shall be swept clean and slightly
dampened.
The mix shall then be spread to a thickness of about 10-15% greater than that
required for the actual bed and thoroughly tamped, compacted and dawn off to the
required level.
Then a slurry consisting of 1 part cement to 1 part sand, or of neat cement shall
immediately be spread and trowelled over the bed in an even layer about 2 mm
thick. Alternatively, the slurry may be applied to the back of the tiles to combine with
the semi-dry mix.
The tiles shall then be placed and tapped firmly into position by using professional
tools like a rubber mallet.
The average thickness of the mortar bed shall be about 70 mm. Where falls and
cross falls have to be formed in the mortar bed; the thickness shall not exceed 100
mm. In any case, the minimum thickness shall not be less than 40 mm.
3 03 03 05
Cement: sand Mortar Bedding over a Separating Layer/Cleavage

Membrane
The prepared base shall be smooth and swept clean.
The separating layer (cleavage membrane) shall be laid over the prepared base with
joints overlapping at least 100 mm.
A stiff mortar bed shall be spread over the separating layer/cleavage membrane
between wooden fillets and levelled, tamped and fully compacted. A slurry of neat
cement and water or a cement-based adhesive shall be applied to the back of the
tiles. Alternatively, the levelled mortar bed shall be dusted with a thin dry cement
layer sprinkled with a fine sieve and lightly trowelled assuring that the cement
becomes dampen.
the mortar bed is still workable.
The thickness of the mortar bed shall be approx. 25 mm.
3 03 04
Grouting
Grouted joints shall be grey, white, or coloured as indicated or, if not indicated, as
Before grouting, all tiles shall be firmly set and all mortar and glue shall be removed
from tile faces and joints cleared of dust and debris.
A minimum of 24 hours shall be allowed for evaporation of adhesive solvents prior to
grouting unless otherwise required by the manufacturer of the adhesive.
When grouting with cement: sand site mixed grout, joints shall be wetted prior to
grouting. When using a proprietary grout, joints shall only be wetted when
recommended by the grout manufacturer.
The grout shall be applied with a grouting trowel, working back and forth over the
surface until the joints are completely filled. Surplus grout shall be removed from the
tiles with the aid of a rubber squeegee or sponge.
Where necessary or when recommended by the manufacturer, the grouted area
shall be protected from excessively fast drying.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
After the grout has hardened, the tile surface shall be washed over with water and
left clean.
When tiles are fixed with epoxy adhesive, the grout shall be epoxy-based, too.
Grouting shall be performed at various locations as indicated.
3 03 05
Accessories
3 03 05 01
Trim Units and Accessories

All trim units shall be evenly spaced with tile joints at locations as indicated or, if not
3 03 05 02
Sanitary Fittings
All sanitary fittings incorporated in tile work shall be evenly spaced and properly
centred with tile joints at locations and heights as indicated or, if not indicated, as
3 03 05 03
Division Strips
Division strips shall be installed to manufacturers instructions level and flush with
adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated. They shall be installed where exposed
edges of tile flooring meet other floor finishes.
3 03 05 04
Expansion Joint Cover

See Section 05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assembly
3 04 Field Quality Control

Cleaning of glazed ceramic tiles and mosaics shall be carried out with warm water or
a weak solution of a soap-less detergent.
Acid or acid based cleaners shall not be used to clean glazed tiles.
Unglazed tiles may be cleaned with suitable proprietary acid based cleaners when
cement films or other stains, which are insoluble in water, remain after completion of
tiling work.
All metal and enamel surfaces shall be protected with grease or otherwise when
cleaning unglazed tiles with acid based solutions.
Unglazed floor tiles which have a water absorption greater than 3 % shall be sealed
at completion with silicon based fluid to prevent early possible staining when
recommended by the manufacturer of the tiles.
3 07 Protection
Tiling shall be scheduled as late as possible in the building programme in order to
reduce danger from damage and contamination.
During the laying operation, tiled areas should be not accessible except for the tiling
operatives.
Completed floor tiling should not be subject to traffic until the tile bed has set and the
joints grouted.
Completed wall and floor tiling shall be kept clean and free from cement, plaster, and
all materials, which may cause stain.
If sawdust is used for this purpose, this shall be done not earlier than 3 days after
grouting has been completed.
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
When equipment has to be moved over finished surfaces, special precaution shall
be taken e.g. the use of timber planking. However, moving tackle and the protection
itself are not allowed to damage the tiled surface.
Stair finishing, nosing, and other vulnerable constructions shall be protected by
temporary casings.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile

4 01 General
The quantities to be paid will be measured from drawings
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for voids not
exceeding 0,1 m2
.
Tiled surfaces that join into skirting coved skirting, coved beads or rounded
mouldings shall be measured from the top of those pieces.
Surfaces will be measured by m2 for each specified type, grade and surface
characteristic, for ceilings, walls and floors, including internal and external angles,
stop and return fittings.
Coves, decorative strips and angle beads will be measured by linear m.
Floor channels will be measured by linear m including outlets, corners, stop ends
and the like.
Stair and step treads will be measured by linear m.
Wall copings, sills and the like will be measured by linear m
.
Separation layers will be measured by m2. No allowance will be made for

measurement of overlapping joints. No deductions will be made for voids not
exceeding 0,50 m2.
Division strips will be measured by linear m.
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile

5 01 General
Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material, equipment,
tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, mixing, samples,
supervision, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning the site and
including ancillary works.
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused, shall be replaced at
No payment will be made of unauthorised operations.
Material or work which does not conform to specification requirements shall be
removed and replaced at Contractors expense.

The unit rate for tiling shall include tiling around openings, connections to adjacent
components, laid to pattern, falls and cross falls, bay jointed, sloped and curved
surfaces, cuttings to angles, boundaries, junctions, cuttings to holes for pipes,
sockets, switches, outlets and the like, fixing templates for sanitary fittings, delivery
and installation of trim units, preparation of backgrounds including priming if required
by manufacturer's instructions, all protection measures, grouting and cleaning.
The unit rate for tiling shall include preparation of all movement joints including
structural expansion joints, cleaning, priming, joint filling and sealing.
Work at any height above floor level
Any width, height, girth, size or shape of slab or feature
Bedding and fixing including bedding mortars, adhesives and fixing materials
All cutting and internal and external angles, intersections and joints
Layout and treatment of joints including grouting
Movement joints
Cleaning, sealing and polishing
Working over and around obstructions
Overhand working
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile

6 01
Tables
6 02
Figures
Fig. 1 : Flexible joints
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Annex: Specified Information

7 01 Abrasion Resistance
7 01 01
Definition of abrasion classes for glazed dust-pressed and glazed
extruded tiles as recommended by European tile manufacturers
Class 1
Floor coverings in areas that are walked on essentially with soft soled footwear or
bare feet without scratching dirt (e.g. domestic bathrooms and bedrooms without
direct access from the outside).
Class 2
Floor coverings in areas that are walked on with soft soled or normal footwear with,
at the most, occasional small amounts of scratching dirt (e.g. rooms in living areas of
homes but with exception of kitchens, entrances and other rooms which may have a
lot of traffic).
Class 3
Floor coverings in areas that are walked on quite often with normal footwear and
small amounts of scratching dirt (e.g. halls, kitchens, entrances and other rooms,
which may have a lot of traffic).
Class 4
Floor coverings in areas that are subjected to considerable traffic with some
scratching dirt so that the conditions are the most severe for which glazed floor tiles
are suitable (e.g. entrances, work rooms, restaurants as well as other rooms in public
and private buildings).
Note: In public areas with high traffic, unglazed tiles with low water absorption should be
considered a better alternative as glazed tiles with class 4 properties.
7 01 02
10545-part 7
Definition of abrasion classes for glazed tiles according to ISO
Abrasion stage:
Failure visible at revolutions
Abrasion class
100
150
600
750, 1500
2100, 6000, 12000
>12000
7 02 EN-Requirements for glazed and unglazed tiles

7 02 01
Requirements for unglazed dust-pressed tiles

(EN102):
Tiles ACC. to
EN 176
< 205 mm3
EN 177
< 345 mm3
EN 178
< 540 mm3
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
7 02 02
Requirements for glazed dust-pressed tiles

(EN154):
Tiles ACC. to
7 0203
EN 176
class 1-4 as indicated by the manufacturer
EN 177
EN 178
Requirements for unglazed extruded tiles (EN102):
Tiles ACC. to
7 02 04
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
EN 121
< 300 mm3
EN 186
< 393 mm3
EN 187
< 649 mm3
Requirements for glazed extruded tiles (EN 154):
Tiles ACC. to
EN 121
EN 186
EN 187
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09400 - Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Part 1: General
1 01
Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour and materials
and performing all operations in connection with terrazzo and natural stone flooring
for units no greater than 40 mm in thickness and 0,30 m2 in area and monolithic
terrazzo.
Unless otherwise indicated, all provisions in this section shall apply equally to
internal and external work.
1 01 01
1 01 04
1 02
Section Includes
01.0
Terrazzo tiles and fittings
02.0
Monolithic terrazzo,
03.0
Natural stone floor tiles and fittings
Related Sections
02500
Paving and Surfacing
05810
Expansion Joint Cover Assembly
07100
Waterproofing
07900
Joint Sealers
09300
Tile
09450
Stone Facing
References
1 02 01
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01

ASTM C 33:
93Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 97:
96Standard Test Method for Absorption and Bulk Specific

Gravity of Dimension Stone
ASTM C 99:
87 Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension

Stone
ASTM C 119:
95Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Dimension Stone
ASTM C 170:
90Standard Test
Dimension Stone
ASTM C 171:
97Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing

Concrete
ASTM C 241:
90Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone

Subjected to Foot Traffic
ASTM C 503:
Method
for
Compressive
Strength
of
96Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone (Exterior)

1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 01 06
1 02 01 07
1 02 02
1 02 03
ODAC
ASTM C 568:
89Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone
ASTM C 615:
96Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone
ASTM C 616:
95Standard Specification for Quartz-Based Dimension Stone
ASTM C 880:
96Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimensional

Stone
ASTM C 1028:
96Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Static Coefficient of

Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the
Horizontal Dynamometer Pull Meter Method
ASTM D 4068:
01 Standard Specification for Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE)

Sheeting for Concealed Water Containment
ASTM D 4397:
00 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting

Construction, Material, and Agricultural Applications
for
British Standards
BS 747:
00Reinforced Bitumen Sheets for Roofing
BS 882:
83 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS 1199:
76Building Sands from Natural Sources
BS 1278:
99Pigments for the Colouring of building materials

based on Cement and/or Lime Specification and
Methods of Test
BS 1521:
72Waterproof Building Papers
BS 4131:
73 Terrazzo tiles
BS 5075:
82Concrete Admixtures
BS 5980:
80 Adhesives for Use with Ceramic Tiles and Mosaics
BS 6213:
82Guide to Selection of Constructional Sealants
BS 8204-4:
93 Insitu Flooring / Code of Practice for terrazzo

wearing surfaces
German Standards
DIN 4226:
83 Aggregates for Concrete
DIN 18500:
91 Cast stone
DIN 18156 - 2:
78 Materials for ceramic linings by thin mortar bed

technique; hydraulic mortar
DIN 18156 - 3:
80Materials for ceramic linings by thin mortar bed

technique; dispersion adhesive
DIN 18156 - 4:
84 Materials used for the application of ceramic tiling

by the thin bed method; epoxy resin adhesive
Codes
BS 5385-5:
94 Code of Practice for the design and installation of

terrazzo tile and slab, natural stone and composition
block floorings
BS 8000-11:
89 Code of Practice for wall and floor tiling
Other References
Design Manual IV as published by the Marble Institute of America (MIA)
33505 State Street, Farmington, Michigan 48335
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Specifications for Architectural Granite as published by

The National Building Granite Quarries Association (NBGQA),
North State Str., Conrad, NH 03301
Terrazzo Design Guide as published by
The National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (NTMA)
3166 Des Plaines Avenue, Suite 132,
Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
1 03
1 03 01
Definitions
Technical Terms
Abrasive Hardness (Ha) - value for abrasion resistance. Refers to the wearing
qualities of stone for floors, stair treads and other areas subjected to abrasion by foot
traffic. (see ASTM C 241)
Arris - the corner or angle formed by the meeting of two surfaces, especially in
mouldings; it can be moulded, unfinished, bevelled, rounded or otherwise shaped.
Bush-hammered - a mechanical process which produces textured surfaces.
Textures vary from subtle to rough.
Dimension stone - natural stone that has been selected, trimmed, or cut to
specified or indicated shapes or sizes, with or without one or more mechanically
dressed surfaces.
Eggshell finish - kind of (egg) surface that gives a finish that is neither glossy nor
mat
Fine rubbed - a smooth natural stone finish free from scratches without gloss.
Flamed - see thermal finish.
Granite - a visibly granular, igneous rock generally ranging in colour from pink to
light or dark grey and consisting mostly of quartz and feldspars, accompanied by one
or more dark minerals. The texture is typically homogeneous but may be gneissic or
porphyritic. Some dark granular igneous rocks, though not properly granite, are
included in the definition.
Gritted - grinding a surface with grit stones.
Grout - a thin mortar to fill the joints
Honed - a satin smooth surface of natural stone with little or no gloss.
Limestone - a rock of sedimentary origin composed principally of calcium carbonate
(the mineral calcite), or the double carbonate of calcium and magnesium (the
mineral dolomite), or some combination of these two minerals. Recrystalled
limestone, compact microcrystalline limestone, and travertine that are capable of
taking a polish are included in the category of marble.
Marble - carbonate rock that has acquired a distinctive crystalline texture by
recrystallization, most commonly by heat and pressure during metamorphism, and is
composed principally of the carbonate minerals calcite and dolomite, singly or in
combination.
Marble chips - marble granules screened to various sizes.
Monolithic terrazzo (thin bed terrazzo) - cementitious terrazzo topping poured on a
cementitious base.
Polished - the finest and smoothest glossy finish on natural stone. Generally only
possible on hard, dense material such as granite and marble.
Precast terrazzo - terrazzo fabricated in moulds and finished in shop or factory (e.g.
treads and risers), by compression or vibration.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Rustic terrazzo - a surface variation where in lieu of grinding and polishing, the
surface is washed with water or otherwise treated to expose the natural stone
chipping.
Sandstone - sedimentary rock composed mostly of mineral and rock fragments
within the sand size range (2 to 0,06 mm) and having a minimum of 60% free silica,
cemented or bonded to a greater or lesser degree by various materials including
silica, iron oxides, carbonates, or clay, and which fractures around (not through) the
constituent grains.
Sawn - a natural stone finish with a surface left as the stone comes from the gang
saw.
Terrazzo - derived from the Italian "Terrace" and Terrazzo". Terrazzo consists of
marble, granite, or if agreed with the purchaser of other natural stone chipping
embedded in cement mortar and cured ground and polished to expose the
aggregate and provide a smooth hard finish. Typically used as a finish for floors
either as precast tiles or poured in place.
Thermal finish - a surface treatment applied by intensive heat flaming.
Travertine - a variety of crystalline or microcrystalline limestone distinguished by
layered structure. Pores and cavities commonly are concentrated in some of the
layers, giving rise to an open texture. Travertine that is capable to take a polish will
be defined as marble.
Wear - the removal of material or impairment of surface finish through friction or
impact.
.
1 03 02
Weathering - natural alteration by either chemical or mechanical processes due to

the action of constituents of the atmosphere, surface water, or to temperature
change.
Abbreviations
Q.C.
Quality Control
1 05
Submittals
In compliance with conditions of contract and provisions of Section 01300 the
following shall be submitted thirty (30) days before terrazzo and natural stone
flooring is scheduled to commence.
1 05 01
Product Data
Complete material list and product data for each type of product proposed to be
furnished and installed under this section including manufacturer's colour charts
showing full range of colours, textures, pattern, and trim units (fittings) available for
each type and composition of tile as indicated for initial selection purposes.
1 05 02
Shopdrawings
The following shall be submitted:
01.0 Shopdrawings indicating sizes, dimensions, sections of units, arrangements and
provisions for jointing, and other details showing relationship with, and attachment to
related work.
1 05 03
Samples
Samples of each item, prepared on samples of adequate size and construction, in
sets showing full range of variations expected.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 05 04
ODAC

Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor(s) as indicated under ref. 1
06 01 Qualifications.
Reports and records of examination as indicated under ref. 3 01 Examination.
Reports and records of Contractor's internal Quality Control as indicated under ref. 1
06 04 01.
1 06
Quality Assurance
indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor or
supplier if necessary.
three (3) days after testing and checking.
traceability.
Arrangements shall be made and time allowed in Contractors work schedule for
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience in tiling work and shall have
successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for the project.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01

Contractor's internal Q. C. shall include but not be limited to:
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance for tiles and all
other material delivered to the side prior to first delivery to conform compliance with
specifications.
Checking ofsuppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and
compliance with supply order and specification.
Checking of correct storage of materials at least every 2 weeks.
Examination of backgrounds to receive tiling as indicated under ref. 3 01
Examination.
1 07
1 07 01

Delivery, storage and handling shall be so arranged as to minimise handling.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to guard against the possibility of damage.
When delivered to the site, tiles shall be palletised and packaged shrink-wrapped
and edge protected by polystyrene wrapping or wooden casings and stored in a
clean and dry lockable storage.
Terrazzo tiles shall not be transported and delivered to the site until a period of at
least 7 days after pressing has elapsed and shall not be installed earlier than 28
days after pressing.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Sensitive Material (e.g. adhesive, grout, sealant etc.) shall be labelled with date of
manufacture, service life, instructions for proper storage and use, and any necessary
precaution related to toxicity and flammability.
1 07 02

Tiles shall be stored in a clean and dry lockable storage.
Tiles shall be stored off ground and air shall be allowed to circulated around tiles to
avoid staining.
Terrazzo tiles shall be vertically stacked face to face. Thin battens shall be inserted
between rows of tiles.
Cement and lime shall be stored under dry conditions and used in order of delivery.
Cement or lime, which contains air set lumps, shall not be used and discarded.
Part 2: Products
2 01
Terrazzo
2 01 01
Terrazzo Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be made from aggregate and cement with two-part mixes (one
for base layer and one for facing layer) and shall be hydraulically pressed before
curing. Marble powder may be added if appropriate.
The edges of the tile shall be perpendicular to the surface. The planes of the upper
and lower surfaces shall be parallel and adjacent vertical edges of square tiles shall
be at right angle to each other. All arises shall be sharp and true.
The minimum transverse (flexural) strength shall be 3 N/mm2 and the total water
absorption shall not exceed 8%. The water absorption of the tile-face shall not
exceed 0,4 g/cm2 when sampled and tested in compliance with BS 4131.
The maximum dimensional deviation shall be 3 mm in length and width and 6 mm in
thickness. However, for each shipment of tiles the tolerances shall not exceed 1 mm
for length and width and 3 mm for thickness.
Aggregate for base layer shall consist of naturally occurring materials such as
crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone, natural sand or crushed gravel sand
and shall comply with one of the following standards:
BS 882, ASTM C 33, DIN 4226.
The nominal tile sizes shall be as indicated.
2 01 01 01
Facing Layer
The facing layer shall be formed as an integral part of the tile and shall be not less
than 6 mm after grinding and shall be free from projections, depressions, flakes and
crazes.
Cement for the facing layer shall be gray, white or tinted Portland cement shall
comply with ISO 680: 90, DIN 1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96.
If pigments are used they shall comply with requirements of BS 1014 or shall be
certified otherwise as suitable for the intended use.
01.0 Aggregate for facing layer shall be graded marble chipping of adequate
hardness, angular in shape as distinct from elongated and flaky,
01.1
max. nominal size: 5 mm,

6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 02
ODAC
01.2
01.3
01.4
final finish: ground and grouted to a fine grit finish.
01.5
final finish: ground, grouted and subsequently re-ground to a fine grit

finish.
02.0
Aggregate for facing layer shall be graded natural stone chipping similar
to characteristics of marble in compliance with manufacturers
representative sample tile(s):
02.1
max. nominal size 25 mm,
02.2
final finish: ground and grouted to a fine grit finish.
02.3
final finish: ground, grouted and subsequently re-ground to a fine grit

finish.
Precast Terrazzo
Shall comply with requirements of ref. 2 01 01 Terrazzo Tiles.
Shapes and dimensions shall be as indicated.
All stair treads shall be provided with at least two (2) shop-fabricated abrasive insert
strips of aluminium oxide, silicone carbide (Carborundum) or solid rubber unless
2 02
Natural Stone
All natural stone shall be free of spalls, cracks, open seams and other imperfections
that would impair its strength, durability, or appearance and free of minerals that may
cause objectionable staining under normal conditions.
Any piece of natural stone showing minor flaws or imperfections shall be referred to
the Engineer to decide whether it will be rejected, or allowed for patching or
redressing.
Chips at the edges or corners may be patched when approved by the Engineer and
provided the structural integrity of the stone is not affected and provided the patch
matches the colour and finish of the natural stone so that the patch does not detract
from the appearance.
2 02 01
Marble
2 02 01 01
General
Marble shall be capable of taking a polish and shall have the following physical
properties:
Absorption by weight, max.% (ASTM C 97) 0,20 (exterior use) 0,70 (interior
use)
Density, min. kg/m3 (ASTM C 97)
2595 (Calcite)
2800 (Dolomite)
2690 (Serpentine)
2305 (Travertine)
Compressive strength, min.MPa (ASTM C 170)
52
Modulus of rupture, min. MPa (ASTM C 99)
7
Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha (ASTM C 241)
10
Flexural strength, min. MPa (ASTM C 880)
7
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 02 01 02
ODAC
Marble Floor Tiles

Subject to compliance with requirements as indicated for marble, marble floor tiles
shall be made from:
01.0
imported marble,
02.0
local marble for final selection by the Engineer,
03.0
final surface finish:
03.1
polished,
03.2
eggshell,
03.3
honed,
03.4
gritted,
04.0
minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated: 10 mm.
2 02 02
Granite
2 02 02 01
General
Granite shall have the following physical properties:
Absorption by weight, max. % (ASTM C 97)
0,40
Density, min. Kg/m3 (ASTM C 97)
2560
Compressive strength, min. MPa (ASTM C 170)
131
Modulus of rupture, min. MPa (ASTM C 99)
10,34
Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha (ASTM C 241)not established
Flexural strength, min. MPa (ASTM C 880)
not established
2 02 02 02
Granite Floor Tiles

Subject to requirements as indicated for granite, granite floor tiles shall be made of:
01.0I
imported granite,
02.0
local granite for final selection by the Engineer,
03.0
03.1
polished,
03.2
eggshell,
03.3
honed,
03.4
fine axed,
03.5
fine rubbed,
03.6
bush hammered,
04.0
minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated: 10 mm.
2 02 03 01
General
Limestone shall have the following physical properties:
Absorption by weight, max.% (ASTM C 97)
12
7,
3
(low-density)
(medium-density)
(high-density)
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Density, min. Kg/m3 (ASTM C 97)1760(low-density)

2160
(medium-density)
2560
(high-density)
Compressive strength, min.Mpa (ASTM C 170)
12
28
(medium-density)
55
Modulus of rupture, min.MPa (ASTM C 99)
3,4
(high-density)
2,9
(low-density)
(medium-density)
6,9
Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha
2 02 03 02
(low-density)
10
(high-density)
10
(low-density)
(ASTM C 241)
(medium-density)
10
(high-density)
Limestone Floor Tiles

Subject to requirements as indicated for limestone, shall be made of:
01.0
imported limestone,
02.0
local limestone for final selection by the Engineer,
03.0
low-density,
04.0
medium-density,
05.0
high-density,
06.0
06.1
fine rubbed,
06.2
sawn,
07.0
minimum tile thickness unless otherwise indicated: 10 mm.
2 02 04
Sandstone (quartz-based)
2 02 04 01
General
Sandstone shall have the following physical properties:
Abrasion by weight, max.% (ASTM C 97)
3
20
(Sandstone)
(Quartzite-Sandstone)
1
Density, min. Kg/m3 (ASTM C 97 )
2400
(Quartzite)
2160 (Sandstone)
(Quartzitic-Sandstone)
2560
(Quartzite)
Modulus of rupture, min. MPa (ASTM C 99) 2,1
(Sandstone)
6,9
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
13,9
Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha
2 02 04 02
(Quartzite)
8
(Sandstone)
(ASTM C 241)
(Quartzite)
Sandstone Floor Tiles

Subject to requirements as indicated above, sandstone tiles shall be made of:
01.0
imported sandstone,
02.0
local Saudi sandstone for final selection by the Engineer,
03.0
03.1
fine rubbed,
03.2
sawn,
04.0
minimum tile thickness unless otherwise indicated: 20 mm.
Nominal tile sizes shall be as indicated.
2 03
2 03 01
Tile Bedding Material

Cement
Cement used for bedding mortar shall be Ordinary Portland cement and shall comply
with ISO 680: 90, DIN 1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96.
2 03 02
Sand
Sand used for bedding mortar shall be a building sand (0-3 mm) from natural
sources in accordance with BS 1199 or an equivalent standard.
2 03 03
Water
Water shall be fresh and clean drinking water. Seawater will not be allowed for
mixing water.
2 03 04
Adhesive
All adhesive shall be certified as suitable for the intended use.
2 03 04 01
Cement-based adhesive shall comply with one of the following standards:
BS 5980 type 1 or 3
DIN 18156-Part 2
2 03 04 02
Organic Adhesive
Organic adhesive shall comply with one of the following standards:
BS 5980 type 2 or 4
DIN 18156-Part 3
2 03 04 03
Epoxy Adhesive
Epoxy adhesive shall be water cleanable prior to initial setting and shall comply with
one of the following standards:
BS 5980 type 5.
DIN 18156-Part 4.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 03 05
Admixtures
2 03 05 01
Admixtures to Bedding Mortars

Admixtures to bedding mortars may be air entraining-, water reducing, plasticizing-,
or retarding agents and shall comply with BS 5075 or an equivalent standard.
2 03 05 02
Admixtures to Adhesives
Admixtures to adhesives shall be used in accordance with manufacturers
instructions. They shall not be added to any adhesive unless approved by the
manufacturer of the adhesive.
2 03 06
Bonding Agents
Bonding agents shall be used in accordance with manufacturers instructions and
shall be certified as suitable for the intended use. They shall not re-emulsify.
2 04
Grout
Grout shall have low shrinkage and appropriate adhesion and shall be suitable for
the conditions to be met.
2 04 01
Cement:Sand Grout
See ref. 2 10 03 (Mixes)
Necessary alkali-resistant pigments shall be added to achieve
2 04 02
01.0
white joints
02.0
coloured joints as approved by the Engineer.
Cement:Lime:Sand Grout
See ref. 2 10 03 (Mixes)
Necessary alkali-resistant pigments shall be added to achieve
01.0
white joints
02.0
coloured joints as approved by the Engineer.
2 04 03
Proprietary Grout
2 04 03 01
Cement based Grout

Cement based grout shall consist
ingredients/admixtures to achieve
2 05
of
factory
mixed
cement
and
other
01.0
white joints
02.0
coloured joints as approved by the Engineer and shall comply with an

applicable standard. Clean water shall be added at the job-site to obtain
the desired consistency.
Sealants and Back-up Material for Movement Joints

Any sealant and back-up material used shall be certified by the manufacturer as
suitable for the intended use.
Any sealant used shall match the colour of grout in tiled areas adjoining sealed joints
2 05 01
Back-up Material
Back-up strips shall be flexible, compressible type of closed-cell foam, polyethylene,
butyl rubber, or open or closed-cell polyurethane, rounded at surface to contact
sealant as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Bond breaker tapes shall be self-adhesive polyethylene or polytetrafluorethylene

(PTFE) tapes.
2 05 02
Sealant
Sealant shall be:
2 06
01.0
Epoxy Polysulphide sealant. (See Section 07900)
02.0
Polyurethane sealant. (See Section 07900)
03.0
Polysulphide sealant. (See Section 07900)
04.0
Silicon sealant (See Section 07900)

See Section 05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assembly
2 07
Separating Layer/Cleavage Membrane

Separating layer/cleavage membrane shall be of:
2 08
01.0
polyethylene film, thickness > 0,10 mm and shall comply with ASTM D
4397 or ASTM D 4068
02.0
building paper to comply with BS 1521 or ASTM C 171
03.0
bituminous felt to comply with BS 747
Material for Tanking

See Section 07100 Waterproofing
2 09
2 09 01
Accessories
Trim Units (Fittings)
All trim units (fittings) shall match the tiles and shall be from the same source unless
Type, size, colour and pattern shall be as indicated.
2 09 02
Division Strips
Division strips to separate floor tiles from other floor finishes shall be made of:
01.0
brass
02.0
extruded aluminium
03.0
stainless steel
with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless otherwise
indicated.
Dimension of division strips shall be suitable for the intended use.
2 09 03

See Section 05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies
2 10
2 10 01
Mixes
General
Materials shall be batched by weight wherever possible and water addition
controlled.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Where weight batching is impracticable, mortar ingredients shall be measured by

volume using suitable containers of fixed, measurable measurement.
Any mortar not used within two (2) hours after adding mixing water shall be removed
Admixtures shall only be used when certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the
intended use.
Mixes shall comply with BS 5385.
2 10 02
Bedding Mortar Mixes
2 10 02 01
Cement: Sand Semi-dry Mix

Cement: sand semi-dry mix shall be 1:3,5 to 1:4 by volume. (1:3,4 to 1:4,6 by
weight)
2 10 02 02
Cement: Sand Mix bonded to Base

Cement: sand mortar shall be 1: 3 to 1: 4 by volume (1:3,4 to 1:4,6 by weight)
2 10 02 03
Cement:Lime:Sand Mortar
The cement: lime: sand mortar mix shall be 1:1:5 to 6 by volume.
The mortar shall be mixed to a stiff plastic consistency so that when the mortar bed
is fully compacted, free water does not come to the surface.
2 10 03
Grouting Mixes
2 10 03 01
Cement:Sand Grout
The proportions of cement: sand shall be 1: 1 for joints not exceeding 3 mm, 1: 2 for
joints between 3-6 mm and 1: 3 for joints wider than 6 mm.
2 10 03 02
The proportions of cement: lime: stone dust or suitable sand shall be 1: 2: 6.
2 10 03 03
Proprietary Grout
Proprietary grout shall be mixed according to manufacturers written instructions.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
3 01
General Examination
All backgrounds to receive tiling shall be inspected for structural soundness, for
existing surface conditions, contamination, and any potentially deleterious material
prior to commencing floor-tiling work.
All surfaces to receive floor tiling shall be level and true. Where falls have been
incorporated in the base, they shall be examined for correctness.
Where floor tiles are to be bonded to concrete floors by a cement: sand mortar bed
on a separating layer, the concrete surface shall be steel trowel finished.
Installation works shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided.
The tiling Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any defects or conditions
that will prevent a satisfactory tile installation.
3 02
General Preparation
Before installation commences at least 6 weeks shall be allowed for any
cementitious base to dry out.
Provisions shall be made for the completion of all subsidiary works necessary before
the application of floor tiles begins i.e. installation of anchors, electrical, mechanical
and sanitary installations, and similar items located in or below tiled areas.
Bases not built accurately or surface conditions that are not suitable shall be
corrected and additional time shall be allowed for setting and curing
Any laitance on the surface of the background and contamination by oil, grease wax,
dust or any other substances that inhibits adhesion of the tiles or may cause staining
shall be removed.
All loose material on the surface of backgrounds shall be removed by suitable
professional tools.
The finished floor level shall be established and properly marked in each room or
area to receive tiling.
3 03
3 03 01
Installation
General
Tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated. If no special pattern is required, surfaces to
receive floor tiling shall be centred and balanced.
Tile work shall be extended into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form
a complete covering without interruptions.
Tiles shall be closely fit to piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates,
collars or covers overlap tiles.
Cuts shall only be made where no alternative is possible. Generally, cuts shall be
positioned on the outer edges of surfaces.
All joints shall be straight and of even width.
All finished areas and surfaces shall be flat, level and true. The surface shall be true,
when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap found shall not exceed 3 mm and
the straightedge shall not be obstructed.
No greater area of mortar or adhesive shall be applied than can be worked before
setting.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Before any fixing, colour and shade variations shall be checked. Variegated tiles
shall be thoroughly mixed.
Temperatures in tiled areas shall be maintained at 10 deg. C or more during
installation and for at least 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are
required by referenced standards or manufacturer's instructions.
Expansion joints shall be located in tiled surfaces to coincide and be continuous with
structural movement joints.
Additional movement joints shall be positioned where floor tiles abut restraining
surfaces such as walls, columns, door frames, pipes, where tiling is continuous
across of junctions of different backgrounds. In addition, surfaces exceeding 25 m2
shall be bay jointed unless otherwise indicated.
3 03 02
Terrazzo Flooring
3 03 02 02
Terrazzo Floor Tiles
3 03 02 02 01
Cement: Sand Semi-Dry Mix Bedding

The dryness of the mix shall result in less adhesion between the bed and the
concrete base that cleavage can occur.
Before the semi-dry mix
dampened.
is laid, the base shall be swept clean and slightly
The semi-dry mix shall then be spread to a thickness of about 10 - 15% thicker than
the final bed thickness and shall be partially compacted, leaving the surface true and
flat to the required level; the final bed thickness shall be at least 25 mm.
A slurry of thick, creamy consistency (cement: fine sand 1: 1) shall be applied either
to the back of each tile before placing or alternatively on the partially compacted
mortar bed.
The tiles shall then be placed and tapped into position by using professional tools
(e.g. rubber mallet) with regular and straight joints between 2 mm and 3 mm wide.
Full contact between slurried tile backs and mortar bed shall be ensured.
Any surplus bedding material, which may have risen to the surface, shall be
removed and the surface washed and tiles completely cleaned.
3 03 02 02 02
Cement: Sand Mortar bonded to Base

The clean and properly prepared concrete slab shall be kept wet for several hours
Within a period of 30 min. before placing the mortar bed, a thin layer of neat cement
shall be spread on the concrete surface and brushed to a thin uniform coating.
tamped and fully compacted. A slurry of neat cement and water shall be applied to
the back of the tiles. Alternatively, the levelled mortar bed shall be dusted with a thin
dry cement layer sprinkled with a fine sieve and lightly trowelled assuring that the
cement becomes dampen.
The tiles shall then be placed and tapped into position with regular and straight joints
between 2 mm and 3 mm wide.
The final bed thickness shall be 15 - 25 mm except for units greater than 500 x 500
mm when the bed thickness shall be 30 - 50 mm thick.
Any surplus bedding material, which may rise to the surface, shall be removed and
tiles completely cleaned.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 02 02 03
ODAC
Grouting
Grouting shall not start until the mortar bed has set.
Joints shall be grouted with white or grey cement as indicated. Pigments shall not
exceed 5% by mass.
Joints shall be completely filled by squeegee until settlement ceases.
Excess grout shall be removed leaving filled joints flush with the tile surface.
After grouting, terrazzo tiles shall be thoroughly washed with clean water.
3 03 02 02 04
Grinding
Grinding and polishing shall commence after the grouted joints are thoroughly
hardened but no sooner than 3 days after grouting.
The tiled surface shall be mechanically ground to remove surplus grout and to
correct any unevenness between adjacent tiles.
All grinding residues and dust shall be washed off and voids shall be filled with
similar grout.
After 24 hours, the surface shall be re-ground.
Finally, the surface shall be wet polished to receive
01.0
its final finishes as indicated.
02.0
a non-slip safe walking surface of 0,5 anti-slip coefficient of friction

when tested in compliance with ASTM C 1028.
3 03 03
Natural Stone Flooring
3 03 03 01
Marble Tile Flooring
3 03 03 01 01

Thin bed adhesive bedding shall only be applied, if thickness of tiles is less than 1015 mm.
3 03 03 01 02
Cement: Sand Mortar Bedding bonded to Base

The clean and properly cleaned concrete slab shall be kept wet for several hours
slurry shall be spread on the concrete surface and brushed to a thin uniform coating.
adhesive
shall
be
applied
to
the
back
of
the
tiles.
Alternatively, the levelled mortar bed shall be dusted with a thin dry cement layer
sprinkled with a fine sieve and lightly trowelled assuring that the cement becomes
dampen.
3 03 03 02
Granite Tile Flooring
3 03 03 02 01

Thin bed adhesive bedding shall only be applied, if thickness of tiles is less than 1015 mm.
3 03 03 02 02
Cement:Sand Mortar Bedding bonded to Base

The clean and properly cleaned concrete slab shall be kept wet for several hours
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
slurry shall be spread on the concrete surface and brushed to a thin uniform coating.
adhesive
shall
be
applied
to
the
back
of
the
tiles.
dampen.
3 03 03 03
Limestone / Sandstone Tile Flooring
3 03 03 03 01
Cement: Sand Semi-Dry Mix Bedding

Before the semi-dry mix is laid, the base shall be swept clean and slightly
dampened.
The mix shall then be spread to a thickness of about 10 - 15% greater than that
required for the actual bed and thoroughly tamped, compacted and dawn off to the
required level.
Then a slurry consisting of 1 part cement and 1 part fine sand shall immediately
spread and trowelled over the bed in an even layer about 2 mm thick.
Alternatively, the slurry may be applied to the back of the tiles to combine with the
semi-dry mix.
The tiles shall then be placed and tapped firmly in position by using professional
tools like a rubber mallet.
The average thickness of the mortar bed shall be about 70 mm. Where falls and
cross-falls have to be formed in the mortar bed, the thickness shall not exceed 100
mm. In any case, the minimum thickness shall not be less than 40 mm.
Any bed material brought to the surface at the joints shall be wiped from the face of
the tile with a damp sponge or cloth as soon as possible after the tile has been
placed in position.
3 03 03 03 02
Cement: Lime:Sand Mortar Bedding

The clean and properly prepared concrete slab shall be dampened immediately
before spreading the mortar to prevent excessive absorption of water from the
mortar.
In addition, the back of each tile shall be slightly dampened immediately before
laying.
The mortar shall be spread evenly between wooden fillets and compacted
thoroughly
leaving
the
surface
true
and
flat.
A slurry of neat cement and water shall be applied on the back of the tiles.
dampen.
the mortar bed is still workable with regular and straight joints of about 3 mm unless
otherwise specified.
The thickness of the mortar bed shall be 15 - 25 mm except for tiles greater than
500 x 500 mm and thickness greater than 40 mm, the mortar bed shall be 30 - 50
mm.
3 03 03 04
Natural Stone Grouting

Grouting shall not start until the mortar bed has set. Any dust or debris that may
have collected in the joint shall be removed.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Joints shall be completely filled by squeegee until settlement ceases.

01.0
Joints in marble and granite flooring shall be filled with:
01.1
cement based grout ref. 2 04 03 01.
01.2
cement: sand grout ref. 2 04 01.
01.3
proprietary grout ref. 2 04 03
02.0
Joints in limestone and sandstone flooring shall be filled with:
02.1
cement: lime: sand grout ref. 2 04 02.
02.2
proprietary grout ref. 2 04 03.
Surplus grout shall be cleaned off from the tile face as work proceeds. Sawdust shall
not be used to clean off grout.
3 03 05
Separation Layer/Cleavage Membrane

The concrete base shall be smooth to allow for free movement of the separation
layer/cleavage membrane.
The separating sheets shall be loosely laid with a lap of 100 mm minimum to all
joints.
3 03 07
Accessories
3 03 07 02
Division Strips
Division strips shall be installed to manufacturers instructions level and flush with
adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3 05
3 05 01

Terrazzo
Cleaning of terrazzo shall be carried out after setting, pointing, grouting, curing,
grinding and polishing has been finished.
Terrazzo shall be cleaned with water and a neutral sulphate-free detergent certified
by the manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
Greasy deposits may be removed by detergent incorporating an organic solvent or
alkaline detergent (pH > 9).
After cleaning, terrazzo surfaces shall be sealed with a sealant certified by the
manufacturer as suitable for the intended use to prevent staining. Wax polishes and
linseed oil shall never be used.
3 05 02
Natural Stone
Cleaning of natural stone shall be carried out after setting, pointing, grouting and
curing has been finished.
Cleaning shall be in compliance with recommended procedures of the natural stone
manufacturer. Cleaning agents shall only be used when recommended by the
After final cleaning a (impregnating and hardening) sealant shall be applied in
compliance with sealant manufacturers instructions.
3 07
Protection
Areas to receive terrazzo or a natural stone finish shall be scheduled as late as
possible in the building program in order to reduce danger from damage and
contamination.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
During the laying operation, tiled areas shall not be accessible except for the tiling
operatives.
Completed tiling shall not be subject to traffic for at least seven (7) days unless
otherwise recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
For general protection, the completed areas shall be covered by a heavy
Polyethylene sheeting of type that will not stain or discolour the finished surface.
When equipment or other heavy loads has to be removed over finished surfaces,
special precaution shall be taken e.g. use of timber planking. However, moving
tackle and the protection itself shall not damage the finished surface.
Stair finishing, nosing and other vulnerable constructions shall be protected by
temporary casings.
Part 4: MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

4 01
Maintenance Manual
a)
b)
4 02
The Contractor shall provide a Maintenance Manual to the Engineer prior to

completion of the Works.
This shall include details of:
i)
Cleaning procedures
ii) Replacement procedures
iii) Maintenance procedures
iv) All other maintenance requirements deemed necessary by the Contractor for
the proper performance of the Terrazzo throughout the period of warranty.
Durability
The Contractor shall ensure that the performance criteria are satisfied for the design life of the
materials, as stated by the Specification provided always that the maintenance has been
carried out as specified by the Contractor.
4 03
Cleaning
The Contractor shall state the frequency and method of cleaning required to maintain
performance. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the maximum time during which
the performance can be maintained together with the frequency and method of cleaning
required to achieve this. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials stipulated for
cleaning have no detrimental effect on the Terrazzo, or on adjacent materials.
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01
General
Work will be measured on the exposed surface
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for voids not
exceeding 0,1 m2
5 02
characteristic.
Coves, decorative strips etc. will be enumerated.
Floor channels will be measured by linear m including outlets, corners, stop ends
and the like.
Stair treads and risers will be measured by linear m for each specified type, grade
and surface characteristic.
Separation layers will be measured by m2. No allowance will be made for
measurement of overlapping joints. No deductions will be made for void not
exceeding 0,50 m2.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01
General
checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning the site and including but
not limited to the following ancillary works.
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused, shall be replaced at
contractors expense.
Material or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be
removed and replaced on Contractors expense.
6 02
Ancillary Works to be Included in the Unit Rate

The unit rate for tiling will include tiling around openings, connections to adjacent
components, laid to pattern, falls and cross falls, bay jointing, sloped surfaces,
cuttings to holes for pipes, sockets, switches, outlets and the like, fixing templates,
preparation of backgrounds including priming, grouting, protecting and cleaning.
The unit rate for tiling will include all movement joints including structural expansion
joints, cleaning, priming, joint filling and sealing.
Movement joints
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09450 - Stone Facing
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
materials, and performing all operations in connection with non-load bearing vertical
natural stone facing of thickness not exceeding 75 mm including soffits and sloped
vertical surfaces.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
Interior stone facing.
02.0
Exterior stone facing.
Related Sections
05810
07150
07200
07900
09300
Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

Damp-proofing
Insulation
Joint Sealer
Tile
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01

ASTM A 666: 00
Standard Specification for Annealed or ColdWorked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,

Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
ASTM B 221M: 00
Standard Specification for Aluminium and

Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles and Tubes (Metric)
ASTM C 97: 96
Standard Test Methods for Absorption and

Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone
ASTM C 99: 87
Standard Test Method for Modulus of

Rupture of Dimension Stone
ASTM C 119: 01
Standard Terminology Relating to Dimension

Stone
ASTM C 144: 99
Standard Specification for Aggregate for

Masonry Mortar
ASTM C 170: 90
Standard Test Method for Compressive

Strength of Dimension Stone
ASTM C 241: 90
Standard Test Method for Abrasion

Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic
ASTM C 270: 01
Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit

Masonry
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 01 04 03
ANSI A 136.1: 92
1 02 01 06
1 02 01 07
ODAC
ASTM C 503: 99
Standard Specification for Marble Dimension

Stone (Exterior)
ASTM C 568: 99
Standard Specification for Limestone

Dimension Stone
ASTM C 615: 99
Standard Specification for Granite Dimension

Stone
ASTM C 616: 99
Standard Specification for Quartz-Based

Dimension Stone
ASTM C 880: 98
Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength

of Dimension Stone
ASTM C 920: 01
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint

Sealants
ASTM F 593: 98
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel

Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs
ASTM F 594: 98

Studs
ASTM F 738M: 01

Metric Bolts, Screws, and Studs
ASTM F 836M: 01

Metric Nuts
American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

Adhesive for Installation of Ceramic Tile
British Standards
BS 1199: 76
Sand from Natural Sources
BS 5980: 97
Adhesive for use with ceramic tiles and

mosaics
BS 6105: 81
Specification for corrosion-resistant stainless

steel fasteners
BS 6213: 00
Selection of constructional sealants Guide

(R)
BS 10095: 99
Heat Resisting Steels and Nickel Alloys
German Standards
DIN 18156-2: 78
Materials for ceramic linings by thin mortar

bed technique; hydraulic mortar
DIN 18156-3: 80

bed technique; dispersion adhesive
DIN 18156-4: 84

bed technique; epoxy resin adhesive
DIN 18515-1: 98
Cladding for External walls Part 1: Tiles

fixed with mortar, principles of design and
application.
DIN 18516-3: 99
Cladding for External walls ventilated at rear

Part 3: Natural stone; Requirements,
design
DIN-EN 1469: 94
Natural Stone Finished products, claddings

- Specifications
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 02
ODAC
DIN-EN 12057: 96
Natural Stone Finished products, modular

tiles - specifications
DIN-EN 12059: 96
Natural Stone Finished products, dimension

stone work specifications
DIN-EN 12372: 99
Natural Stone Test methods Determination

of flexural strength under concentrated load
DIN-EN 12407: 00
Natural Stone Test methods Petrographic

examination
DIN-EN 12440: 01
Natural Stone Determination criteria
DIN-EN 12670: 02
Terminology of natural stone
Codes
BS 6093: 93
Code of Practice for the design of joints and

jointing in building construction
BS 6270
Code of practice for cleaning and

surface repair of buildings
BS 6270-1: 82
Part 1: Natural stone, cast stone and clay and

calcium silicate brick masonry
BS 8000-11: 95
Code of Practice for wall and floor tiling;

Section 11.2: Natural stone tiles
BS 8298: 94
Code of practice for the design and

installation of natural stone cladding and
lining
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Abrasive hardness - refers to the wearing qualities of natural stone subjected to
abrasion by foot traffic.
Arris - the corner or angle formed by the meeting of two surfaces, especially in
mouldings; it can be moulded, unfinished, bevelled, rounded or otherwise shaped.
Axed finish - see bush hammered.
Bush-hammered - a mechanical process which produces textured surfaces.
Textures vary from subtle to rough.
Cavity vent - an opening in filled joints of stone cladding to allow the passage of air
and moisture from inside the wall cavity to the exterior. These vents may be
openings, plastic tubing or wicks.
Cladding - external vertical non-load bearing covering to a structure.
Chamfer - to cut away the edges where two surfaces meet in an external angle,
leaving a bevelled joint at the junction.
Dimension stone - natural stone that has been selected, trimmed, or cut to
specified or indicated shapes or sizes, with or without one or more mechanically
dressed surfaces.
Eggshell finishes - kind of (egg) surface that gives a finish that is neither glossy nor
mat.
Fine rubbed - a smooth natural stone finish free from scratches without gloss.
Finish - final surface applied to the face of a natural stone during fabrication.
Fixing - anchor device to support or tie back a stone facing panel/unit.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Flamed - see thermal finish.

Fleuri cut - the effect obtained when a quarried stone block is cut parallel to its
natural bedding plane. (see fig. 1/Annex 6)
Gauged - a grinding process to make all panels/units of stone to be used together
the same thickness
Granite - a visibly granular, igneous rock generally ranging in colour from pink to
light or dark grey and consisting mostly of quartz and feldspars, accompanied by one
or more dark minerals. The texture is typically homogeneous but may be gneissic or
porphyritic. Some dark granular igneous rocks, through not properly granite, are
included in the definition.
Gritted - grinding a surface with grit stones.
Grout - a mortar used to fill joints.
Honed - (1) a satin smooth surface of natural stone with little or no gloss. (2) Finish
having a dull polish or a matt surface (BS 8298)
Limestone - a rock of sedimentary origin composed principally of calcium carbonate
(the mineral calcite), or the double carbonate of calcium and magnesium (the
mineral dolomite), or some combination of these two minerals. Re-crystalled
limestone, compact microcrystalline limestone, and travertine that are capable of
taking a polish are included in the category of marble.
Load bearing fixing - cladding fixing that transfers the self-weight of one ore more
stone facing panels/units to a structure
Marble - (1) carbonate rock that has acquired a distinctive crystalline texture by
recrystallization, most commonly by heat and pressure during metamorphism, and is
composed principally of the carbonate minerals calcite and dolomite, singly or in
combination.
(ASTM
C
119)
(2) A metamorforic crystalline rock that can be polished glossy and having different
natural colours composed mainly of one or more of the minerals; calcite, dolomite or
serpentine.
Panel - a single unit of fabricated stone used for wall covering.
Pointing - the final filling and finishing of mortar joints that have been raked out
before.
Polished - the finest and smoothest glossy finish on natural stone. Generally only
possible on hard, dense material such as granite and marble.
Polished finish - a highly polished glossy surface which brings out the full colour
and character of the marble.
Restrained fixing - cladding fixing that ties back stone facing panels/units to the
backing or structure or to another restrained unit
Rough finish - a flat non-reflective surface.
Rubbed - smooth finish obtained by rubbing natural stone with an abrasive (BS
8298)
Sandstone - sedimentary rock composed mostly of mineral and rock fragments
within the sand size range (2 to 0,06 mm) and having a minimum of 60% free silica,
cemented or bonded to a greater or lesser degree by various materials including
silica, iron oxides, carbonates, or clay, and which fractures around (not through) the
constituent grains.
Sawn - a natural stone finish with a surface left as the stone comes from the gang
saw.
Slab - a lengthwise cut from a quarry block prior to fabrication (MIA)
Smooth finish - a velvety smooth surface with little or no gloss
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Stone facing - natural stone wall covering with a final surface finish applied as an
exterior or interior vertical surface, thickness of stone not exceeding 75 mm.
Thermal finish - a surface treatment applied by intensive heat flaming.
Tile - a unit of natural stone having a facial area of not more than 0,30 m2 and a
thickness not exceeding 12 mm.
Travertine - a variety of crystalline or microcrystalline limestone distinguished by
layered structure. Pores and cavities commonly are concentrated in some of the
layers, giving rise to an open texture. Travertine that is capable to take a polish will
be defined as marble.
Vein - (1) a sheet-like body of minerals in marble . (2) A layer seams or narrows
irregular body of mineral material different from the surrounding formation.
Vein cut - cutting of a quarried stone block perpendicular to the natural bedding.
Weathering - natural alteration by either chemical or mechanical processes due to
the action of constituents of the atmosphere, surface water, or to temperature
change.
Weep holes - see cavity vent.
1 03 02
Abbreviations
Q.C.
Quality Control
1 04 System Description
1 04 01 01
Design Requirements for Ventilated (Cavity) Stone Facing

A sufficient wide clear cavity shall be provided. The width of the cavity shall be designed
to leave a clear gap not less than 10 mm wide after all construction tolerances have been
accommodated.
When a cavity wider than 100 mm is necessary a supplementary framework or special
fixing shall be provided.
Unless joints between individual facing units or panels are designed to remain open,
necessary cavity vents (weep holes) shall be provided at points where any entrapped
moisture could accumulate.
Unless the building structure already incorporates necessary movement joints, the final
design shall provide all necessary vertical and horizontal movement joints necessary to
prevent damaging the stone facing due to any movement of the structure and/or the
facing.
Anchor design and sizing shall be engineered individually for each application.
All fixings shall allow for three way adjustment to ensure proper fit.
Final design shall be based on specific physical properties of the type of natural stone
specified.
When marble is used externally the surface finish should be preferably either honed or
eggshell since polished marbles may loose their shine under certain atmospheric
conditions.
Unless otherwise proven by structural analysis or performance testing, the minimum
thickness of stone shall comply with Table1/Annex 6.
Where stone facing may be vulnerable to impact damage, special consideration may be
necessary. This should include using thicker stones in the affected area, or sealing the
backs of the stones before fixing and filling the cavity with a lightweight fine concrete mix
after stone fixing.
Design of stone fixing devices shall comply with one ore more of the following methods:
-load bearing fixings
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
-restrained fixings
-combined load bearing and restraint fixings
-face fixings
Typical load bearing, restrained, face and soffit fixings are shown in fig.3-8/Annex 6.
In case the Contract Documents require insulation behind the stone facing in principle,
such insulation shall be
- non-combustible or of limited flame spread as required by applicable building
code regulations.
- non-absorbent
- rot and vermin proof
Design of ventilated vertical stone facings shall comply with BS 8298 or appropriate MIA
requirements unless otherwise indicated.
1 05 Submittals
1 05 01
Product Data
To be submitted for each variety of stone, indicating the petrographic description,
commercial name, and country of origin and physical properties.
Manufacturers catalogues and technical information on all types of fixings, all
accessories, and other manufactured products intended to use within the Project.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
Submit sets of shop drawings, showing general layout, jointing, anchoring, movement
joints, and all other information necessary for fabrication and installation, including
dimension of each panel/unit of natural stone and its identification (setting) number.
1 05 03
Samples
For each variety of stone showing the full range of variations expected in completed
work, in sets of samples of not less than 300 mm2 .
Anchors and other fixings in sets of samples.
For each colour of grout not less than one square meter samples.
Approval of samples does not constitute approval of final work.
1 05 04

Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor
Reports and records of Contractors internal Q.C.
Reports and records of Contractors source Q.C.
indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor, natural
stone manufacturer, or supplier.
three (3) days after checking and testing.
traceability.
Arrangements shall be made and time allowed in Contractors work schedule for
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 06 01
ODAC
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced Standards and at least
five (5) years of documented experience in natural stone facing work and shall have
successfully completed work similar in design, material, and extent to that work indicated
for the Project.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01

Contractors Internal Quality Control shall include but not limited to:
specification and referenced standards prior to first delivery.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and compliance
with supply order and specification.
Checking of correct storage of natural stone panels/units every two weeks.
Checking of finished stone panels/units at the place of fabrication for compliance with
requirements for appearance, soundness, material, and fabrication.
1 06 04 02
External Quality Control
1 06 04 03
Source Quality Control

Obtain each variety of natural stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry with
enough resources to provide material of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
Make quarried blocks and slabs available for the Engineer to examine for appearance
characteristics.
01.0
The Engineer will select aesthetically acceptable material and will
indicate unacceptable material or portions thereof.

1 07 01

All natural stones shall be handled individually unless boxed or crated.
When shipped and stored non-staining spacers between stones shall be used.
Identification, location and/or orientation marks shall be clearly marked on each stone
unit/panel without damaging the exposed face of the stone.
1 07 02

Stone units/panels shall be stored using designed points of support to prevent overstressing.
When scaffolding is required for the work, no material shall be stored on the scaffolds
and runways. Any material supply placed on a scaffold for installation shall not exceed
the safe load-bearing capacity of the scaffolding.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
2 01 Natural Stone
2 01 01
General
All natural stone shall be free of spalls, cracks, open seams and other imperfections that
would impair its strength, durability, or appearance and free of minerals that may cause
objectionable staining under normal conditions.
Any piece of natural stone showing minor flaws or imperfections shall be referred to the
Engineer to decide whether it will be rejected, or allowed for patching or redressing.
Chips at the edges or corners may be patched when approved by the Engineer and
provided the structural integrity of the stone is not affected and provided the patch
matches the colour and finish of the natural stone.
Obtain each variety of natural stone from a single quarry.
Obtain each type of grout, accessory, sealant and other material from a single
manufacturer unless approved otherwise.
2 01 02
Marble
2 01 02 01
General
01.0
Marble shall be capable of taking a polish and shall have the following
physical properties in compliance with ASTM C 503:
-Moisture absorption (Test: ASTM C 97)
max.% 0,20 (exterior use)

0,70 (interior use)
-Density, min. kg/m3 (Test: ASTM C 97)
2595 (Calcite)
2800 (Dolomite)
2690 (Serpentine)
2305 (Travertine)
-Compressive strength, min.MPa (Test: ASTM C 170)
52
-Modulus of rupture, min.MPa (Test: ASTM C 99)
-Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha (Test: ASTM C 241)
10
-Flexural strength, min.MPa (Test: ASTM C 880)
02.0
Marble shall be capable of taking a polish and shall have the following
physical properties:
-Water absorption by weight,
(Test SASO 1026) max.0,20
-Density (bulk specific gravity) kg/m3
(Test SASO 1026)
-Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha (Test SASO 1026)
2 01 02 02
min.2600
10
Marble Wall Panels/Units/Tiles

01.0
Marble used as exterior facing shall be of soundness class

classification A (see MIA classification system) or equivalent.
02.0
Subject to compliance with requirements shown on drawings
03.0
Cut:
03.1
fleuri cut,
03.2
vein cut,
04.0
final surface:
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
04.1
rough finish,
04.2
smooth finish,
04.3
polished finish,
05.0
colour:
05.1
as indicated.
06.0
Subject to compliance with requirements as indicated in ASTM C 503

for marble, marble wall panels/units/tiles shall be of type indicated
below, nominal sizes as shown on drawings or otherwise indicated.
07.0
imported.
08.0
Cut:
08.1
fleuri cut,
08.2
vein cut,
09.0
09.1
polished.
09.2
eggshell.
09.3
honed.
09.4
gritted.
2 01 03
Granite
2 01 03 01
General
01.0
Granite shall have the following physical properties in compliance with
ASTM C 615:
2 01 03 02
-Moisture absorption by weight, max. % (Test: ASTM C 97)
0,40
-Density, min. Kg/m3 (Test: ASTM C 97)
2560
-Compressive strength, min. MPa (Test: ASTM C 170)
131
-Modulus of rupture, min. MPa (Test: ASTM C 99)
10,34
-Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha (Test:ASTM C 241)
not established
-Flexural strength, min. MPa (Test: ASTM C 880)
not established
Granite Wall Panels/Units/Tiles

01.0
Subject to requirements as indicated for granite, granite wall
panels/units/tiles shall be of type indicated below, nominal sizes as shown on
drawings or otherwise indicated
02.0
imported or local
03.0
Cut:
03.1
fleuri cut,
03.2
vein cut,
04.0
04.1
polished.
04.2
eggshell.
04.3
honed.
04.4
fine axed.
04.5
fine rubbed.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
04.6
bush hammered.
2 01 04
Limestone
2 01 04 01
General
01.0
Limestone shall have the following physical properties in compliance
with ASTM C 568:
-Moisture absorpt. by weight, max.%
(Test: ASTM C 97)
-Density, min. Kg/m3 (Test: ASTM C 97)
-Compression. strength, min. MPa

(Test: ASTM C 170)
-Modulus of rupture, min. MPa (ASTM C 99)
-Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha

(Test: ASTM C 241)
2 01 04 02
12
(low-density)
7,5
(medium-density)
(high-density)
1760
(low-density)
2160
(medium-density)
2560
(high-density)
12
(low-density)
28
(medium-density)
55
(high-density)
2,9
(low-density)
3,4
(medium-density)
6,9
(high-density)
10
(low-density)
10
(medium-density)
10
(high-density)
Limestone Wall Panels/Units/Tiles

01.0
Subject to requirements as indicated for limestone, limestone wall

panels/units/ tiles shall be of type indicated below, nominal sizes as
shown on drawings or otherwise indicated:
02.0
imported
03.0
local limestone for final selection by the Engineer,
04.0
low-density,
05.0
medium-density,
06.0
high-density,
07.0
Cut:
07.1
fleuri cut,
07.2
vein cut,
08.0
08.1
fine rubbed.
08.2
sawn.
2 01 05
Sandstone (quartz-based)
2 01 05 01
General
01.0
Sandstone shall have the following physical properties in compliance
with ASTM C 616:
-Moisture absorpt. by weight, max.%
20
(Sandstone)
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
(Test: ASTM C 97)
-Density, min. Kg/m3 (Test: ASTM C 97 )
-Mod. of rupture, min. MPa (Test: ASTM C 99)
-Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha

(Test: ASTM C 241)
2 01 05 02
(Quartzite)
2160
(Sandstone)
2400
2560
(Quartzite)
2,1
(Sandstone)
6,9
13,9
(Quartzite)
(Sandstone)
38
(Quartzite)
Sandstone Wall Panels/Units/Tiles
01.0
Subject to requirements as indicated for sandstone, sandstone panels/units/tiles shall
be of type indicated below, nominal sizes as shown on drawings or otherwise indicated:
01.0
imported sandstone,
02.0
local sandstone,
03.0
to comply with manufacturers representative sample,
04.0
for final selection by the Engineer,
05.0
Cut:
05.1
fleuri cut,
05.2
vein cut,
06.0
06.1
fine rubbed.
06.2
sawn.
2 02 Fixing Materials
2 02 01
Materials for Spotting and Setting Mortar
2 02 01 01
Cement
Cement used shall be Ordinary Portland cement and shall comply with ISO 680: 90, DIN
1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96.
2 02 01 02
Sand
Sand used for mortar shall be a building sand (0-3 mm) from natural sources in
accordance with BS 1199, ASTM C 144, or an equivalent standard.
2 02 01 03
Water
Water shall be fresh and clean potable water.
2 02 01 04
Admixtures
Admixtures shall not contain calcium chloride (BS 8298/page 9) and shall be certified by
the manufacturer as appropriate for the intended use.
2 02 02
Adhesives
All adhesives shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the application
indicated.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 02 02 01
ODAC
Cement-based adhesive shall comply with one of the following Standards:
BS 5980 type 1 or 3
DIN 18156-Part 2
2 02 02 02
Organic Adhesive
Organic adhesive shall comply with one of the following Standards:
BS 5980 type 2 or 4
ANSI A 136.1
DIN 18156-Part 3
2 02 02 03
Epoxy Adhesive
Epoxy adhesive shall be water cleanable prior to initial setting and shall comply with one
of the following Standards:
BS 5980 type 5.
DIN 18156-Part 4.
2 02 03
Fixing Devices
All fixing devices shall be engineered individually for each Project and shall be made of
stainless steel, bronze, brass, or extruded aluminium. Steel fixings for interior stone
facing may be made corrosion resistant by hot-dip galvanising.
All fixing devices shall be non-staining to prevent possible staining of the face of the
cladding due to corrosion. (BS 8298 /page 12)
Stainless steel fixings shall be made of austenitic stainless steel with a carbon content not
exceeding 0,06% and shall comply with BS 1149-2, BS 970-1, BS 6105, ASTM A 666
(type 304) or equivalent.
Fixing devices made from extruded aluminium shall comply with ASTM B 221 or
equivalent. Alloy and temper shall be as necessary to support all loads imposed without
exceeding allowable design stresses, but not less than strength properties of alloy 6063T6.
Site welding and brazing of stainless steel, aluminium, copper and copper based alloy
fixings will only be permitted where the necessary facilities, expert knowledge, skill and
inspection and testing facilities are available.
2 02 04
Wire
Wire tiebacks shall be made of stainless steel, copper or copper alloy, minimum
thickness 3 mm.
2 03
Grout
Grout shall have low shrinkage and appropriate adhesion and shall be appropriate for the
application indicated.
2 03 01
Cement: Sand Grout

Necessary alkali-resistant pigments may be added to achieve white or coloured joints
where indicated.
2 03 02
Cement: Lime: Sand Grout

Necessary alkali-resistant pigments may be added to achieve white or coloured joints
where indicated.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 03 03
Proprietary Grout
2 03 03 01
Cement based Grout

Cement based proprietary grout shall consist of factory mixed cement and other
ingredients/admixtures to achieve white or coloured joints and shall comply with ANSI A
108.10 or an equivalent standard. Only clean water shall be added at the job-site to
obtain the desired consistency.
2 04 Accessories
2 04 01
Joint Accessories
2 04 01 01
General
Any sealant and back-up material used shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable
for the intended use.
Any sealant used for movement joints shall match the colour of grout in stone-faced
areas adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.
Where all joints are required to be sealed, the colour of the sealant shall match the colour
of the stone facing unless otherwise indicated.
2 04 01 02
Back-up Material
Back-up strips shall be flexible, compressible type of closed-cell foam, polyethylene, butyl
rubber, or open or closed-cell polyurethane, rounded at surface to contact sealant as
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
Bond breaker tapes shall be self-adhesive polyethylene or polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE)
tapes.
2 04 01 03
Sealant
Sealant shall be made from:
01.0
One-part polysulfide
02.0
One-part polyurethane
03.0
Two--part polysulfide
04.0
Two-part polyurethane
05.0
Silicone (low modulus type)
For other requirements see Section 07900 Joint Sealants
2 04 01 04
Shims
Shims shall be made of resilient plastic, non-staining to stone, and sized to suit joint
thickness.
2 04 02
Damp-proofing Material
See Section 07150 Damp-proofing
2 05 Fabrication
2 05 01
General
Fabricate stone facing in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated, including details shown on drawings and shop drawings.
Cut stone by vein or fleuri cut as indicated to produce pieces of thickness, size, and
shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and installation tolerances. If the type of
cutting is not indicated, cutting method will be determined and approved by the Engineer.
Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Cut joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.
Drill holes and cut mortices, sinkings, notches for cramps, anchors, and lifting devices as
indicated or needed to install stones securely in place. Use professional tools that will
ensure that cracks do not occur from the process.
Arrange panels/units in the shop or other suitable location in proposed pattern, orientation
and sequence for examination and approval by the Engineer. Rearrange panels/units as
directed by the Engineer until the layout is approved.
Do not cut and trim non-modular sized units/panels to smaller than modular sized units
until layout and pattern are approved by the Engineer
Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish
of each type of natural stone required and to match approved samples.
Identify each panel/unit clearly with its identification mark or symbol.
Fabricators workmen bush-hammering, sandblasting, or dry-grinding without vacuum
equipped features shall wear protective head and face helmets equipped with safetyglass lenses and/or respiratory equipment.
2 05 02
Fabrication Tolerances
The length and height dimensions shall not vary from nominal sizes indicated by more
than 3 mm.
The thickness of stone shall not vary from nominal thickness by more than 3 mm.
The stone faces shall not vary from the plane by more than 1,5 mm in 1200 mm.
The squareness of natural stone, measured by the length of diagonals, shall not vary by
more than 0,5% of the nominal dimension or 5 mm, whichever is less.
The given tolerances shall apply for granite and marble unless otherwise indicated but
may be increased for limestone and sandstone depending on the type of stone and the
quarry.
2 06 Mortar Mixes
2 06 01
General
Materials shall be batched by weight wherever possible and water addition controlled.
Where weight batching is impracticable, mortar ingredients shall be measured by volume
using suitable containers of fixed, measurable size.
Any mortar not used within two (2) hours after adding mixing water shall be removed
Admixtures shall only be used when certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the
intended use.
2 06 02
Spotting and Setting Mortar Mixes
2 06 02 01
Cement:Sand Semi-dry Mix

Cement: sand semi-dry mix shall be 1:3,5 to 1:4 by volume. (1:3,4 to 1:4,6 by weight)
2 06 02 02
Cement:Lime:Sand Mortar
The cement:lime: sand mortar mix shall be 1:1:5 to 6 by volume.
The mortar shall be mixed to a stiff plastic consistency so that when the mortar bed is
fully compacted, free water does not come to the surface.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 06 02 03
ODAC
Proprietary Thin-bed Mortar

Shall be factory mixed in proportions appropriate and recommended by the manufacturer
for the application indicated.
2 06 03
Grouting Mixes
2 06 03 01
Cement:Sand Grout
The proportions of cement:sand shall be 1: 1 for joints not exceeding 3 mm, 1: 2 for joints
between 3-6 mm and 1: 3 for joints wider than 6 mm.
2 06 03 02
The proportions of cement:lime:stone dust or suitable sand shall be 1: 2: 6.
2 06 03 03
Proprietary Grout
Proprietary grout shall be mixed according to manufacturers written instructions.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
All surfaces to receive stone facing shall be inspected for structural soundness, for
existing surface conditions, for installation tolerances and any other conditions affecting
the work.
For the record, all conditions found detrimental to requirements and not allowing a proper
installation of stone facing, shall be listed in a written report issued by the installer and
handed over to the Engineer.
Installation works shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided.
Provisions shall be made for the completion of all subsidiary works necessary before the
application of stone facing begins.
Bases not built accurately or surface conditions that are not suitable shall be corrected
and additional time shall be allowed for setting and curing.
For surfaces receiving adhesive or thin-bed mortar fixing, any laitance on the surface
and contamination by oil, grease wax, dust or any other substances that inhibits adhesion
or may cause staining of stone shall be removed.
Clean natural stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fibre brushes and then drenching with
clear water immediately before fixing. Use only cleaning compounds that contain no
staining or harsh components or abrasives.
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
General
Erect/install stone facing units/panels level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths in
compliance with drawings and shop drawings.
Use temporary shims to maintain joint width. Unless joints are designed to be left open,
remove shims before grouting or pointing.
Fix stone to comply with layout and pattern as indicated. If no special layout or pattern is
required, surfaces shall be arranged in blend pattern, stones centred and balanced.
Expansion joints shall be located to coincide and be continuous with structural expansion
joints. Other movement joints in the stone facing shall be as indicated.
Unless proved by structural analysis or performance testing otherwise, minimum
thickness of stone facing shall comply with table 1/Annex 6 unless otherwise indicated.
Anchor and fixing devices for stone facing shall be designed to withstand dead loads
together with wind pressure and suction.
The suitability of fixings of unusual design and position shall be proven by test.
Mechanical fixings shall be provided by one or more of the following methods:
-self support anchors (load bearing fixings)
-restraint fixings
-combined load bearing and restraint fixings
-face fixings
Typical fixings are shown in fig. 3-8/Annex 6
Fixing of natural stone by means of adhesive will be allowed only for thin stone tiles not
exceeding 12 mm in thickness and surfaces not exceeding 2,50 m in height.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 02
ODAC
Exterior Stone Facing

Exterior stone facing by mortar without using any fixing devices is not recommended. In
general, stone facing with filled cavity is not recommended.
Arrange panels/units/tiles with veining and other natural markings to comply with the
following:
3 03 02 01
01.0
Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which

natural markings occur.
01.1
Arrange panels/units/tiles with veining horizontal.
01.2
Arrange panels/units/tiles with veining vertical.
01.3
Arrange panels/units/tiles with veining as indicated on Drawings.
01.4
Arrange panels/units/tiles in blend pattern (see fig. 2 /Annex 6).
01.5
Arrange adjacent panels/units/tiles book matched (see fig. 2/Annex 6)

for single height, diamond match if more than one course in height.
01.6
End match panels/units/tiles stacked one above the other if no units are
directly adjacent.
01.7
Arrange panels/units/tiles sideslip pattern (see fig. 2/Annex 6) if one

course height.
01.8
Arrange units in end-slip pattern (see fig. 2/Annex 6).
Stone Setting with Vented Cavity
3 03 02 01 01 Installation
01.0
Natural stone panels/units shall be set firmly against (cement) mortar spots
(spacer dabs) located at or near the restraining fixings and spaced not more than 50 cm
apart over the back of the panel/unit. If restraining fixing devices fit into grooves routed
into stone facing panels/units, setting mortar spots are not required.
Joint width shall be maintained with non-staining resilient cushions placed at least a joint
width back from stone face in case non-load-bearing fixing devices are being used.
If the fixing devices are not self-supporting (load bearing type), support angles shall be
provided over all openings, at each storey height, or as indicated. Supporting angles shall
have weep holes at least every 60 cm.
Anchors, dowels, cramps, wires and the like shall be securely attached to the structure
and to the facing stone according to manufacturers requirements and as shown on
drawings and shop drawings.
A minimum of four anchors shall be provided for panels up to one square meter, with two
additional anchors for each additional 0,7 square meter of surface area unless otherwise
indicated.
Wire tieback systems shall be only used up to two (2) stories in height.
Cavity vents (weep holes) shall be provided in the joints at approximately 1,5 m
horizontal intervals and 6 m maximum vertical intervals unless joints are required to be
left unfilled.
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum width of mortar joints shall be 3 mm and of
elastomeric sealant joints 5 mm except for structural expansion and other movement
joints.
Installation shall be in compliance with requirements established by the Marble Institute
of America (MIA) in Design Manual IV and/or in BS 8298 unless otherwise indicated.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 02 01 02
ODAC
Jointing
01.0
Joint width shall be maintained with non-staining resilient cushions

placed at least a joint width back from stone face in case non-loadbearing fixing devices are being used.
01.1
Joints: grouted to match the colour of the stone facing.
01.2
Joints: sealed with elastomeric sealant to match the colour of the stone
facing, including joint back up.
01.3
Joints: left open, unfilled
01.4
Joints: as indicated.
02.0
Joint width shall be maintained by a mortar bed screed level and full,
but kept away back 20 mm from the joint face before the stone
unit/panel is lowered into place. All joints shall be completely filled.
Vertical joints may be filled by pouring grout into joints or rear edges of
units/panels being buttered before setting. .
To prevent any squeezing of mortar into the ventilation cavity,
performed plastic strips or tapes shall be used.
3 03 02 02
02.1
02.2
Joints: sealed with elastomeric sealant.
Stone Setting with Thin-bed Mortar or Adhesive

Shall be only used for small size natural stone tiles! However, vertical surfaces should not
exceed 2,40 m in height.
3 03 02 02 01
Installation
01.0
Instructions given by the adhesive or mortar manufacturer shall be

observed and followed. If required, background shall be primed.
Where gaps in the background exceed 3 mm, local corrections by dubbing out up to 6
mm thick may be done by using the same adhesive or mortar. However, this method shall
be certified as appropriate by the adhesive or mortar manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
For fixing, the notched trowelling method shall be used: The adhesive or thin-bed mortar
shall be applied to the surface as a float coat with a trowel, pressing the adhesive or
mortar onto the surface to give a bed thickness not exceeding 3 mm unless otherwise
required by the manufacturer, which shall then be combed through with a notched trowel
of type recommended by the manufacturer of the adhesive or mortar.
This will give a series of ribs into which the dry natural stone tiles shall be pressed with a
twisting or sliding action to obtain maximum bonding. Average contact area shall be at
least 95% when not less than three tiles are removed for inspection.
All tiles shall be fixed in position before surface drying of the adhesive or mortar
commences.
For external surfaces, only cement-based or epoxy-resin based adhesive or thin-bed
mortar shall be used.
3 03 02 02 02
3 03 03
Jointing
01.1
Joints: grouted to match the colour of the stone tiles.
01.2
Joints: grouted as indicated.
Interior Stone Facing

Stones shall be arranged to pattern as indicated:
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Arrange panels/units/tiles with veining and other natural markings to comply with the
following:
01.0
Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which

natural markings occur.
01.1
Arrange panels/units/tiles with veining horizontal.
01.2
Arrange panels/units/tiles wit veining vertical.
01.3
Arrange panels/units/tiles with veining as indicated on Drawings.
01.4
Arrange panels/units/tiles in blend pattern (see fig.2 /Annex 6).
01.5
Arrange adjacent panels/units/tiles book matched (see fig. 2/Annex 6)

for single height, diamond match if more than one course in height.
01.6
End match panels/units/tiles stacked one above the other if no units are
directly adjacent.
01.7
Arrange panels/units/tiles sideslip pattern (see fig. 2/Annex 6) if one

course height.
01.8
Arrange units in end-slip pattern (see fig. 2/Annex 6).
3 03 03 01
Stone Setting with Vented Cavity
3 03 03 01 01
Installation
01.0
Natural stone panels/units shall be set firmly against (cement or

gypsum) mortar spots (spacer dabs) located at or near the restraining
fixings and spaced not more than 50 cm apart over the back of the
panel/unit. If restraining fixing devices fit into grooves routed into stone
facing panels/units, setting mortar spots are not required.
Joint width shall be maintained with non-staining resilient cushions placed at least a joint
width back from stone face in case non-load-bearing fixing devices are being used.
If the fixing devices are not self-supporting (load bearing type), support angles shall be
provided over all openings, at each storey height, or as indicated. Supporting angles shall
have weep holes at least every 60 cm.
Anchors, dowels, cramps, wires and the like shall be securely attached to the structure
and to the facing stone according to manufacturers requirements and as shown on
drawings and shop drawings.
A minimum of four anchors shall be provided for panels up to one square meter, with two
additional anchors for each additional 0,7 m2 of surface area unless otherwise indicated.
Wire tieback systems (restrained fixings) shall be only used up to two (2) stories in
height.
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum width of mortar joints shall be 3 mm and of
elastomeric sealant joints 5 mm except for structural expansion and other movement
joints.
Installation shall be in compliance with requirements established by the Marble Institute
of America (MIA) in Design Manual IV and/or in BS 8298 unless otherwise indicated.
3 03 03 01 02
Jointing
01.0
Joint width shall be maintained with non-staining resilient cushions

placed at least a joint width back from stone face in case non load
bearing fixing devices are being used.
01.1
01.2
Joints: sealed with elastomeric sealant to match the colour of the stone
facing, including joint back-up.
01.3
Joints: left open, unfilled

19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 03 02
ODAC
01.4
Joints: as indicated.
02.0
Joint width shall be maintained by a mortar bed screeded level and full,
but kept away back 20 mm from the joint face before the stone
unit/panel is lowered into place. All joints shall be completely filled.
Vertical joints may be filled by pouring grout into joints or rear edges of
units/panels being buttered before setting. .To prevent any squeezing
of mortar into the ventilation cavity, performed plastic strips or tapes
shall be used.
02.1
02.2
Joints: sealed with elastomeric sealant.
Stone Setting with Thin-bed Mortar or Adhesive

Shall be only used for small seized natural stone tiles! However, vertical surfaces
should not exceed 2, 40 m in height.
3 03 03 02 01
Installation
01.0
Instructions given by the adhesive or mortar manufacturer shall be

observed and followed. If required, background shall be primed.
Where gaps in the background exceed 3 mm, local corrections by dubbing out up to 6
mm thick may be done by using the same adhesive or mortar. However, this method shall
be certified as appropriate by the adhesive or mortar manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
For fixing, the notched trowelling method shall be used: The adhesive or thin-bed mortar
shall be applied to the surface as a float coat with a trowel, pressing the adhesive or
mortar onto the surface to give a bed thickness not exceeding 3 mm unless otherwise
required by the manufacturer, which shall then be combed through with a notched trowel
of type recommended by the manufacturer of the adhesive or mortar.
This will give a series of ribs into which the dry natural stone tiles shall be pressed with a
twisting or sliding action to obtain maximum bonding. Average contact area shall be at
least 95% when not less than three tiles are removed for inspection.
All tiles shall be fixed in position before surface drying of the adhesive or mortar
commences.
3 03 03 02 02
3 03 04
Jointing
01.1
Joints: grouted to match the colour of the stone tiles.
01.2
Joints: grouted as indicated.
Installation Tolerances
01.0
Variation from plumb: Do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm, or 6 mm

maximum.
02.0
Variation of linear building line: For positions shown in drawings, do not

exceed
02.1
3 mm in 2400 mm.
02.2
6 mm in 6000 mm.
02.3
10 mm maximum.
03.0
Variation in cross-sectional dimensions: From dimensions indicated, do

not exceed plus or minus 3 mm.
04.0
Variation in joint width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1,5 mm or
of joint width, whichever is less.
05.0
Variation in plane between adjacent stone units/panels: Do not exceed

1 mm difference between planes of adjacent units/panels.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 05
ODAC
Movement Joints
In order to prevent a build up of compressive forces, movement joints shall be as
indicated in drawings and where necessary due to the method of stone fixing.
Where stone panels/units are set in mortar bed, horizontal and vertical movement joints
shall be provided at 5,00 m maximum intervals and between 1,50 m - 3,00 m away from
any corner unless otherwise indicated.
Movement joints shall be sealed with an elastomeric sealant.
Joint width shall depend on the expected amount of movement and the maximum strain
that can be accommodated by the sealant. Joint width shall not be less than 10 mm per
5,00 m stone facing.

Replace damaged stones and finished surfaces in a way that results of stone matches
approved samples and mock-ups, complying with all other requirements and showing no
evidence of being replaced.
Replace joints not matching approved samples and mock-ups in design, size, colour and
other requirements.
Cleaning of natural stone shall be carried out after setting, pointing, grouting and curing
has been finished.
Cleaning shall be in compliance with recommended procedures of the natural stone
manufacturer. Cleaning agents shall only be used when recommended by the
3 07 Protection
Surfaces to receive natural stone facing shall be scheduled as late as possible in the
building program in order to reduce danger from damage and contamination.
Vulnerable stone facings exposed to other construction works shall be protected by
temporary casings.
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
Work will be measured on the exposed surface.
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for voids not exceeding
0,1 m2.
Exterior and interior stone facing will be measured separately.
Stone facing with vented cavity will be measured separately.
Soffits, columns, pillars and the like will be measured separately.
characteristic of natural stone.
Soffits, columns, pillars and the like will be measured by m2 for each specified type,
grade, and surface characteristic of natural stone.
Structural expansion joints may be measured by linear meter (m).
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning the site and including but not
limited to the following ancillary works.
Material which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused shall be replaced at
Material or work which does not conform to specification requirements shall be removed
and replaced on Contractors expense.
5 02 Ancillary Works to be Included in the Unit Rate

The following ancillary works shall be included in the unit rate:
Facing around openings, connections to adjacent components, laid to pattern, sloped
vertical surfaces, cuttings to holes for pipes, sockets, switches, outlets and the like, fixing
templates, preparation of backgrounds including priming, protecting and cleaning.
All anchorage items.
Grouting where indicated.
All movement joints except structural expansion joints including cleaning, priming, joint
back-ups and sealing.
Movement joints
Overhand working.
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01 Tables
Table 1: Minimum Thickness of Stone
Stone type
Stone thickness
Stone location
G
Mw
T
Ls
K
Mb
Ls
Ss
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
20
20
50
30
30
NA
50
40
40
NA
75
40
30
30
40
30
30
NA
NA
NA
75
50
50
20
20
20
50
30
30
NA
50
30
40
NA
75
40
40
NA
75
SL
Q
Cladding (external )
Less than 3.7 m above ground or floor
level and continuously supported (incl.
fascias)
Fascias less than 3.7 m above ground
or floor level and continuously supported
(incl. fascias)
More than 3.7 m above ground or floor
fascias)
4)
Soffits (including inclined soffits)
Sills, copings and supported reveals
Stone faced concrete units
Lining (internal)
Less than 7 m above ground or floor
5)
fascias)
Less than 7 m but more than 3.7 m
above ground or floor level on corbels in
slots (incl. fascias)
More than 7 m above ground or floor
level (incl. fascias(
Soffits (including inclined soffits)
4)
Abbreviations
G Granites
Ls limestone (e.g. Portland, Bath, Clipsham)
LsH Hard limestones (e.g. Roman stone)
Mb Brecciated marbles
Mw Homogeneous marbles
Q Quartzites
SL States(those unlikely to delaminate
Ss Sandstones(e.g. York,Northumberland, Scottish)
NA not applicable
T Travertines
4)The figures in the table apply to soffit stones not exceeding 900 mm x 600 mm.
If stones of a greater size are required consideration should be given to using
some face fixings and/or additional fixings in the length and/or increased
thickness.
Internal soffit stone not less than 1.2 m and not more than 3.7 m above floor
level, continuously supported at reveals may be 20 mm thick for G, Q, SL, T,
Lsh, Mw, and 50 for Ls and Ss.
5)Internal cladding between 3.7 m and 7 m in height in a continuous face should
have an intermediate corbel course.
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
6 02 Figures
Fig. 1: Fleuri and Vein Cut
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 2: Stone facing patterns
26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig 3: Illustration of typical load bearing fixings
27
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Movement joint below

loadbearing fixing
t
d
a) Bottom edge support
b) Bottom edge support with restraint
Preformed
pocket
15 deg.
1/3
2/3
c) Support by a corbel plate in a slot
d) Support by corbel plate in a slot with restraint
Note 1: t is the minimum thickness of stone behind cramp mortice.

d is the minimum depth of slot for a corbel plate.
Note 2: See 6 01 01 for the recommended minimum thickness of stone in front of a slot or mortice
Fig. 4: Details of typical load bearing fixings
28
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 5: Illustration of typical restraint fixings
29
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 6: Details of typical restraint fixings
30
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 7: Illustration of typical face and soffit fixings
31
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
:t
:
Fig. 8: Detail soffit fixing
32
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09500 - Acoustical Treatment
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
materials, and performing all operations in connection with production and installation
of acoustical treatment.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
Acoustical Ceilings
02.0
Acoustical Wall Treatment
03.0
Acoustical Space Units
04.0
Acoustical Insulation and Barriers
Related Sections
04200
Unit Masonry
09200
Lath and Plaster
09250
Gypsum Board
09545
Special Ceiling Surfaces
15050
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 03
International Standards
1 02 01 03 01
International Standards Organization (ISO)

ISO 209 ISO 209 - 1: 89
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys

Chemical composition
ISO 834 : 99
Fire-resistance tests - Elements of building construction
ISO 3575: 76
Continuous hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet of

commercial, lock forming and drawing qualities.
ISO 6361 -
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheets, strips

and plates.
Mechanical properties
ISO 6361 -2: 90

ISO 6362 -
ISO 6362 -2: 90

ISO 7599: 83
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy extruded

rods/bars,
tubes and profiles.
Anodising of aluminium and its alloys - General
specification for
anodic oxide coatings on aluminium.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01

ASTM C 367: 99
Test Methods for Strength Properties of Prefabricated

Architectural Acoustical Tile or Lay-in Ceiling Panels
ASTM C 423: 01
Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound

Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room
Method
ASTM C 635: 00
Standard Specification for Manufacture, Performance,

and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings
ASTM C 636: 96
Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling

Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels
ASTM E 119: 00
Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building

Construction and Materials
1 02 01 04 24 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

UL 263: 97
1 02 01 06
1 02 01 07
UL Standard for Safety: Fire Tests of Building

Construction and Material
British Standards
BS 6496: 84(91)
Specification for powder organic coatings to aluminium
BS 6497: 84(91)
Specification for powder organic coatings to galvanized

Steel
German Standards
DIN 18164 - 2: 01 Cellular plastics as insulating building materials Part 2:
Insulating materials for impact sound insulation made of
rigid expanded polystyrene foam
DIN 18165 - 2: 01 Fibrous insulating building materials; impact sound
insulating
materials
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Airborne sound - this term is applied when the mechanical vibrations are
propagated like wave motions in air or other gases
Coffered ceiling - ceiling with recessed panels
Dry lining - sheathing of a solid wall with prefabricated boards
Drywall - wall consisting of a metal or wood stud support system, sheathed both
sides with prefabricated boards
Furring channels - steel profiles running crosswise to main carriers, fixed to these
ones, onto which the plasterboard is screwed
Gypsum wallboard - building board consisting of a core encased in and firmly
bonded to paper liners with a finish suitable for painting or wallpapering
Impact sound - the mechanical vibrations travel within solid bodies, i.e. concrete,
masonry, metal etc.
Main (intermediate) carriers - row of steel profiles for suspended ceilings which is
fixed by hangers to the substructure
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Modular pan grid (beam grid) - metal pan-type suspension grid which allows drywalls to be fixed to the suspended ceiling
Runners - U-shaped steel profiles used as floor and ceiling members for drywalls;
main carriers of T-grid systems are also called runners
Sound - sound is understood to be mechanical vibrations, which contain frequencies
within a range from approximately 16 to 16000 Hz
Studs - C-shaped steel profiles or dimensioned lumber used as vertical members for
drywalls
1 03 02
Abbreviations
CAC
deg C
kPa
max.
min.
N/cm3
NRC
RH
UL
Ceiling Attenuation Class; previously CSTC - Ceiling Sound

Transmission Class (US)
degree Celsius
kilo Pascal
maximum
minimum
Newton/cm3
Noise Reduction Coefficient (US) - see ASTM C423
Relative Humidity
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of acoustical tile and panel and metal support
system for suspended ceilings specified, including label compliance, fire-ratings,
finishes and maintenance instructions.
Provide manufacturers certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance
with referenced standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide minimum three (3) samples for initial selection purposes for ceiling- and wall
tiles and panels and metal support system.
1 05 04

Documented experience of contractors site supervisor(s).
Reports and records of contractors External Quality Control
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturer
regularly engaged in manufacture of gypsum plasterboards, gypsum ceiling tiles
and steel profiles for support systems and with a history of successful production
1 06 01 02
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work .
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01

specification.

1 07 01

Deliver materials to site originally packed by manufacturer in unopened containers.
Protect materials during delivery to comply with manufacturers directions. Damaged
materials shall be replaced at Contractor's costs.
1 07 02

Store materials at building site strictly according to manufacturers instructions. Store
products in a dry place. Ceiling tiles and panels shall be protected against marring,
soil and damage. Cover the bottom of tiles with moisture proof materials and allow
for circulation under cover to prevent condensation.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 2:
ODAC
Products
2 01 Acoustical Ceilings
2 01 01
2 01 02
Suspension Profiles
01.0
Steel profiles for main carriers (intermediate channels), furring

channels, cross T's, etc. shall be made of galvanized steel complying
with ISO 3575 or an equivalent Standard. Coating designation shall be
G90
(275
g/m2).
Powder organic coating shall have a minimum thickness of 60
micrometer and comply with BS 6497 or an equivalent Standard.
02.0
Aluminium profiles for main carriers (intermediate channels), furring

channels cross T's, etc. shall be made of aluminium alloy complying
with ISO 209 and 6361-2 , respectively 6362-2 or an equivalent
Standard.
Anodised finish shall be of min. thickness 10 micrometer, complying
with
ISO
7599
or
an
equivalent
Standard.
Powder organic coating shall comply with BS 6496 or an equivalent
Standard.
03.0
Standard rod hangers shall be adjustable, hot-dip galvanized and

have a minimum diameter of 4 mm.
04.0
Hangers for impact resistant, or modular pan grid suspended ceilings

shall be made of profiled, hot-dip galvanized steel.
05.0
The visible part of suspension profiles shall be painted with

manufacturer's standard semi-gloss, white enamel paint or as
otherwise indicated in schedules.
Mineral Fibre Tiles and Panels

Standard concealed systems for mineral fibre ceilings are not demountable and are
available with butt joints or shadow gap joints. Demountable concealed systems are
only available with butt joints. Tiles and panels for exposed grid systems are
available with square or rabetted edges (shadowline) and some manufacturer's
special edge treatments.
Tiles and panels shall be made of either compressed, wet-felted mineral fibres or
manufactured by the casting process. They shall be non-combustible and comply
with the requirements of ASTM C367 or an equivalent Standard. The minimum
thickness shall be 15 mm.; large size panels may have to be thicker. They shall be
factory finished as indicated in schedules.
2 01 03
Special Function Tiles and Panels

For 'Clean Rooms' tiles and panels are made with special surfaces. The core may be
mineral fibre or even gypsum. 'Clean Rooms' are defined according to Federal
Standard 209 (US) into 4 cleanliness classes: Class 100, 1.000, 10.000 and
100.000. Class 1 and 10 have been added to meet the requirements for VLSI (very
large scale integrated) circuits production. In a class 100 room the particle count
cannot exceed 100/cu ft of max. 0,5 micrometer.
2 01 03 01
High Humidity Areas

Tiles and panels shall withstand temperature of 40 deg C and high humidity of up to
90 %RH without deterioration and visible sag. They shall also meet the requirements
for sound and fire protection as indicated and be tested by an authorised and
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 03 02
ODAC
Clean Rooms
Tiles and panels shall meet the requirements for the indicated class of 'Clean
Rooms' as per definition of Federal Standard 209. They shall also meet the
requirements for sound and fire protection as indicated and be tested by an
authorised and independent laboratory.
2 01 04
Metal Tiles and Panels
2 01 04 01
Clip-in Tiles and Panels

Clip-in tiles and panels are mainly produced in a square format of 60 x 60 cm. The
finished ceiling will be completely even with only the joints being visible.
2 01 04 02
01.0
Clip-in panels shall be made from either galvanized steel or

aluminium. Material thickness for steel shall be minimum 0,5 mm and
0,6 mm for aluminium. Galvanized steel shall comply with ISO 3575 or
an equivalent Standard. Coating designation shall be G60 (180 g/m2).
02.0
Surfaces shall be even without warp or buckle and perforated with a

minimum open area of 20 %. They shall have an acoustic backing of
black faced mineral fibreboards of 40 mm thickness with minimum
weight of 40 kg/m3 or as otherwise indicated.
03.0
Finish: Aluminium or steel shall receive powder organic coating of

minimum thickness 60 micrometer, complying with BS 6496,
respectively 6497 or an equivalent Standard; colour as indicated in
schedules.
Lay-In Tiles and Panels

Lay-in panels are used with visible suspension systems only. They are normally
produced with a coffer, which will provide a negative coffered ceiling. The coffer will
be below the level of the suspension. Suspension may be only a standard T-grid
system or a modular pan grid system. It is advisable to use high coffers only with
pan grids of 100 mm or more.
01.0
Lay-in panels shall be made from either galvanized steel or

aluminium. Material thickness for steel shall be minimum 0,5 mm and
0,6 mm for aluminium. Galvanized steel shall comply with ISO 3575 or
an equivalent Standard. Coating designation shall be G60 (180 g/m2).
02.0
They shall be produced with a coffer of indicated height.. Surfaces

shall be even without warp or buckle and perforated with a minimum
open area of 20 %. They shall have an acoustic backing of black
faced mineral fibre boards of 40 mm thickness with a minimum weight
of 40 kg/m3 or as otherwise indicated.
03.0
Finish: Aluminium or steel shall receive powder organic coating of

minimum thickness 60 micrometer, complying with BS 6496,
respectively 6497 or an equivalent Standard; colour as indicated in
schedules.
2 04 Acoustical Insulation and Barriers

2 04 01
Materials to Reduce Impact Sound
2 04 01 01
Polystyrene Foam Boards

Polystyrene foam boards used for minimising impact sound shall be of medium
density with a dynamic stiffness of less than 30 N/cm3 and shall comply with DIN
18164 - 2 or an equivalent Standard.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 04 01 02
ODAC
Mineral Fibre Boards

Mineral fibre boards used for minimising impact sound shall be of medium to high
density with a dynamic stiffness of less than 30 N/cm3 and shall comply with DIN
18165 - 2 or an equivalent Standard.
2 04 02
Materials to Reduce Airborne Sound

These materials are either used to improve the reverberation of a room, or to
improve the overall sound-insulating quality of a construction, i.e. stud walls. Mineral
fibre boards up to approximately 30 mm thickness are absorbing high frequencies
very well; for absorbing lower frequencies the boards have to be thicker.
01.0
Mineral fibre blanket or board insulation material shall be non

combustible and of low to medium density.
02.0
For suspended ceiling overlays blanket or board insulation material

may be used. One side shall have a facing of dark grey or black
colour, which stabilises the surface and acts as a visual barrier for
perforated ceiling panels.
03.0
For cavity insulation in walls only insulation boards of medium density

(approximately 40 kg/m3) shall be used.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 3:
ODAC
Execution
installation work, such as electrical and plumbing work, which has to be carried out
before the Works specified herein, is complete. Correct conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
specifications and schedules. A pre-installation meeting for co-ordination purposes
among the different trades involved shall be held.
3 03 Installation
Installation of acoustical material shall not be performed when the building is
excessively cold and damp. Temperature and humidity conditions closely
approximating the interior conditions during occupation shall be maintained during
and after installation.
3 03 01
Acoustical Ceiling
For installation of suspended ceilings establish finish floor level and mark it securely
in each room.
3 03 01 01
Grid System
There are generally 3 different grid systems: Concealed T-grid (special for clip-in
method), exposed T-grid and modular pan grid systems. The later uses a metal pan
grid of 75/100/125 and sometimes 150 mm width. This grid is used for fixing drywalls within the modular system to the ceilings. The exposed T-grids are available in
different variations, depending on the manufacturer.
3 03 01 02
01.0
Provide grid system of type, size and finish indicated in drawings and
schedules. It shall comply with ASTM C635 or an equivalent Standard.
Grid systems shall be installed true, straight and level with border
strips or indicated drop referring to finish floors level. The maximum
deflection under the nominal drop shall be less than 3 mm.
02.0
Main runners shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the

indicated substructure. Spacing of hangers shall follow manufacturer's
instructions for the weight of the ceiling, including installation elements
like luminaries and air diffusers. Cross grid, pre-manufactured for the
module size, shall be set in between the main runners. The perimeter
angle of indicated shape should be fixed to surrounding walls.
Installation shall comply with ASTM C636.
Tiles and Panels

Mineral fibre tiles and panels are produced in a wide range of sound ratings (NRC),
from 0,2 up to 0,95, depending mainly on the finish. The NCR for metal pan ceilings
is much more limited. It depends on the perforation and the insulation layer.
A certain CAC may be necessary if there are room separations under a continuous
ceiling. It defines the reduction of noise passing via the suspended ceiling from one
room to the other.
01.0
Provide tiles and panels of type, size and finish indicated in

schedules.
Tiles and panels for exposed grid systems shall be placed loosely in
the grid frame after finishing all electrical and mechanical installation.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Place tiles and panels for concealed systems according to

manufacturer's instructions. Metal pan lay-in panels shall be provided
with
gaskets
between
grid
and
panels.
Tiles and panels shall be handled with care to prevent any damage to
the finish.
3 03 01 03
02.0
If impact resistant ceiling is required, tiles and panels shall be secured

with manufacturer's special clamps.
03.0
NRC: Provide mineral fibre and special function tiles and panels with a
minimum sound absorption (NRC) of 0,30 or as otherwise indicated.
They shall be tested by an independent laboratory according to ASTM
C423 or an equivalent Standard.
04.0
CAC: Provide tiles and panels with indicated Ceiling Attenuation Class
(CAC). To achieve the indicated CAC a ceiling overlay of mineral fibre
mats of the necessary thickness, 120 cm at both sides of a separating
wall may be applied.
04.1
Tests for the required CAC shall be done by an authorised and

04.2
The CAC shall be field tested by an authorised and independent

laboratory.
Fire Rating
Provide fire rating either for the support structure and suspended ceiling as a whole
or for the suspended ceiling alone as indicated in schedules. Ceiling systems shall
either be UL-listed or tested by an authorised and independent laboratory according
to ISO 834 or ASTM E119 or an equivalent Standard.
3 03 04
Acoustical Insulation and Barriers
3 03 04 01
Materials to reduce impact sound

Polystyrene foam or mineral fibre boards of the indicated strength and thickness
used for minimising impact sound shall be laid loosely onto the floor slab, following
manufacturer's recommendations. They shall be covered by a water-resistant
membrane before applying any water containing floor finishes, i.e. screeds.

Pre-finished ceiling tiles shall be laid only when no major dust development by other
trades is to be expected. They shall be thoroughly clean at time of acceptance of the
work (Preliminary handing over).
3 06 Demonstration
Removing of tiles and panels for maintenance purposes and handling of clip-on (in)
metal panels shall be demonstrated to Employer's personnel.
3 07 Protection
Protect all works as recommended by manufacturer to ensure that it is without
damage at time of Substantial Completion.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not
exceeding 2,5 m2.
Suspension systems whether visible or non-visible will be measured by m2.
Ceiling tiles and panels will be measured by m2.
Acoustical wall treatment will be measured by m2.
Provision of joints in wall lining will be measured by linear m.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples and mockups, co-ordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality
assurance, cleaning and protecting.

(1) Providing openings in wall coverings.
(2) Cut-outs for electrical and mechanical components.
(3) Mounting of electrical and mechanical equipment in co-operation with the
respective trades.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09545 - Special Ceiling Surfaces
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment
and materials, and performing all operations in connection with production and
installation of special ceiling surfaces.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
Linear Metal Ceilings
02.0
Mirror Panel Ceilings
03.0
Textured Metal Ceiling Panels
04.0
Textured Gypsum Ceiling Panels
05.0
Linear Wood Ceilings
06.0
Suspended Decorative Grids
Related Sections
09250
Gypsum Board
09500
Acoustical Treatment
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 03
1 02 01 03 01

ISO 209 - 1:
89 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys

Chemical composition
ISO 834:
99Fire-resistance tests - Elements of building construction
ISO 3574:
99 Cold-rolled carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing

qualities.
ISO 3575:
76Continuous hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet of

commercial, lock-forming and drawing qualities.
ISO 6361 - 2:
90Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheets, strips and

plates.
ISO 6362 - 2:
90Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy extruded

rods/bars, tubes and profiles. Mechanical properties
ISO 7599:
83Anodising of aluminium and its alloys - General

specification for anodic oxide coatings on aluminium
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
1 02 01 06
ASTM C 635: 00
Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and

Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panel Ceilings
ASTM C 636: 96
Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in
Panels
ASTM E 119: 00
Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials
British Standards
BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS 476 - 6: 89
Method of test for fire propagation for products
BS 476 - 7: 97
Method for classification of the surface spread of flame of
products
1 02 01 07
BS 1186 - 2: 88
Timber for and workmanship in joinery Specification for

workmanship
BS 6496: 84 (91)
BS 6497: 84 (91)
Specification for powder organic coatings to galvanized Steel
German Standards
DIN 18180: 89
1 02 03
Gypsum plasterboard; types, requirements, testing.
Other References
UL 263: 97
UL Standard for Safety: Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials
Codes and Standards: Comply with pertinent requirements of
Egyptian authorities.
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Coffered ceiling - ceiling with recessed panels
Furring channels - steel profiles running crosswise to main carriers, fixed to these ones,
onto which the plasterboard is screwed
Main (intermediate) carriers - row of steel profiles for suspended ceilings which is fixed
by hangers to the substructure
Modular pan grid - metal pan-type suspension grid which allows dry-walls to be fixed to
the suspended ceiling
Runners - U-shaped steel profiles used as floor and ceiling members for drywalls; main
carriers of T-grid systems are also called runners
1 03 02
Abbreviations
deg C
max.
min.
NFPA
degree Celsius
maximum
minimum
National Fire protection Association (US)
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
RH
UL
Relative Humidity
1 04 System Description
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of acoustical tile and panel and metal support system
for suspended ceilings specified, including label compliance, fire-ratings, finishes and
maintenance instructions.
referenced Standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide minimum three (3) samples for initial selection purposes for all ceiling tiles, panels
and metal support systems.
1 05 04

Documented experience of contractors site supervisor(s) (see ref. 1 06 01 02)
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacture of ceiling tiles, panels and suspension systems, with a history of
successful production acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of work .
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least
five (5) years of documented experience.
1 06 01 03
All panels or strips shall match in finish/Color. Oilcanning, warping or
the metal pan are unacceptable.
other deformity of
Metal acoustical panels or strips shall have the following fire performance characteristics,
tested per ASTM E84.
1.
Flame Spread:
25 or less.
2.
Smoke Developed:
25 or less.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
ODAC
Contractors internal Quality Control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification.

1 07 01

Deliver materials to site originally packed by manufacturer in unopened containers. Protect
materials during delivery to comply with manufacturers directions. Damaged materials
shall be replaced at Contractor's cost.
1 07 02

products in a dry place. Ceiling tiles and panels shall be protected against marring, soil and
damage. Cover the bottom of tiles with moisture proof materials and allow for circulation
under cover to prevent condensation.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 2:
ODAC
Products
2 01 Linear Metal Ceilings

2 01 01
Suspension Profiles
2 01 02 01
01.0
Steel profiles for carriers and perimeter trim shall be made of

galvanized steel complying with ISO 3575 or an equivalent
Standard. Coating designation shall be G90 (275 g/m2).
02.0
Profiles for ceilings with open joints shall be painted satin black
with manufacturer's standard enamel paint. Perimeter trim shall
be painted as ceiling panels.
03.0
Profiles used for aluminium panels shall be coated to prevent

contact-corrosion.
04.0

05.0
Fire rated suspension shall be either UL-listed or tested

according to ISO 834, or ASTM E119, or an equivalent Standard.
Provide a 'Third Party' certificate for the required fire rating.
Steel Panels
Panels shall be made of galvanized steel, minimum thickness 0,4 mm, complying with ISO
3575 or an equivalent Standard. Coating designation shall be G60 (185 g/ m2) for interior
use and G90 (275 g/ m2) for exterior use.
Finish: Powder organic coating shall comply with BS 6497 or an equivalent Standard, with
a minimum thickness of 60 micrometer.
2 01 02 02
Aluminium Panels
Panels shall be made of aluminium alloy, minimum thickness 0,5 mm, complying with ISO
6361 or an equivalent Standard.
Finish: Powder organic coating shall comply with BS 6496 or an equivalent Standard, with
a minimum thickness of 60 micrometer.
Anodised finish shall comply with ISO 7599 or an equivalent Standard, with a minimum
thickness of 10 micrometer.
2 02 Mirror Ceilings
2 02 01
Suspension Profiles
01.0
Steel profiles for main carriers (intermediate channels) and cross

T's shall be made of galvanized steel complying with ISO 3575 or
an equivalent Standard. Coating designation shall be G90 (275 g/
m2).
02.0
Aluminium profiles for main carriers (intermediate channels),

furring channels cross T's, etc. shall be made of aluminium alloy
complying with ISO 209 and 6362-2, or an equivalent Standard.
03.0

04.0
The visible part of suspension profiles and perimeter trim shall be

painted with manufacturer's standard semi-gloss, black enamel
paint unless otherwise indicated.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
05.0
2 02 02

Panels
Mirror panels shall be of composite construction. The first quality glass mirror of minimum
3,0 mm thickness shall be fixed to a substrate by means of adhesive to get a highly even
element which is deflection and shatter resistant. The edges shall be chamfered with
rounded corners unless otherwise indicated. The substrate may be of reinforced gypsum,
wood particleboard or mineral fibreboard, depending on the fire-rating requirements. Fire
rated panels shall be either UL-listed or tested by an authorised and independent
laboratory according to ISO 834, or ASTM E119, or an equivalent Standard.
2 03 Textured Metal Ceilings

2 03 01
Suspension Profiles
01.0

m2).
02.0

complying with ISO 209 and 6361-2, respectively 6362-2 or an
equivalent Standard.
03.0

04.0

painted with manufacturer's standard semi-gloss, white enamel
05.0

2 03 02
Panels
2 03 02 01
Steel Panels
Panels shall be made of steel, minimum thickness 0,4 mm, complying with ISO 3574 or an
They shall be produced with a coffer of indicated height. Surfaces shall be even without
warp or buckle.
Finish: Provide decorative finish as indicated. If finish does not provide full rust protection,
panels shall have one coat of rust inhibitive primer before applying the indicated finish.
2 03 02 02
Aluminium Panels
Panels shall be made of aluminium alloy, minimum thickness 0,5 mm, complying with ISO
209 and 6361 or an equivalent Standard.
They shall be produced with a coffer of indicated height. Surfaces shall be even without
warp or buckle.
Finish: Panels shall have a decorative finish as indicated.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 04 Textured Gypsum Ceilings

2 04 01
2 04 02

01.0

m2).
02.0

complying with ISO 209 and 6361-2, respectively 6362-2 or an
03.0

04.0

painted with manufacturer's standard semi-gloss, white enamel
05.0

Tiles
Gypsum plasterboard tiles shall comply with DIN 18180 or an equivalent Standard. Tiles
shall be made from light weight gypsum (less than 900 kg/m3), fire resistant (30 minutes)
and impregnated. Provide an appropriate Third Party certificate.
The visible side shall be either textured gypsum or coated with smooth or textured PVC,
complying with BS 476 Pt 6-7 (class m1, non-toxic, and non-inflammable). Both solutions
shall prepare the tiles with a finish surface. Patterns will be selected by the Engineer.
2 05 Linear Wood Ceilings

2 05 01
Suspension System
2 05 01 01
Non-Fire Rated Ceiling

Suspension system shall consist of intermediate carriers and furring of class 2 softwood
according to BS 1186 or an equivalent Standard. Sizing and spacing of members and
hangers shall comply with Table 1 (see Annex 6). Wood members shall be treated to
prevent fungus and insects infestation.
Hangers shall be adjustable and made of galvanized steel sheet.
2 05 01 02
Fire Rated Ceiling

Steel profiles for main carriers and furring channels shall be made of galvanized steel
complying with ISO 3575 or an equivalent Standard. Coating designation shall be G90
(275g/ m2).
Standard rod hangers shall be adjustable, hot-dip galvanized and have a minimum
diameter of 4 mm.
Suspension shall be either UL-listed or tested according to ISO 834, or ASTM E119, or an
equivalent Standard. Provide a 'Third Party' certificate for the required fire rating.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 05 02
Panels
2 05 02 01
Solid Wood Panels
ODAC
Solid wood panels of indicated kind shall comply with BS 1186 - class 1 wood or an
equivalent Standard. The minimum thickness shall be 13 mm and the maximum width 120
mm unless otherwise indicated. Panels shall be prepared with tongue and groove.
2 05 02 02
Particleboard Panels
Particleboard used for producing panels shall comply with BS 5669 or an equivalent
Standard. Boards shall have a minimum thickness of 13 mm with grooved edges, prepared
for being attached to each other by means of separate tongues.
The visible side, including edges, shall be veneered with class 1 sliced veneer of minimum
thickness 0,5 mm and wood species indicated.
Veneer shall comply with BS 1186 or an equivalent Standard.
2 05 02 03
Fire Rated Panels

Fire rated panels shall be as specified above, yet made from cement-bonded particleboard
and comply with ISO 834, or ASTM E119 or an equivalent Standard. Provide a 'Third Party'
certificate for the required fire rating.
2 05 02 04
Finish
Linear wood panels shall be factory finished. They shall have one priming- and two finish
coats. Finish shall be semi-gloss transparent unless otherwise indicated.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 3:
ODAC
Execution
Examine structure where work of this section will be installed. Make sure that installation
work, such as electrical and plumbing work, which has to be carried out before the works
specified herein, is complete. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Verify that materials to be used for the works are complying with
requirements in specifications and schedules. Do not proceed with installation until
Pre-Installation Meeting shall be held with the different trades for co-ordination purposes.
For installation of suspended ceilings establish finish floor level and mark it securely in
each room.
3 03 Installation
Installation of suspended ceilings shall not be performed when the building is excessively
cold and damp. Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior
conditions during occupation shall be maintained during and after installation.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions, governing regulations and in
compliance with reflected ceiling plans and final shop drawings.
3 03 01
Linear Metal Ceilings
3 03 01 01
Suspension System
Provide suspension system of size and type adequate for the proposed panels. The
suspension systems shall be installed true; straight and level with indicated drop referring
to finish floor level.
Suspension profiles shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the load bearing
structure. Spacing of hangers shall follow manufacturer's instructions for the weight of the
ceiling, including luminaries and air diffusers. The maximum deflection under the nominal
drop shall be less than 3 mm. Fix perimeter angle of indicated shape to surrounding walls.
3 03 01 02
Panels
Provide panels of type size and finish as indicated in drawings and schedules.
The panels shall be fixed by clip-on method after installation of electrical and mechanical
equipment. Follow manufacturer's instructions!
3 03 02
Mirror Ceiling
3 03 02 01
Suspension System
The T-grid systems are available in the following standard grids: 60 x 60, 62.5 x 62.5, 60 x
120, 62.5 x 125 cm. They are normally produced in two different widths, either standard 25
mm or small 15 mm.
Provide T-grid system of size, type and finish as indicated in drawings and schedules. It
shall comply with ASTM C635 or an equivalent Standard. Grid systems shall be installed
true, straight and level with border strips or indicated drop referring to finish floors level.
Main runner T's shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the load bearing
structure. Spacing of hangers shall follow manufacturer's instructions for the weight of the
ceiling, including luminaries and air diffusers. The maximum deflection under the nominal
drop shall be less than 3 mm. Cross T's, pre-manufactured for the module size, shall be set
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
in between the main runners. Fix perimeter angle of indicated shape to surrounding walls.
Installation shall comply with ASTM C636 or an equivalent Standard.
3 03 02 02
Tiles and Panels

Provide tiles or panels of type, size, finish and fire rating as indicated in drawings and
schedules.
The ceiling tiles or panels shall be placed loosely in the grid frame after installation of
electrical and mechanical equipment. Tiles shall be handled with care to prevent any
damage to the finish. Follow manufacturer's instructions!
3 03 02 03
Tolerances
Ceilings shall be 1.6 mm in 3 M run, in any direction.
3 03 02 04
Width of joints
Plus of minus 0.8 mm .
3 03 03
Textured Metal Ceilings

(see mirror ceiling panels)
3 03 04
Textured Gypsum Ceilings

(see mirror ceilings)
3 03 05
Linear Wood Ceilings
3 03 05 01
Suspension System
3 03 05 01 01
Non-Fire Rated Suspension
Main carriers shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the load bearing structure.
Furring shall be fixed to main carriers with standard drywall screws. Spacing of hangers
and main carriers shall follow table 1(see Annex). Spacing of furring channels shall follow
panel manufacturer's instructions. The maximum deflection under the nominal drop shall be
less than 3 mm. Provide and install perimeter trim as indicated in drawings and schedules.
3 03 05 01 02
Fire Rated Suspension
Main carriers (intermediate channels) shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the
load bearing structure. Furring channels shall be fixed to main carriers with manufacturer's
special clamps.
Spacing of hangers, main carriers and furring channels shall follow manufacturer's
instructions for the weight of the ceiling, including installation elements like luminaries. The
maximum deflection under the nominal drop shall be less than 3 mm.
3 03 05 02
Panels
Provide panels of type, size, species and finish as indicated in drawings and schedules.
The panels shall be mounted after installation of electrical and mechanical equipment.
They shall be fixed with special non-visible clamps, screwed to the furring by holding the
groove-side. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Provide a continuous shadow gap along the perimeter of indicated width. Panels shall be
cut in good workmanship parallel to the perimeter.

Pre-finished ceiling tiles shall be laid only when no major dust development by other trades
is to be expected. They shall be thoroughly clean at time of handing over.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 06 Demonstration
Removing of tiles and panels for maintenance purposes and handling of clip-on (in) metal
panels shall be demonstrated to Employer's personnel.
3 07 Protection
Protect all works to ensure that it is without damage at time of handing over.
3 08 Schedules
Contractor shall provide schedules of his works, co-ordinated with other trades, prior to
commencing of installation.

Tables
Table 1: Maximum spacing of wood suspension members
max. allowable spacing in mm for various loads 1
)
<150 N/ m2
>150 N/ m2
>300 N/ m2
<300 N/ m2
intermediate carriers
<500 N/ m2
1300
1000
850
850
750
600
60 x 40 mm
furring 50 x 30 mm
1) Spacing for intermediate carriers means centres of hangers and spacing for
furring means centres of intermediate carriers.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding 2,5
m2.
Suspension systems whether visible or non-visible will be measured by m2.
Ceiling tiles and panels will be measured by m2.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material, equipment, tools,
scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples and mock-ups, coordinating work with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance,
cleaning and protecting.

Establishing finish floor level.
Cut-outs for electrical and mechanical elements.
Provision of perimeter trim.
Mounting of electrical and mechanical equipment in co-operation with the respective
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09550 - Wood Flooring
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and materials,
and performing all operations in connection with production and installation of wood flooring.
1 01 01
Section includes
01.0
Tongued and grooved softwood flooring
02.0
Strip parquet flooring
03.0
Mosaic parquet flooring
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 03
1 02 01 03 01
1 02 01 06
1 02 02
ISO 631:
75Mosaic parquet panels - General characteristics
ISO 1072:
75Solid wood parquet - General characteristics
ISO 1324:
85Solid wood parquet - Classification of oak strips
ISO 2457:
76Solid wood parquet - Classification of beech strips
ISO 5320:
80Solid wood parquet - Classification of fir and spruce strips
ISO 5326:
78Solid wood paving blocks - Hardwood paving blocks Quality requirements
ISO 5327:
78Solid wood paving blocks - General characteristics
ISO 5328:
78Solid wood paving blocks - Softwood paving blocks - Quality

requirements
ISO 5334:
78Solid wood parquet - Classification of maritime pine strips
ISO 11600:
93Building Construction Sealants Classification and

Requirements
British Standards
BS 1297: 87
Specification for tongued and grooved softwood

flooring
BS 4072: 78
Wood preservation by means of copper / chromium /

arsenic compositions
Codes
BS 8201: 87
Code of practice for flooring of timber, timber products

and wood based panel products
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Brick pattern - parquet flooring composed of parquet strips arranged in a parallel direction
Component Square of mosaic parquet flooring - an assembly of fingers placed edge to
edge, making up a square, the side of which is equal to the length of the finger
Deck pattern - parquet flooring composed of strips of one or several series of equal lengths,
their butt joints being arranged on sleepers
Face of parquet strip - the upper surface of a parquet strip, intended to remain visible after
laying
Herringbone pattern - parquet flooring composed of parquet strips of the same dimensions,
having the ends cut at right angle, laid perpendicularly one to another, at an angle of 45
relative to the directions of walls and / or sleepers
Longitudinal axis - an imaginary line passing through the centre of gravity of the paving
block and at an equal distance from the side faces
Mosaic parquet finger - an element of solid wood of small dimensions and regular shape,
having flat edges
Mosaic parquet panel - an assembly of component squares having the same dimensions,
placed edge to edge in a chequered pattern, in a single layer and preassembled by
juxtaposition, either by means of a material fixed temporarily (paper glued on the face) or by
means of a sufficiently flexible material, permanently fixed to the back
Parquet - an assembly of parquet strips or of panels
Parquet strip - a wood element with a flat face, having regular thickness and a constant
profile, intended to form parquet by assembly with other similar components
Skirting - a piece of wood having a simple side or a shaped one, intended to cover the joints
between the wall and the flooring
Softwood board - piece of square-sawn softwood under 47 mm thickness and more than
100 mm in width
Softwood strip- piece of square-sawn softwood under 47 mm thickness and under 100 mm
in width
Solid wood paving block - a piece of solid wood having the fibres appreciably parallel to
the longitudinal axis
Sound - sound is understood to be mechanical vibrations, which contain frequencies within
a range from approximately 16 to 16000 Hz
Stone cut pattern - parquet flooring composed of parquet strips of equal length, their butt
joints being arranged alternately
Strip patterns - parquet flooring composed of parquet strips of unequal lengths, their ends
being matched at random
Wear layer - a part of the thickness of a parquet strip situated between the face and the
upper plane of the groove or tongue
1 03 02
Abbreviations
deg C
max.
min.
UL
degree Celsius
maximum
minimum
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification section
01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of floor specified, including label compliance, fire-ratings,
1 05 03
Samples
Provide minimum three (3) samples for initial selection purposes for flooring, skirting and
division strips.
1 05 04

Documented experience of contractors site supervisor(s).
Certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance with referenced standards.
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
engaged in manufacture of wooden flooring and with a history of successful production
1 06 01 02
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods
needed
for
proper
performance
of
work.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Checking suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to specification
and referenced standards prior to assembly or installation.
Checking suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification.

1 07 01

Deliver materials to site originally packed by manufacturer in unopened containers. Protect
materials during delivery to comply with manufacturers directions. Damaged materials shall
be replaced at Contractor's costs.
1 07 02

products in a dry and ventilated place.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 2:
ODAC
Products
2 01 Tongued and Grooved Softwood Flooring

01.0
Tongued and grooved softwood flooring shall meet the

requirements of BS 1297 or an equivalent Standard, unless
02.0
All pieces shall be accurately machined to uniform section

throughout their length. They shall be smoothly finished on the
face. Tongues and grooves shall provide a well-matched joint
with level faces between contiguous pieces when laid.
03.0
Finished sizes shall comply with Table 1 of BS 1297 in any

combination of thickness and face width unless otherwise
indicated. Lengths shall be 1,8 m and longer with a minimum
average in delivery of 3,0 m.
Permitted deviations in cross section sizes from specified sizes in
Table 1 or as indicated are:
Thickness:-0 mm, +2 mm
Face Width: 1 mm
Table 2 see Annex 6
04.0
The moisture content of any board at the time of delivery shall not
exceed 15 %.
All pieces shall be free from decay and insect attack including
attack by ambrosia beetle.
2 02 Strip Parquet Flooring

01.0
Strip parquet flooring shall meet the requirements of ISO 1072 or

an equivalent Standard.
02.0
The finished strips shall have the dimensions and the profile
specified in Tables 1 through 4 of ISO 1072. Width shall be from
30 to 100 mm; length 200 mm or more.
03.0
The faces shall be flat. Contiguous faces and edges shall form
parallel sharp edges. The ends shall be perpendicular to the
edges within a tolerance of 0,4 %. The strip edges and ends shall
have the same profile. The face shall be smooth and the
manufacturing faults limited, depending on the required grades.
Grades for oak and beech wood strips shall meet the
classification in ISO 1324 respectively 2457.
04.0
The moisture content at delivery shall be between 8 and 13 % on

dry mass.
2 03 Mosaic Parquet Flooring

For examples of nominal dimensions of fingers, component squares and mosaic parquet
panels and for permissible deviations see Annex 7 . For classification of oak and beech
wood see ISO 1324 and 2457. These standards establish three grades, marked with one,
two or three stars.
01.0
Mosaic parquet flooring shall meet the requirements of ISO 631

or an equivalent Standard.
02.0
Wood fingers may be quarter, half-quarter or plain sawn provided

that the amount of plain sawn fingers does not exceed 30 % of
each panel. The fingers shall be provided within the following
range of nominal dimensions or as otherwise indicated.
Thickness:
6, 8 or 10 mm; the 6 mm thickness is not
suitable for softwood and the softer grades of hardwood;
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
width:
18 to 25 mm, with preferred widths of 20, 22,4 and 25
mm; length:100 to 165, with preferred lengths of 100, 112, and
125 mm;
03.0
The finger edges shall be machine planed; the faces and ends
shall be finely sawn. Adjacent faces edges and ends shall form
parallel sharp edges. The ends shall be perpendicular to the
edges within a tolerance of 0,4 %.
04.0
The manufacturing faults shall be limited depending on the

required grades. Grades for oak and beech wood strips shall
meet the classification in ISO 1324 respectively 2457.
05.0
The moisture content at delivery shall be between 8 and 13 % on

dry mass.
2 04 Accessories
2 04 01
Skirting
Provide wood mouldings for skirting of species and shape as indicated in drawings and
schedules. The minimum size shall be 15 x 50 mm (width x height), with top and base
slightly sloped. The face shall be smoothly ground and receive the same finish as the
flooring.
2 04 02
Division Strips
Provide division strips for separating parquet from other floor finishes or for providing joints.
They shall be of aluminium or brass as indicated. The height of these strips shall be equal to
the thickness of the parquet. They shall be fixed within the layer of adhesive.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 3:
ODAC
Execution
Examine structure where work of this section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work. Verify that materials to be used for the
works are complying with requirements in specifications and schedules. Do not proceed with
3 03 Installation
Installation of wood flooring shall not be performed when the building is excessively cold and
damp. Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior conditions
during occupation shall be maintained during and after installation.
3 03 01
Tongued and Grooved Softwood Flooring

01.0
Laying of floors shall comply with the recommendations of BS

8201.
02.0
Battens shall be sound, rigid, level and with a moisture content

within the range of flooring boards (strips). They shall be treated
with wood preservatives complying with BS 4072 . Provide
minimum size of 4 x 4 cm or as indicated.
03.0
Battens shall be levelled before fixing by means of plastic dowels

and screws. Spacing of battens depends on thickness of flooring
boards; spacing of fastening points shall be less than 60 cm on
centres - follow guidelines in BS 8201.
040.
Softwood boards or strips shall be carefully cramped together. All

header joints shall be on a batten. If ends are tongued and
grooved, joints may be between battens, yet they shall be
staggered. Boards or strips shall be nailed non-visible at each
batten. Nails shall be driven into the edges just above the tongue
- special care has to be taken not to damage the tongue.
3 03 02
Strip- and Mosaic Parquet Flooring
3 03 02 01
Base Preparation
The Base shall be rigid, level and dry. Use cementious based spackling compound to
produce an even surface. Let it dry sufficiently, grind it smoothly and broom clean or vacuum
before laying the floor. Localised variations in level shall not exceed 3 mm from the mean
when measured over a 3 m distance using a straight edge.
3 03 02 02
Laying
01.0
The adhesive shall be evenly spread, using a serrated trowel.

Serration shall be 3mm deep at 8mm centres. Size of serration
shall be accurately maintained to ensure that the right amount of
adhesive is applied at all times. Do not spread to much adhesive
at a time to avoid drying before laying of strips could be
completed. Strips shall be firmly bedded in the adhesive with
edges and ends tightly abutting to form a continuous pattern.
02.0
About 1 cm expansion joint shall be allowed towards surrounding

walls.
03.0
Paper from paper-faced mosaic parquet shall be removed by

dampening the surface.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 03
ODAC
Finishing
Strip parquet flooring may be ground and finished before laying if required in schedules. All
other wood flooring shall be ground after laying with machines until the surface is even and
smooth. Machines shall be equipped with a proper vacuum system to avoid dust
development.
Provide the following finish:
* 01.0
Wax application:
Apply one impregnating coat of transparent varnish and grind it
slightly with fine sandpaper after it is dry. Apply one or more
coats of liquid wax, depending on manufacturer's instructions.
Allow to dry and buff after each course, or:
* 02.0
One-can sealer:
Apply the first coat of sealer with brush according to
manufacturer's instructions. Grind it slightly with fine sandpaper
after it is dry. Apply the second coat similar to the first one, or :
* 03.0
Two can sealer:

This requires the mixing of two liquids in given proportions before
application. Apply the first coat of sealer with brush according to
manufacturer's instructions. Grind it slightly with fine sandpaper
after it is dry. Apply the second coat similar to the first one.
3 03 04
Accessories
3 03 04 01
Skirting
Provide skirting along walls, columns etc. of materials and finish indicated in schedules.
Skirting shall be fixed by means of plastic dowels and screws to the wall. Use countersunk
oval-headed, nickel-plated screws.
3 03 04 02
Division Strips / Joints

01.0
Division strips for separating parquet from other flooring materials

shall be fixed within the layer of adhesive.
02.0
Joints in the floor underlayment shall also be provided in the

parquet by using two division strips of materials indicated, placed
in the distance of 1 cm and fixed within the layer of adhesive.
03.0
Construction joint profiles, embedded in the floor underlayment

shall be in level with the finished floor. Allow 1 cm joint towards
these elements.
04.0
Joints shall be filled after grinding and finishing of parquet with

elastic sealing component complying with ISO 11600 or an
equivalent material acceptable to the Engineer. Colour of the
sealing component shall match the parquet.

Floors shall be thoroughly clean at time of handing over.
3 07 Protection
Protect all works to ensure that finished floors are without damage at time of handing over.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding 0,1
m2 .
Flooring according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by m2.
Treads and risers according to type, material and finish will be measured by m2.
Skirting will be measured according to type and material by length (m).
Division strips and joints will be measured according to type by length (m).
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples and co-ordinating work with other
trades, checking, examination, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.

Preparation of the underlayment to obtain a good bonding ground.
Cutting and fitting around door frames, pipes and the like.
Securing the works against undesired trespass until the surface or surface treatment can no
longer be damaged.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01 Tables
6 01 01
BS 1297 - Table 1
Table 1. Cross section sizes
Finished thickness
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
19
21
28
Finished width of face
65
90
113
137
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

7 01
Dimensions and Deviations
ISO 631 - Table 1:

squares
Examples of nominal dimensions of fingers, component

and mosaic parquet panels - dimensions in mm
Fingers
Thickness
Component squares
Width
Length Thickness
Width
x
Length
Panels
Number Thickness
of
fingers
Width
x
Length
Number of
component
squares
20
100
100
x
100
400
x
400
16
22,4
112
112
x
112
448
x
448
16
22,4
112
10
112
x
112
10
448
x
448
16
25
125
10
125
x
125
10
500
x
500
16
10
10
ISO 631 - Table 2: Permissible deviations - values in mm

Dimensions
On a single panel
On each component
square of the panel
On any point of any

finger making up the
panel
Thickness
0,2
0,2
0,2
Width
0,5
0,2
+0,1 - 0,2
Length
0,5
0,2
0,2
Diagonal 1
0,8
12
SECTION 09638: STONE
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09638 stone
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
SECTION 09638 STONE

1
GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
PRODUCTS ................................................................................................. 5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
SCOPE ................................................................................................. 2
REFERENCES ........................................................................................ 2
TOLERANCES ........................................................................................ 2
SUBMITTALS.......................................................................................... 3
MOCK-UP ............................................................................................. 4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................................... 4
WARRANTY ........................................................................................... 5
STONE.................................................................................................. 5
ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................... 5
MIXES OF MORTAR ................................................................................ 6
FABRICATION ........................................................................................ 7
STONE FABRICATION ............................................................................. 7
FINISHES .............................................................................................. 8
EXECUTION ................................................................................................ 8
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION ............................................................ 8

INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 9
CLEANING ........................................................................................... 11
1
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09638 stone
SECTION 09638: Stone

1
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
This section covers requirements for marble and granite works including
labor materials, products, equipment and services to complete the stone
flooring and wall covering work specified herein.
Testing and inspection of stone units specified herein.
The related documents article contained herein is included for reference
only. All items contained therein are an assessment of the work, which
should be presumed to be complete.
1.2
References
ASTM C509-94 Specification for Cellular Elastomeric Reformed Gasket
and Sealing Material.
ASTM C615-96 Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
ASTM D1622-93 Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular
Plastics.
ASTM D 1623-78 (1995) Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion
Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
1.3
Tolerances
1.3.1
Tolerances for this work shall be adhered to and work not

complying with specified tolerances shall be rejected at the sole
discretion of the Engineer. Tolerances are not cumulative and
tolerances of installed units shall be adhered to notwithstanding
other allowable tolerances. Comply with the following dimension
requirements per unit:
Tolerance on thickness for stone units:

Plus/minus
1.0 mm
Tolerance or any dimension for stone units:

Plus/minus
1.0 mm
Tolerance on joints between installed units (notwithstanding

other allowable tolerances, and based on nominal joint width
specified herein):
Plus/minus
0.5 mm
2
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1.3.2
Section 09638 stone
Alignment of joints:
Plus/minus
1.3.3
0.5 mm
Location of openings in installed units:

Plus/minus
1.3.4
2 mm
Step in face of adjacent units when installed:

Plus/minus
1.3.5
0.5 mm
Jog in alignment of edge of adjacent units when installed:

Plus/minus
1.3.6
1 mm
Maximum out of squareness measured as the difference

between the two diagonal dimensions:
0.1 percent difference.
1.3.7
Maximum bowing (concave or convex) of any part of the flat

surface: not greater than 0.1 percent of the dimension being
measured.
1.3.8
Maximum warpage of one corner out of plane with the other

three:
1.0 mm/300 mm, distance from the nearest adjacent corner but
not exceeding 2.0 mm.
1.3.9
Maximum variation from radius dimension:

for radius 300 mm or lessfor radius between 300 mm
and 900 mm
for radius over 900 mm -
plus/minus 1.5
plus/minus 2.5 mm
plus/minus 3 mm
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1
Flooring and wall covering shop drawings shall indicate

dimensions, locations of flooring, setting beds, profiles of stone at
stairs, locations of holes and openings, finishes and adjacent
construction.
1.4.2
Shop drawings shall have minimum size lettering and numerals

of 3 mm high.
1.4.3
Scale of shop drawings to be:
1:100 generally
1:50 for detail drawings

3
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09638 stone
1:20 for plans of areas such as stairs, ramps and entrances
1.4.4
Submit duplicate 300 mm x 300 mm of each type of stone

specified herein.
1.4.5
Submit, to be used as extra stock, 2% of each type of stone

installed on the project. Samples to be in largest size installed on
the project.
1.4.6
Extra stock materials to be from same production run as installed

materials.
1.4.7
Deliver extra stock materials as directed by the Engineer.
1.5 Mock-Up
1.5.1
Provide a 5 m x 5 m mock-up as directed by the Engineer.
1.5.2
Mock-up shall be revised until accepted by the Engineer.
1.5.3
Mock-up once accepted may remain in place, to serve as a

standard of acceptance for the remainder of this work.
1.6 Delivery, Storage And Handling

1.6.1
Handle and store stone and materials in such a manner that no

damage will be done to the materials, the structure, or the work of
other Sections.
1.6.2
Ensure that each unit delivered to the site is clearly and properly
labeled as to classification and installation location in accordance
with labeling notations indicated on reviewed shop drawings.
1.6.3
Prevent units from coming into contact with earth or other

materials, which may damage the exposed surfaces. Prevent
metal packaging straps and hoisting equipment from causing rust
stains on granite.
1.6.4
Make provision for handling and lifting units.
1.6.5
Stockpile units on platforms or other approved supports. Secure

waterproof covering entirely over each stockpile when work is not
in progress. Protect stockpiles at all times from weather, dirt and
damage.
1.6.6
Do not pile or store material on neither slabs, nor wheel or

handle materials over such slabs until the concrete has obtained
the design strength and then take care to ensure that the slab
loadings do not exceed design loads.
4
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09638 stone
1.6.7
Broken, cracked, chipped, stained or damaged stone will be

rejected, whether built-in or not.
1.6.8
Store cement in a weather tight enclosure raised clear of the

ground, protected from weather, dampness and deterioration.
Cement damaged by exposure to moisture shall not be used.
1.6.9
Store sand on platforms to avoid the inclusion of foreign

materials and protect with weatherproof coverings.
1.6.10 Provide stone identification on shipping crates, including stone

range, sizes and designated building face.
1.7 Warranty
1.7.1
Warrant this work for a period of five (5) years from the date of
Completion of Contract.
1.7.2
Remedy shall include labor, materials, equipment and services

required to make good and/or replace areas, which in the opinion
of the Engineer, are defective.
1.7.3
Warranty shall also include the making good of other building

parts and finishes and other Employers property damaged and/or
disturbed in the course of remedying defects.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Stone
As listed in the Interior Color and Finishes Schedule.
a)
Granite: Complying as minimum with ASTM C615.
b) Granite stone, supplied for this Project shall be from one quarry with
minimum abrasion resistance of 45 including stone for work of other
Sections, and shall be sound, hard, durable, well seasoned and of
uniform strength, color and texture, free of quarry sap, flaws,
seams, sand holes, iron pyrites, harmful quantities of radiation, or
other mineral or organic defects. If there is a distinguishable rift in
the granite, all granite for the Project shall be cut in one direction
only as specified herein unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
2.2 Accessories
2.2.1
Dowels, clamps and anchors:

ASTM A 167, type 316 stainless steel, and complying with the
requirements of the local jurisdictional authorities.
5
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2.2.2
Section 09638 stone
Cement:
ASTM C150, non-staining, Grey and White Portland work; white
cement for pointing mixes.
2.2.3
Sand:
Consisting of fine granular material composed of hard, strong,
durable mineral particles, free from injurious amounts of saline,
alkaline, organic or other deleterious substances.
2.2.4
Water:
Clean and free of oil, acid, alkali, organic and other deleterious
matter.
2.2.5
Color pigments:
Pure mineral pigment, lime-proof, non-staining. Color to be
selected by the Engineer.
2.2.6
Brass floor inserts:

32 mm high x 6 mm wide, one-piece heavy top with polished
finished and punched anchor legs.
2.2.7
Sealer:
Recommended by the installer and accepted by the Engineer.
2.3 Mixes of Mortar

2.3.1
Mortar for back plastering of stone flooring and steps shall

consist of by volume:
1 part Portland cement
2 parts sand
Sufficient liquid acrylic latex additive to bring mix to a plaster
trowel able consistency. Do not use water.
2.3.2
Setting bed for stone flooring and steps shall consist of by

volume:
1 part Portland cement
3 parts sand
Sufficient liquid acrylic latex emulsion to bring mix to a plastic
trowel able consistency and minimum 28 day cured strength of
24 MPa. Emulsion shall consist of 1 part liquid acrylic latex to 3
parts water.
6
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2.3.3
Section 09638 stone
Pointing compound:
One part non-staining cement.
1-1/2 parts white silica sand tempered with lime putty.
Color pigment as required to selection of Engineer.
More than one color may be required as directed by the
Engineer.
2.3.4
Mix mortars and grouts in accordance with manufacturers written

instructions, using mechanical mixers.
2.3.5
Do not mix mortar in the same mixer as another type of mortar,

unless the mixer is thoroughly cleaned.
2.3.6
Use additives in accordance with manufacturers written

instructions.
2.4 Fabrication
2.4.1
General
a) As far as practical, execute fitting and assembly in the shop with the
various parts or assemblies ready for erection at the site.
b) Where possible, take field measurements and levels required to
verify or supplements those shown on the Drawings for the proper
layout and installation of the work. Coordinate dimensional
tolerances in adjacent building elements and confirm prior to the
commencement of the work.
c) Fabricate members to profiles shown on the Drawings.
d) Provide for expansion and contraction joints as necessary.
e) Accurately fit together all joints, corners and miters. Match
components carefully to produce perfect continuity of line and design.
2.5 Stone Fabrication
a) Stonework shall be executed by skilled workers in accordance with
the best practice of a company specializing in the type of stonework
specified, indicated and required.
b) Identify the rift direction on a concealed surface of each unit. Panels
shall be cut generally parallel to the rift and all panels shall be cut in
the same direction.
7
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09638 stone
c) Cut stone accurately to conform to the shape and dimensions shown,

with exposed plane surfaces true.
d) Joints shall be dressed straight and, unless shown otherwise, at right
angles to the face. Exterior corners shall be mitered where indicated.
e) Mortise and sink stone units to receive anchors, dowels, cramps and
other necessary items.
f)
Lewis holes and holes for other back anchoring devices shall not be
closer than 50 mm to the edges.
g) Do cutting and drilling required for this work and for work of other
Sections.
h) Do not use impact or hammer drills on stone; use only diamond drill
bits.
i)
In cutting and fitting the edges shall be carefully cut and ground to a
perfect fit and all cutting shall be done in such a manner as not to
impair the strength or appearance of the material.
j)
No hand torches or any heat methods shall be used on stone in the

field unless accepted in writing by the Engineer.
k) Patching or other forms of concealment to cover defects in material

or workmanship will not be permitted.
l)
Stone thickness to be as follows:

20 mm for sizes up to 450 mm x 450 mm.
30 mm for sizes over 450 mm x 450 mm.
2.6 Finishes
a) Finishes shall be uniform and non-directional unless otherwise
approved.
b) Finishing shall apply to all surfaces exposed in the finished work.
c) Finish P: polished.
3
EXECUTION
3.1 Examination and Preparation

3.1.1
Before commencing erection, examine the work of other Sections

to which the stonework will be attached or applied.
3.1.2
Report immediately in writing to the Engineer all discrepancies in

accuracy and suitability in the location, bearing and retaining of
8
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09638 stone
structural members, which will adversely affect the installation

and permanency of this work.
3.1.3
Block work walls are prepared for tiling using an approved

adhesive compound below to fill in any excessive indentation
prior to applying the general adhesive.
3.1.4
Ensure that openings and recesses to receive this work are

within acceptable tolerances. Remove dust and other loose
material from openings.
3.1.5
Commencement of installation shall indicate acceptance of the

work of other Section, upon which this work depends.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1
General
a)
Distribute units of acceptable ranging color or texture evenly over

the entire installation to avoid patches or streaks, to produce a
homogeneous blending of all units. If an acceptable pattern or grain
direction is apparent, due to natural appearance of stone, or
finishing, install units so that pattern or grain is in one direction
unless otherwise directed.
b)
Set stone in patterns shown unless otherwise directed.
c)
Sponge or drench stone units with clean water just prior to setting in
mortar.
d)
Set stone work level, plumb, square and true with uniform joints.
Chipped, broken or blemished units shall be rejected.
e)
Avoid splashing mortar on exposed faces of stone. Remove

droppings immediately by means of sponge and clean water.
f)
The alignment face for stone panels shall be the outside face unless
otherwise.
g)
Fasten the work securely as erection progresses. Provide all units

with suitable temporary braces, shores, and stays to hold them in
position until permanently secured. Draw all nuts and bolts tight and
check bolt threads to prevent the nuts from backing off or spot-weld
nut heads.
h)
Under no circumstances shall any stone unit butt directly against

and/or bear directly upon another stone unit.
i)
Cut and drill for items supplied under other Sections. Replace stone
damaged by this operation.
9
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09638 stone
3.2.2
Installation - Flooring
a)
Provide cement mortar in accordance with the requirements of

Clause 2.3, as applicable, and these Specifications. Ensure no
metal debris or other contaminants become embedded in mortar
setting beds or substrates.
b)
Flooring shall be true in plane, level or sloped as shown on the

Drawings to a tolerance of 3 mm in 3000 mm measured in any
direction.
c)
Completed installations of flooring shall ensure that no water

puddles occur.
d)
Butter back of stone units with mortar slurry and place stone units
on a mortar setting bed.
e)
Joints between flooring stone units: zero.
f)
Mask edges of joints prior to grouting and pointing.
g)
Grout joints, other than control joints, solid with mortar and point
with colored pointing compound. Remove masking.
h)
Any skirting indicated on the drawings shall have units of similar

batched material as the floor/wall filing.
3.2.3
Stone Finish on Stairs
a)
Finish stair treads with three (3) continuous non-slip inserts.

Provide 10mm wide by 6 mm deep recesses a tread by saw
cutting. Stop within 100mm of ends of treads.
b)
Carefully mask stone treads up to edges of slots with minimum of

two (2) thickness of masking tape.
c)
Mix non-slip filler as per manufacturers written instructions. Install

into recesses flush with tape.
3.2.4
Coping units
Coping shall be set with faces plumb and true in a full bed of mortar upon
completion of the walls the remainder of the bed joint shall be filled
solidly with mortar front and back and the exterior face of the mortar
tasted smooth.
Even off filler. When epoxy has cured, remove tape and clean residue.
3.2.5
i)
Expansion Joints
The Contractor shall ensure that the expansion joints are bedded
fully in accordance with manufacturers instruction.
10
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ii)
Section 09638 stone
The Contractor shall ensure that all aluminum wall tiling trims are of
a proprietary type fit for their purpose, with sections pop riveted
together with no protrusions between the rear of the aluminum
surface and the face of the blockwork walls.
3.3 Cleaning
i)
Keep installed work clean as work progresses.
ii)
Remove excess sealant by the moderate use of mineral spirits or

other solvent acceptable by the sealant manufacturer and the stone
fabricator.
iii)
After grouting and pointing, clean stone with stiff fiber brushes and
water. The use of wire brushes, acids or sandblasting will not be
permitted. Flush down at completion.
iv)
Clean and make good to the acceptance of the Engineer, surfaces

soiled or otherwise damaged in connection with this work. Pay the
cost of replacing finishes or materials that cannot be satisfactorily
cleaned or which have been damaged by improper cleaning
materials and techniques.
v)
Remove concrete and alkali wash-offs on surfaces as work

progresses.
vi)
Upon completion of this work, remove all debris, equipment and

excess material resulting form this work from the site.
=========================
11
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09650 - Resilient Flooring
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
materials, and performing all operations in connection with installation of resilient
flooring.
1 01 01
Section includes
01.0
PVC Flooring
02.0
Linoleum Flooring
03.0
Synthetic Rubber Flooring
04.0
Cork Flooring
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 06
British Standards
1 02 01 07
BS 476 -
Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 476 - 7 :90 Method for classification of the surface spread
of flame of products
BS EN 649 :
97
Resilient Floor Coverings Homogeneous and
Heterogeneous Polyvinylchloride Floor Coverings
BS EN 650 :
97
Resilient Floor Coverings - Polyvinylchloride Floor
Coverings on Jute Backing or on Polyester Felt with
Polyvinylchloride Backing.
BS EN 651 :
97
Resilient Floor Coverings - Polyvinylchloride Floor
Coverings with Foam Layer
BS EN 12104 :
00
Resilient Floor Coverings Cork Floor Tiles.
German Standards
DIN 51958 : 79
Testing of Organic Floor Coverings (Except Textile Floor

Coverings): Chemicophysical Effect of Test Agents up to 24
hours
DIN 51960 : 75
Testing of organic floor coverings (excluding textile floor

coverings); Testing of flammability
DIN 51961 : 84
Testing of Plastics Surfaces; Behaviour on Exposure to

Glowing Cigarettes
DIN 53504 : 94
Testing of rubber, determination of tensile strength at break,

tensile stress at yield, elongation at break and stress values in
a tensile test
DIN 53505 : 00
Shore A and shore D hardness testing of rubber

1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
DIN 53516 : 87
1 02 01 11
1 02 02
French Standards
NF T 51 109 : 86
Plastics; Shore Hardness testing
NF T 54 209 : l.e.
Plastics; Testing of residual Indentation
Codes
BS 8203 : 87
1 02 03
1 02 04
Testing of rubber and elastomers; determination of abrasion

resistance
Code of practice for installation of sheet and tile flooring
Other References
CENELEC/EN
Basic Specification: Protection of Electrostatic Sensitive
100015-1: 92
Devices. General Requirements
DHSS
Technical Memorandum No 2:77
IBM/ICL:
Requirement for Static Dissipative Flooring
American Standards
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM F 1066
(1987) Vinyl Composition Floor Tile
ASTM F 1303
(1990) Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing.
ASTM F 1344
(1991) Rubber Floor Tile
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
coned back - the back of flooring material is grooved for better adhesion
elastic product - The product of the tensile strength (expressed in MN/m2) and the
elongation at break (expressed by the increase in length as a fraction of the original
length).
sound - sound is understood to be mechanical vibrations which contain frequencies
within a range from approximately 16 to 16000 Hz
stud (studded) - flooring material which has a relief surface, studs may be round or
square
1 03 02
Abbreviations
CENELEC
'Committee European de Normalisation Electro technique'(European
Committee for Electro technical Standardization)
deg C
DHSS
IBM
l.e.
max.
min.
MJ/m3
degree Celsius
British 'Department of Health and Social Security'
Int. Business Machines (US)
last edition
maximum
minimum
Mega Joule / m3
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Pt.
UL
Part
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification section
01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of floor specified, including certificates, fire-ratings,
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
1 05 03
Samples
a) Provide minimum three (3) samples for initial selection purposes
for each type of floor including manufacturer's colour chart for
each sample.
b) Three 300mm long samples of each type of resilient base.
c) Samples of full range of available colours of transition strips
1 05 04

Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor(s) (see ref. 1 06 01 02)
Reports and records of Contractors Internal Quality Control.
Reports and records of Contractors External Quality Control.
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
engaged in manufacture of resilient flooring and with a history of successful production
1 06 01 02
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and
the
methods
needed
for
proper
performance
of
work
.
1 06 01 03
a)
Provide each type of material by a single manufacturer.
b)
Installer qualification shall be certified by materials manufacturer, with a minimum

of 3 years experience in the installation of materials specified on comparable projects.
c)
Prior to commencing the work, the installer shall visit the site and verify in writing
that all substrates and conditions are acceptable to receive the work.
d)
Commencement of the work shall imply acceptance of substrates and conditions

and no claim for extras shall be entertained by the Engineer.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
e)
ODAC
Sample panel 1200mmx1200mm on each type of substrate incorporating a

typical inside and outside corners and cove base. Once approved shall be the
standard of the work.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01

Checking suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform with
Checking suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification.
1 06 04 02

The Contractor shall engage an authorised and independent agency for testing
'conductive' and 'static dissipative' flooring after installation has been completed.

1 07 01

Deliver materials to site originally packed by manufacturer in unopened containers.
Protect materials during delivery to comply with manufacturers directions. Damaged
materials shall be replaced at Contractor's costs.
1 07 02

Part 2:
Products
2 01 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

2 01 01
Unbacked Flexible PVC Flooring

This type of PVC flooring is produced in various thickness: 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 mm. It is
available in sheet or tile form. Pattern may be directional or non directional.
01.0
Homogenous unbacked flexible PVC flooring shall consist of a

thoroughly blended composition of thermoplastic binder, fillers
and pigments. The thermoplastic binder shall substantially
consist of 'vinyl chloride polymer' or 'vinyl chloride copolymer'.
The polymeric material shall be compounded with suitable
plasticizers and stabilizers.
02.0
The 'elastic product' shall not be less than 2 MJ/m3.
03.0
The flooring shall have a uniform wearing surface, colour and

pattern shall extend through the full thickness of the material.
04.0
It shall comply with the requirements of BS 3261 Part 1 - Type A,

or an equivalent Standard.
05.0
Flammability: It shall comply with the requirements for class 1

rating of BS 476 Part 7 or an equivalent Standard.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 01 02
Backed Flexible PVC Flooring
2 01 02 01
Cellular PVC Backing

Backed flexible PVC flooring has a wear layer, an underlayer and a backing of cellular PVC.
It is supplied in continuous lengths. This type of PVC flooring is produced in various
thickness: 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 or 4.5 mm. The softness and the impact sound insulation
increases with the thickness of the material.
2 01 03
2 01 05
01.0
The wear layer shall consist of a thoroughly blended composition

of polymeric material which may contain fillers and/or pigments.
The polymeric material shall consist of 'vinyl chloride polymer' or
'vinyl chloride copolymers'. The polymeric material shall be
compounded with suitable plasticizers and stabilizers.
02.0
The 'elastic product' of the wear layer shall not be less than 2
MJ/m3.
03.0
The backing shall consist of PVC which is converted into a

cellular state.
04.0
A reinforcing layer of woven or non-woven fabric may be

incorporated between the wear and the cellular layer.
05.0

pattern shall extend through the full thickness of the wearing
layer.
06.0
It shall comply with the requirements of BS 5085 Part 2, or an

Conductive PVC Flooring

01.0
Conductive PVC flooring shall be homogenous and consist of a

thoroughly blended composition of thermoplastic binder, fillers
and pigments. The thermoplastic binder shall substantially
consist of 'vinyl chloride polymer' or 'vinyl chloride copolymer'.
The polymeric material shall be compounded with suitable
plasticizers and stabilizers.
02.0
The 'elastic product' shall not be less than 2 MJ/ m3.
03.0

pattern shall extend through the full thickness of the material.
Minimum thickness shall be 2 mm.
04.0
Residual indentation shall comply with the requirements of BS

3261 Part 1 - Type A, or an equivalent Standard.
05.0
Electrical properties: Maximum resistivity 106 Ohm.
06.0
For use in electrical equipment rooms it shall comply with

CENELEC/EN 100015-1 or an equivalent Standard.
07.0
For use in hospital operating theatres it shall comply with DHSS

Technical Memorandum No.2.
'Heavy Duty' PVC Flooring

The PVC tiles of 6,5 to 8 mm thickness have got an interlocking system by which a
continuous flooring is established. It can be removed without destroying it and reused.
There are three types of finishes (STR,STG,GM2) available. Each one different in size
and thickness.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Provide heavy duty PVC flooring, consisting of an interlocking tile system, which is laid
loosely onto the subfloor.
Provide tile size, thickness and finish as indicated.
Provide special, inclined elements for access ramps where indicated.
The PVC tiles shall comply with the following
the
indicated
Hardness
NFT 51109
Abrasion
DIN 53516
Reaction Resistance
DIN 53504
Elongation at rupture
DIN 53504
Inflammability (STR,STG)
Inflammability (GM2)
Resistance to cigarette burn DIN 51961
Dimensional stability
CTSB 2182
Residualindentation
under load
NFT 54209
mm
remanent
NFT 54209
Coefficient of friction
Chemical resistance
DIN 51958
requirements, when tested

Standards
Shore A
>80
<100
mm3
>140
kg/cm2
%
>70
not easily
hardly
no traces
%
0,11
<0,60
mm
-
according to
:
combustible
combustible
of burning
<0,15
0,13
generally good
Provide a certificate, issued by an authorised and independent laboratory.
2 03 Synthetic Rubber
The floor tiles are produced in different thickness between 2,5 and 6mm overall
thickness. The stud height ranges between 0,3 and 1,5 mm. Synthetic rubber may be
used to reduce impact sound.
Synthetic rubber flooring tiles shall be made of homogeneous, calendared, vulcanized
rubber with mineral fillers and colour pigments.
Provide flooring tiles of overall thickness, stud height and colour as indicated.
Synthetic rubber flooring shall meet the following requirements:
01.0
Hardness to be more than 80 Shore A when tested according to

DIN 53505 or an equivalent Standard.
02.0
Abrasion to be less than 200 mm3 (load 0,5 kg) when tested
according to
DIN 53516 or an equivalent Standard.
03.0
Dimensional Stability to be less than 0,1 % (6 h/ 80 deg C) when

tested according to DIN 51962 or an equivalent Standard.
04.0
Indentation to be less than 0,3 mm when tested according to DIN

05.0
Cigarette burns to produce no visible burning of the surface when

tested according to DIN 51961 or an equivalent Standard.
06.0
In flammability: 'Hardly inflammable - B1' when tested according

to DIN 51960 or an equivalent Standard.
07.0
Flooring tiles for extremely heavy traffic areas e.g. where fork lifts
are used (max 50 kp/cm2) shall have a coned back.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 05 Accessories
2 05 01
2 05 02
Skirting
01.0
Wood mouldings for skirting shall be of species and shape as

indicated in drawings and schedules. The minimum size shall be
15 x 50 mm (width x height), with top and base slightly sloped.
The face shall be smoothly ground with finish indicated.
02.0
Rigid PVC mouldings for skirting shall be of homogeneous PVC

with min. size 15 x 50 mm (width x height) and colour indicated.
03.0
Flexible PVC skirting shall be manufacturer's best commercial

quality with min. height of 50 mm and colour indicated.
Division Strips
Division strips for separating different flooring materials or for providing joints, shall be
of aluminium or brass as indicated. The height of these strips shall be equal to the
thickness of the flooring material.
2 05 03
Nosings and Edgings

Nosings and edgings shall be of homogeneous PVC, specially formulated to be flexible,
yet to provide high abrasion resistance for the exposed locations. They shall be profiled
with adequate recess for the respective floor thickness. The surface shall be coned for
slip resistance.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 3:
ODAC
Execution
Examine structure where work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Verify that materials to be
used for the works are complying with requirements in specifications and schedules. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 03 Installation
Installation of flooring material shall not be performed when the building is excessively
cold and damp. Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior
conditions during occupation shall be maintained during and after installation.
Resilient floor tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated, if not, tiled areas shall be
centered and balanced.
3 03 01
3 03 03
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

01.0
Installation shall be in accordance with BS 8203. Sub floors must

be smooth, hard, clean and dry before lying. Uneven sub floors
shall be spackled until the required smoothness is reached.
Flooring material must be allowed to relax for 24 hours in a room
temperature more than 20 deg C prior to installation. Sheets and
tiles shall be hot air seam welded for a hygienic, impervious
finish. Use manufacturer's recommended adhesive only.
02.0
Conductive PVC flooring: Follow strictly manufacturer's

instructions. Particular attention must be given to correct seam
welding. In wet areas the perimeter shall also be carefully sealed
against water ingress. The finished flooring shall be tested for its
compliance with the indicated Standards by an authorised and
03.0
Static dissipative flooring: Follow strictly manufacturer's

instructions.
04.0
Heavy duty PVC flooring: Follow manufacturer's instructions for

preparation of sub-floor and laying procedure. Laying shall be
started in the centre of a room working towards the edges. At
intersections with other thinner flooring material, or at open ends,
special inclined angle elements shall be used to avoid tripping
and provide a steady flooring.
Synthetic Rubber
Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Sub floors must be
smooth, hard, clean and dry before laying. Uneven sub-floors shall be spackled until the
required smoothness is reached.
3 03 05
Accessories
3 03 05 01
Skirting
01.0
Provide skirting along walls, columns etc. of materials and finish

indicated.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 05 02
3 03 05 03
ODAC
02.0
Provide rigid skirting in lengths as long as practicable and fix by

means of plastic dowels and nickel-plated screws. Corners shall
be mitred.
03.0
Flexible skirting (resilient PVC strips) shall be tightly butted to

flooring and secured with adhesive.
Joints
01.0
Joints in the floor underlayment shall also be provided in the

flooring by using two division strips of materials indicated, placed
in the distance of the joint thickness and fixed within the layer of
adhesive. The joint shall be filled with sealant indicated or
acceptable to the Engineer. Sealing of joints shall follow
instructions of Section 7900 - Joint Sealers
01.1
Heavy duty PVC flooring ('Trafficline') shall be laid loosely across

joints, unless manufacturer's instructions require a different
solution.
02.0
Joint assemblies for structural joints (Section 5180), embedded in

the floor underlayment, shall be in level with the finished floor.
Flooring material shall be tightly butted to joint assemblies.
Nosings and Edgings

Provide nosings and edgings in lengths as long as practicable and adhere to the
subfloor by means of adhesive before laying the floor. Nosings for stair treads shall
consist of one piece.

01.0
Remove any excess and other surface blemishes, using

appropriate cleaner recommended by floor manufacturer.
02.0
Apply protective floor polish if recommended by manufacturer.

Use commercial available acrylic product acceptable to flooring
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated
03.0
Floors shall be thoroughly clean at time of handing over.
3 07 Protection
Protect all works to ensure that finished floors are without damage at time of handing
over.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
0,1 m2.
Flooring according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by m2.
Treads and risers according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by
m2.
Skirting will be measured according to type and material by length (m).
Installation of division strips will be measured according to type by length (m).
Provision of joints will be measured according to type and width by length (m).
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
tools, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples and co-ordinating work with
other trades, checking, examination, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.

Preparation of the underlayment to obtain a good bonding ground.
Securing the works against undesired trespass until the surface or surface treatment
can no longer be damaged.
Providing certificates from authorised and independent laboratories or agencies.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 02 Figures
Fig.1 : Edgings and nosings
Fig.2 : Expansion joints and division strips
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09680 - Carpet
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work of this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and materials, and performing
all operations in connection with providing and laying-out of carpets.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
Textile floor coverings
02.0
Carpet Tile
03.0
Carpet cushion or underlayment
04.0
Adhesives
05.0
Accessories
Related Sections
05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assembly
09550 Wood Flooring
09650 Resilient Flooring
1 02
References
1 02 01
1 02 01 03
1 02 01 03 01

EN ISO 105/A01: 95
Textiles: Tests for Colour Fastness Part A01: General

Principles of Testing
EN ISO 105/B02: 00
Textiles: Tests for Colour Fastness Part B02: Colour

Fastness to artificial Light: Xenon arc Fading Lamp Test
EN ISO 105/E01: 96
Textiles: Tests for Colour Fastness Part E01: colour

Fastness to Water
EN ISO 105/X12: 01
Textiles: Tests for Colour Fastness Part X12: Colour

Fastness to Rubbing
ISO 140-8: 97
Acoustics: Measurement of Sound Insulation in

Buildings and of Building Elements Part 8: Laboratory
Measurements of the Reduction of Transmitted Impact
Noise by Floor Coverings on a Standard Floor
ISO 354: 97
Acoustics: Measurement of Sound Absorption in a

Reverberation Room
ISO 717-2: 82
Acoustics: Rating of Sound Insulation in Buildings and

of Building Elements Part 2: Impact Sound Insulation
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ISO 1763: 86
Carpets: Determination of Number of Tufts and/or

Loops per Unit Length and per Unit area
ISO 1765: 86
Machine-Made Textile Floor Coverings: Determination

of Thickness
ISO 1766: 99
Textile Floor Covering: Determination of Thickness of

Pile above the Substrate
ISO 2424: 92
Textile Floor Covering: Classification and Terminology
ISO 2551: 81
Machine-Made Textile Floor Coverings: Determination

of Dimensional Changes due to the Effects of Varied
Water and Heat Conditions
ISO 3018: 74
Rectangular Textile Floor Coverings Determination of

Dimensions
ISO 8543: 98
Textile Floor Covering: Method for Determination of

Mass
ISO 9239: 97
Reaction to Fire Tests Horizontal surface spread of

flame on floor covering systems Part 1: Flame spread
using a radiant heat ignition source
ISO/TR 10361: 00
Textile floor Coverings: Production of Changes in

Appearance by Means of a Vettermann Drum and
Hexapod Tumbler Testers
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)
1 02 01 05
ASTM D 2859:96
Standard Test Methods for Ignition Characteristics of

Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials
ASTM D 3676:96
Standard Specification for Rubber Cellular Cushion

used for Carpet or Rug Underlay
European Standards
EN 984: 95
Determination of the Mass per Unit Area of the Use

Surface of Needled Floor Coverings
EN 985: 95
Textile Floor Coverings: Castor Chair Test
EN 986:95
Textile Floor Coverings: Determination of Dimensional

Changes of Tiles due to the Effect of Varied Water and
Heat Conditions and Distortion out of Plane
EN 994: 96
Textile Floor Coverings: Determination of the Side

Length, Squareness and Straightness of Tiles
EN 995: 96
Textile Floor Coverings: Assessment of the Creep of

the Backings
EN 1269:97
Textile Floor Coverings: Assessment of Impregnation in

Needled Floor Coverings by Means of a Soiling Test
EN 1307: 97
Textile Floor Coverings: Classification of Pile Carpets
EN 1318: 97
Textile Floor Coverings: Determination of the Apparent

Effective Thickness of Backing
EN 1470:98
Textile Floor Coverings: Classification of Needled Floor

Coverings Except for Needled Pile Floor Coverings
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 01 06
1 02 02
ODAC
EN 1471: 97
Textile Floor Coverings: Assessment of Changes in

Appearance
prEN 1813 : 98
Textile Floor Coverings: Determination of Wool Fibre

Integrity using an Abrasion Machine
prEN 1814 : 98
Textile Floor Coverings: Determination of Resistance to

Fraying of Edges using the Modified Vettermann Drum
Test
prEN 1815 : 98
Resilient and Textile Floor Coverings: Assessment of

Static Electrical Propensity
prEN 1963 : 98
Textile Floor Coverings: Tests using the Lisson Tretad

Machine
British Standards
BS 4407: 88
Methods of Test: Quantitative Analysis of Fibres

Mixtures
BS 4790: 87
Determination of the Effects of a Small Source of

Ignition on Textile Floor Coverings (Hot Metal Nut
Method)
BS 4815: 90
Glossary of Generic Names for Man-Made Fibres
BS 5287: 88
Assessment and Labelling of Textile Floor Coverings
BS 5808: 91
Carpet Underlays
Codes
BS 5325: 01
Coverings
Code of Practice for Installation of Textile Floor
1 02 03
Other References
1 02 03 01
Architectural Graphic Standards / German Standards

DIN 66 095 T4
1 03
Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
1 03 01 01
General Terms
Graphic Symbols defining wear resistance and comfort

such as antistatic property, suitable for humid rooms,
roller chair resistance etc.
carpet - all textile floor coverings not designated as rugs.

carpet Tile - square module, dense cut pile or loop, heavy backed
carpet Underlay - a coherent layer of textile or other material placed beneath an exposed
floor covering.
substrate - a construction, integral with the use-surface and composed of one or more
layers, which serves as a support for the use-surface and possibly stabilises the
dimensions and/or acts as a cushion.
textile floor covering - a product having a use-surface composed of vegetable or
synthetic fibre material and generally used for covering floors.
textile floor covering with pile; pile carpet - a floor covering having a textile use-surface
formed from a layer of yarns or fibres projecting from a substrate.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
textile floor covering without pile - a floor covering composed of a non-pile textile usesurface and possibly a substrate.
.traffic - usage expressed in terms of foot traffic (person) per unit of time or as light,
medium or heavy, in order to define need for matching carpet construction, which
normally increases as traffic increases.
use-surface - upper part of a textile floor covering directly exposed to traffic
1 03 01 02
Terms relating to the use-surface

cut pile - pile of a carpet consists of legs of tufts or individual fibres.
cut and loop - carpets with areas of both cut pile and loop, most often with the cut pile
being higher than the loop.
gauge - the average distance between the adjacent binding sites in the width-wise
direction. The gauge of a tufting machine is the average centreline distance between
the needles.
loop - the continuous length of yarn or fibres between the two successive lowest points of
bindings of the pile in the substrate.
loop pile - pile of a carpet consisting of loops
number of loops and tufts - the number of complete tufts and/or loops and spaces is
counted over a distance L that is at least 100 mm and contains a minimum of 41
complete tufts and/or loops and spaces. The number of tufts and/or loops and spaces
is counted in direction parallel to and at right angles to the selvage, and the number
per unit area is then calculated.
pile - top layer of textile floor covering (user surface) consisting of yarn (cotton, jute, sisal
fibre, coconut fibre, and wool) or synthetic fibre (Polyamide, Polyacryl, Polyester,
Polypropylene) cut or looped, projecting from the substrate and acting as a usesurface. The quality of a textile floor covering depends mainly on the quantity and
quality of fibre used. The relation between pile thickness, pile height and pile weight
defines its density. Pile density and pile-weight are important indicators for the life
span of a covering.
pile height (mm) - the length of fibre or of one leg of a tuft from the place where it emerges
from the substrate to its furthest extremity or half the length of a loop measured
between the two points where it emerges from the substrate.
pile thickness (mm) - the difference in the thickness of the textile floor covering before
and after the pile above the substrate has been shorn away, measured under a
pressure of 2,0 kPa (1 kPa = 103 N/M2 see ISO 1766).
pile weight (g/m2) - total weight of pile yarns in the carpet.
pile density (g/m3) - D = 36 x the finished pile weight divided by the average pile height.
total thickness (mm) - the effective length from the bottom of the underlayment to the top
of the pile.
total weight (g/m2) - total weight of the carpet measured in grams per m2.
tuft - a length of yarn, for example I-, J-, U- or W-shaped, or a length of yarn in the form of
a knot, the leg or legs of which form the pile of a carpet
1 03 01 03
Terms relating to the substrate

back coating - the operation of depositing a bonding agent on the back of a textile floor
covering to ensure its penetration into the substrate of the textile floor covering without
reaching the use-surface.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
primary backing - a coarse textile fabric into the pile yarn is stitched and to which a back
coating may be applied, or to which a secondary backing may be laminated. Primary
backing, the matrix used in making tufted carpet, consisting of woven or non-woven
fabric, usually jute or polypropylene, into which pile yarn tufts are stitched.
secondary backing - a coarse textile laminated to the back of the primary backing to
reinforce the latter. Typical materials are jute, Polypropylene, latex foam or Vinyl.
1 03 01 04
coverings
Terms relating to the estimation of fitness for use of textile floor

appearance resistance - the maintenance of the appearance in the structure, pattern and
colour of a textile floor covering.
crushing - loss of thickness in a textile floor covering under the action of a static or
dynamic load.
electrical property - the extent to which a textile floor` covering develops and
accumulates an electrostatic charge on a person or object moving across its surface.
resistance to soiling - the ability of a textile covering to resist change of appearance due
to soiling during use.
wear by abrasion - progressive loss of surface material from the use-surface, caused by
mechanical action.
1 05
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification
according to Section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
1 05 01 01
Textile Floor Coverings

Provide data on specified products describing physical and performance characteristic in
accordance with definitions in ISO 2424 such as:
01.0
Commercial references
02.0
Characteristics
Type of construction
Fibre composition of use surface
Thickness of pile above substrate
Type of pile
Colour
Pattern
Rows
Gauge
Stitches
Dimensions
Tile size
Total thickness
Number of tufts and loops
Total mass per unit area
Mass of pile per unit area above the substrate
Surface pile density
Backing material
Apparent thickness of foam backing
Density of foam backing
03.0
Performance
Categories of use
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Durability
04.0
Additional characteristics
Dimensional stability
Electrostatic charge
Fire behaviour
Acoustic behaviour
Colour Fastness
05.0
-
1 05 01 02
Maintenance
Types of cleaning
Types of maintenance
Time schedule
Adhesive
Provide product data and Manufacturers instructions for each type of adhesive.
Give sufficient information in order the products can be used safely and without risk to
health.
1 05 01 03
Cushion or Underlay
Provide product data for each type of carpet cushion or underlay as well as accessories
proposed to be used.
Identify each material by Manufacturers catalogue number and general classification.
Give Manufacturers technical information, label analysis and other data required
demonstrating compliance with specified requirements.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
Provide shop drawings when indicated including seaming plan, method of joining
seams,direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge mouldings and bindings.
1 05 03
Samples
Submit at least 3 sample catalogues for initial purposes showing the full range of floor
covering carpets and exposed accessories available from the proposed manufacturers in
the specified qualities.
Prepare mock-ups of carpets at 1 m2 on selected locations of the actual structure, if
requested by the Architect.
1 05 04

Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor.
Reports and records of Contractors internal quality control.
Reports and records of Contractors external quality control.
Certificates for all components indicated showing compliance with referenced standards
and requirements of local authorities.
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Products used in the work of this section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacture of textile floor coverings and with a history of successful
production acceptable to the Engineer.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 06 01 02
ODAC
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of work.
1 06 02 01
Fire Behaviour
Textile floor coverings be non-readily ignitable in case of heavy domestic, general contract
and heavy contract use. They are proved non-readily ignitable if they pass the
Brandschacht test and fulfil the requirements placed on building materials of class B (in
accordance with DIN 4102 4).
Textile floor coverings be of low radius of effects of ignition in case of heavy domestic,
general contract and heavy contract use. They are proved having a low radius of effects of
ignition, if the radius of affected area is up to 35 mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method (in
accordance to BS 4790 / 5287),
Textile floor coverings be of at least medium radius of effects of ignition in case of
domestic use. They are proved having a medium radius of effects of ignition, if the radius of
affected area is between 35 mm and 75 mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method (in
accordance to BS 4790 / 5287),
Textile floor coverings with radius of the affected area greater than 75 mm are
unsatisfactory and shall not be used.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01

Checking of suppliers / manufacturers test certificates and certificates of compliance to
conform to specification and referenced standards prior to application or installation.
1 06 04 02

The Contractor shall engage an authorised and independent laboratory agency for
testing static dissipating floor covering after installation has been completed.

1 07 01

Deliver materials to site originally packed by Manufacturer in unopened containers.
Protect materials during delivery to comply with Manufacturers directions. Damaged
materials shall be replaced at contractor's cost.
1 07 02

Store materials at building site strictly according to Manufacturers instructions. Store

1 08 02
Environmental Requirements
Use ecologically desirable solvent free adhesives only if type of carpet and surface of the
ground allow doing so.
Store materials in area of installation at least 48 hours prior to installation.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 2:
ODAC
Products
2 01 Textile Floor Coverings

2 01 01
Textile floor coverings for general use
2 01 01 01
Woven textile floor coverings

01.0
Carpet shall be woven Axminster, Wilton or Velvet weave.

Carpet shall consist of 100% wool.
02.0
Carpet shall be of normal quality (category N) with a pile thickness < 5

mm and shall have a mass of pile per unit area above substrate < 900g
/ m2 (in accordance with EN 1307).
See Annex 6. Table 1
03.0
Pile above substrate shall be cut, loop or cut and loop.
04.0
Provide colour as selected by the Engineer.
05.0
Provide patterns as selected by the Engineer.
06.0
Rows: Give Manufacturers data per cm.
07.0
Roll width: Give Manufacturers data per cm.
08.0
Secondary backing shall be Jute or Polypropylene
09.0
Durability: Carpet shall have passed either the Hexapod or the

Vettermann apparatus with change of appearance 2,5 in short term and
2,0 in long term (in accordance with ISO/TR 10 361).
10.0
Dimensional Stability: The shrinkage of carpet in each direction shall

be 0,8%. The extension to each direction shall be 0,4 (in accordance
with EN 1307).
11.0
Electrostatic charge: Carpet shall have antistatic properties with

charging values on walking test 2 kV at 25% relative humidity (in
accordance with EN 1307).
12.0
Fire behaviour: The carpet shall have a radius of effects of ignition < 75
mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method (conforming to BS 4790 / 5287).
13.0
Acoustic behaviour: Provide calculated values for impact sound

insulation (in accordance to ISO 717 2) as well as for insulation from
sound through absorption of sound (in accordance with EN 1307).
14.0
The colour fastness (in accordance with ISO 105) to
15.0
Light shall be 5
To shade pastel shall be 4
To wet rubbing shall be 3
To dry rubbing shall be 34
To water in case of plain carpets shall be 34
To water in case having patterned carpets tonal effects

shall be 4
Carpet shall be rot resistant (in accordance with EN 1307).

8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 01 02
ODAC
16.0
The loss of mass of wool fibre integrity shall be

with prEN 1813).
mg (in accordance
17.0
Carpets shall be suitable for use on stairs. The Manufacturer shall

certify the suitability.
Tufted textile floor coverings

01.0
Carpet shall be tufted.
02.0
Carpet shall consist of an 80% wool / 20% Polyamide composite surface.
03.0

and shall have a mass of pile per unit area above substrate < g / m2 (in
accordance to EN 1307).See Annex 6. Table 1
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
Gauge: Give Manufacturers data per mm.
09.0
Stitches: Give Manufacturers data per cm.
10.0
11.0
Primary backing shall be Jute or Polypropylene, secondary backing shall

be Jute, Polypropylene or foam.
12.0
Thickness of Foam: Give Manufacturers data in mm with tolerances to

be nominal mm (in accordance with EN 1318).
13.0
Density of Foam: Give Manufacturers data in g / m3 (in accordance to

ISO 1766).
14.0

2,0 in long term (in accordance to ISO/TR 10 361).
15.0
Dimensional stability: The shrinkage of carpet in each direction shall

be . The extension to each direction shall be in accordance with
EN 1307).
16.0
Electrostatic charge: Carpet shall have antistatic properties with charging

values on walking test kV at 25% relative humidity (in accordance
with EN 1307).
17.0
Fire behaviour: The carpet shall have a medium radius of effects of

ignition of 35 up to 75 mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method
(conforming to BS 4790 / 5287).
18.0

insulation (in accordance to ISO 717 2) as well for insulation from
19.0

-
Light shall be
To shade pastel shall be
To wet rubbing shall be
To dry rubbing shall be
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
To water in case of plain carpets shall be
To water in case of patterned carpets having tonal effects shall

be
20.0
21.0
The mass of the loss of wool fibre integrity shall be

accordance with prEN 1813).
22.0
Carpets shall be suitable for use on stairs. The Manufacturer shall certify
the suitability.
2 01 02
Textile floor coverings for heavy use
2 01 02 01
mg (in
01.0
02.0
Carpet shall consist of an 80% wool / 20% Polyamide composite

surface.
03.0
Carpet shall be of intermediate quality (category M) with a pile

thickness mm and < 6 mm and shall have a mass of pile per unit
area above substrate and < g / m2 (in accordance with EN 1307).
04.0 Pile above substrate shall be cut, loop or cut and loop.
05.0
06.0
Specify patterns as selected by the Engineer.
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0

11.0

EN 1307).
12.0

charging values on walking test kV at 25% relative humidity (in
The resistance to earth shall be
13.0
Ohm.
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 4102).
Acoustic behaviour: The calculated value for impact sound insulation
shall be between 20 40 dB (in accordance with ISO 717 2).
For insulation from sound through absorption of sound (absorption
coefficient) provide Manufacturers calculated value (in accordance with
EN 1307).
15.0

-
Light shall be

10

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

be
16.0
17.0

18.0

2 01 02 02
mg (in

01.0
02.0
Carpet shall consist of a 60% wool / 40% Polyamide composite

surface.
03.0
Carpet shall be of intermediate quality (category M) with a pile

thickness mm and < 6 and shall have a mass of pile per unit area
above substrate and < g / m2 (in accordance with EN 1307).
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
Primary backing shall be Jute or Polypropylene, secondary backing

shall be Jute, Polypropylene or foam.
12.0

13.0
Density of Foam: Give Manufacturers data in g / m3 (in accordance

with ISO 1766).
Carpet shall be chair resistant (in accordance with Castor chair Test EN
985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight width of 20 mm.
16.0

EN 1307).
17.0

Ohm.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
18.0
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 41

02).
19.0

EN 1307).
20.0

-
Light shall be
To water in case of patterned carpets and having tonal effects

shall be

21.0
22.0

23.0

2 01 03
Textile floor coverings for extra-heavy use
2 01 03 01
mg (in
01.0
02.0
Carpet shall consist of a 60% wool / 40% Polyamide composite surface.
03.0
Carpet shall be of heavy quality (category L) with a pile thickness

mm and < 6 and shall have a mass of pile per unit area above
substrate g / m2 (in accordance with EN 1307).
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0

11.0
985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight width of 20 mm
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
12.0

EN 1307).
13.0

accordance to EN 1307).
Ohm.
14.0
15.0

EN 1307).
16.0

-
Light shall be
be

17.0
18.0

19.0

2 01 03 02
mg (in

01.0
02.0
Carpet shall consist of 100% Polypropylene use-surface.
03.0

mm and < 6 mm and shall have a mass of pile per unit area above
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
Rows: Give Manufacturers data per cm
08.0
Gauge: Give Manufacturers data per mm
09.0
Stitches: Give Manufacturers data per cm
10.0
Roll width: Give Manufacturers data per cm

13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
11.0

12.0

be nominal mm (in accordance with EN 1318
13.0

with ISO 1766)
14.0

3,0 in long term (in accordance with ISO/TR 10 361)
15.0
Chair resistance: Carpet shall be chair resistant (in accordance with

Castor chair Test EN 985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight
width of 20 mm
16.0

EN 1307).
17.0

Ohm.
18.0
19.0

EN 1307).
20.0

-
Light shall be
be

21.0
22.0

2 02 Carpet Tile
2 02 01
Carpet tile for general use
2 02 01 01

01.0
Provide size of tile as required by Engineer unless otherwise indicated.
02.0

Carpet shall consist of 100% wool.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
03.0
ODAC

mm and shall have a mass of pile per unit area above substrate < 900g
/ m2 (in accordance with EN 1307).
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0

10.0
Dimensional Stability: The shrinkage of carpet in each direction shall

EN 1307).
11.0

12.0
Fire behaviour: The carpet shall have a radius of effects of ignition < 75
mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method (conforming to BS 4790 / 5287).
13.0

insulation (in accordance to ISO 717 2) as well for insulation from
sound through absorption of sound (in accordance to EN 1307).
14.0

-
Light shall be
To water in case having patterned carpets tonal effects

shall be
15.0
16.0

with prEN 1813).
17.0

2 02 01 02
mg (in accordance

01.0
Provide size of tile as required by Engineer unless otherwise indicated.
02.0
03.0

surface.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
04.0
ODAC

and shall have a mass of pile per unit area above substrate < g / m2
(in accordance with EN 1307).
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0

12.0

13.0

with ISO 1766).
14.0

15.0

EN 1307).
16.0

17.0
Fire behaviour: The carpet shall have a medium radius of effects of

ignition of 35 up to 75 mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method
(conforming to BS 4790 / 5287).
18.0

insulation (in accordance with ISO 717 2) as well for insulation from
19.0

-
Light shall be

be
20.0
21.0
The mass of the loss of wool fibre integrity shall be

22.0

mg (in
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 02 02
Carpet tile for heavy use
2 02 02 01

01.0
Provide size of tile as required by Engineer
02.0
03.0

surface.
04.0
Carpet shall be of intermediate quality (category M) with a pile thickness

substrate and < g / m2 (in accordance with EN 1307).
06.0
07.0
Specify patterns as selected by the Engineer.
08.0
09.0
10.0

11.0

EN 1307).
12.0

Ohm.
13.0
14.0

EN 1307).
15.0

-
Light shall be
be
16.0

17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
17.0

18.0

2 02 02 02
mg (in

01.0
Provide size of tile as required by Engineer.
02.0
03.0
04.0
Carpet shall be of intermediate quality (category M) with a pile thickness

substrate and < g / m2 (in accordance with EN 1307).
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0

12.0

13.0

with ISO 1766).
14.0

15.0
985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight width of 20 mm.
16.0

EN 1307).
17.0

Ohm.
18.0
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 41

02).
19.0

EN 1307).
20.0

18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Light shall be
To water in case of patterned carpets and having tonal effects

shall be
21.0
22.0

23.0

2 02 03
mg (in
Carpet tile for extra-heavy use (heavy contract)
2 02 03 01Woven textile floor coverings

01.0
Provide size of tile as required by Engineer.
02.0
03.0
04.0

06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0

11.0
985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight width of 20 mm
12.0

EN 1307).
13.0

Ohm.
14.0
15.0

19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

EN 1307).
16.0

-
Light shall be
be

17.0
18.0

19.0

2 02 03 02
mg (in

01.0
Provide size of tile as required by Engineer
02.0
03.0
Carpet shall consist of 100% Polypropylene use-surface.
04.0

05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
Rows: Give Manufacturers data per cm
09.0
Gauge: Give Manufacturers data per mm
10.0
Stitches: Give Manufacturers data per cm
11.0

12.0

be nominal mm (in accordance with EN 1318
13.0

with ISO 1766)
14.0

3,0 in long term (in accordance with ISO/TR 10 361)
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
15.0
Chair resistance: Carpet shall be chair resistant (in accordance with

Castor chair Test EN 985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight
width of 20 mm
16.0

EN 1307).
17.0

Ohm.
18.0
19.0

EN 1307).
20.0
21.0

-
Light shall be

be
Carpets shall be suitable for use on stairs. The Manufacturer shall certify the suitability.
2 03 Carpet Cushion or Underlayment

2 03 01
Underlay types
Underlay is available in latex rubber, sponge rubber, felt and synthetic, jute, foam in
Polyurethane and Polyethylene. It is also manufactured in a variety of densities,
thickness, and weights to meet light, medium or heavy conditions.
2 03 01 01
Latex Rubber
The versatile chemistry of Latex Rubber permits a variety of flat and profiled, low
gauge and high gauge products to be produced covering all markets requirements. In
addition, the particular appeal of the Latex rubber process is its ability to offer flame
retardancy.
2 03 01 01 01
Latex Rubber for general use
01.0
Weight:
908 g/m2
02.0
: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 7,50 mm
05.0
Backing: Woven polypropylene

21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
British Standard Classification

BS 5808 1991:
2 03 01 01 02
GDU-Gen.Domestic
Latex Rubber for heavy use
01.0
Weight:
1.350 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 7,00 mm
05.0

BS 5808 1991: DCU-Dom.Contract
2 03 01 01 03
Latex Rubber for extra heavy use (Heavy contract)
01.0
Weight:
1.665 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 7,00 mm
05.0

BS 5808 1991: HCU-Heavy Contract
2 03 01 02
Sponge Rubber
The flexibility inherent in the Sponge Rubber production process permits a greater
diversity of product types, patterns and styles. Sponge Rubber underlay is
aesthetically pleasing, highly functional and offers exceptional underfoot comfort and
carpet protection. Sponge Rubber underlay resists contraction and extension in textile
products keeping commercial carpet installation totally flat whilst spreading load to
offer maximum carpet performance through a perfect combination of cushioning and
support. It absorbs the damaging abrasive energy of continuous foot and wheeled
traffic taking pressure off the pile to improve wears life and appearance retention.
2 03 01 02 01
Sponge Rubber for general use
01.0
Weight:
2.712 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 6,90 mm
05.0
Backing: Paper backing

BS 5808 1991: GDU-Gen.Domestic
2 03 01 02 02
Sponge Rubber for heavy use
01.0
Weight:
3.200 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 6,00 mm
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
05.0
ODAC

BS 5808 1991: HCU-Heavy Contract
2 03 01 02 03
Sponge Rubber for extra heavy use (Heavy contract)
01.0
Weight:
3.300 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 8,75 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 9,50 mm
05.0

BS 5808 1991: L/HD-Luxury/H.Dom.
2 03 01 03
Felt and synthetic

Where traditional fitting methods are used on Axminster and Wilton carpets, Felt and
Synthetic underlays are recommended by carpets manufacturers as they allow the
seams to bed in much easier than other Rubber/Sponge type underlays. Moreover,
this type of underlays are particular suited for heavy domestic / contract carpeting
installation such as mosques, hotels, restaurants etc. where extra support is needed
to stop premature wear in hard wearing areas. Felt and Synthetic underlays are a
resin dispersed throughout the fibre mass and bonded to the fibres by heat. They offer
a high strength and exceptional toughness, high resilience with no bottoming out or
significant deformation, excellent resistance to glowing and/or open flame ignition
sources, good thermal and sound insulation properties excellent durability and
serviceability, suitable for castor chairs when carpet used is castor chair suitable.
2 03 01 03 01
Felt and synthetic for general use
01.0
Type: Felt (50% Synthetic & Cotton, 50% Wool)
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 30,00 m
04.0
Width: 2,00 m
05.0
Thickness: 5,00 mm
500 g/ m2

BS 5808 1991: GDU-Gen.Domestic Use
2 03 01 03 02
Felt and synthetic for heavy use
01.0
Type: Needle Felt (60% Recycled wool & synthetic fibres, 40%
Recycled jute fibres)
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 11,00 m
04.0
Width: 1,37 m
05.0
Thickness: 6,00 mm (nom.)
950 g/ m2

BS 5808 1991: DU-Domestic Use
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 03 01 03 03
ODAC
Felt and synthetic for extra heavy use (Heavy contract)
01.0
Type: Felt (50% Synthetic & Cotton, 50% Wool)
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 30,00 m
04.0
Width: 2,00 m
05.0
Thickness: 10,00 mm
1.100 g/ m2

BS 5808 1991: HC-Heavy Contract
2 03 01 04
Other Carpet Underlay
2 03 01 04 01
Jute
Another needle felt carpet underlay most suited for heavy contract use available from
100% reclaimed jute fibres, and 100% Polyethylene film as backing.
01.0
Type: Needle felt (100% Reclaimed jute fibres)
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 25,00 m
04.0
Width: 1,37 m
05.0
Thickness: 9,00 mm
980 g/ m2
Backing: 100% Polyethylene film

BS 5808 1991: HCU-Heavy Contract Use
2 03 01 04 02
Polyester fibres
Another needle felt carpet underlay most suited for contract use available from 100% Polyester
fibres.
01.0
Type: Needle felt (100% Polyester)
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 40,00 m
04.0
Width: 2,00 m
05.0
Thickness: 5,00 mm
500 g/ m2

BS 5808 1991
2 03 01 04 03
Polyethylene foam
Polyethylene foam underlay most suited for light domestic use with excellent sound
insulating properties. It is fire-resistant and water-resistant.
01.0
Type: Polyethylene foam
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 50,00 m
04.0
Width: 1,00 m
05.0
Thickness: 12,00 mm
340 g/ m2
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

BS 5808 1991
2 04
Adhesives
This range covers adhesives used for Stretched Carpet Installation, Glue Down and
Double Stick Installation (Sub-floor to underlay & underlay to carpet).
Adhesives shall provide a firm and durable bond.
The adhesive shall not have a harmful effect on the floor covering, underlay or base and,
after use, they shall be odourless, non-flammable and non-toxic.
Special consideration shall be given to softening points of adhesives as they may be
required to withstand high temperatures if rooms are not air-conditioned.
2 04 01
Type of Adhesives
2 04 01 01
SBR Emulsion
A water-based emulsion of a blend of styrene-butadiene which may contain synthetic
resin modifiers and/or fillers.
2 04 01 02
Acrylic Emulsion
An acrylate ester copolymer emulsion, which may contain resin modifiers and/or fillers.
2 04 02
Heat Seam Tape

Heat seam tape for Stretched Carpet Installation features a woven scrim with glass
fibre welf and a Polyester warp. The glass fibre gives maximum strength across the
seam with no stretch along the length. The scrim is stitched to the paper backing to
ensure stability.
2 04 03
Waterproof Tape
This tape is used for joining underlay and seaming foam backed carpets in conjunction
with seaming cement.
2 05
2 05 01
Accessories
01.0
Sub-floor filler shall be cementitious or use filler recommended by

flooring material manufacturer.
02.0
Base cap: Specify types, finish and colour as selected by the Engineer
03.0
Anodised aluminium, brass or wooden grippers shall be used for

mouldings and edge strip. Specify material and colour as instructed by
the Engineer.
04.0
For stair nosing, rubber or aluminium type of square or round nose shall
be used with ribbed surface, one piece per stair treads width. Provide
colour and finish as proposed by the Engineer.
Wooden Grippers
See Annex 6 figure 2: Wooden Grippers
Grippers are made from high-grade resin bonded plywood. Five (5) ply of six (6) mm
thickness machined on one edge to a defined angle and penetrated from the
underside by two (2) rows of passive golden pins. Pins are set at an angle of 60
degree to eliminate pull out and bending even when power stretching. Carpet backing
is penetrated to allow for correct tension.
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 05 02
ODAC
Metal Grippers
Metal grippers are manufactured entirely from galvanized steel for strength and are
used where Wooden Grippers are inappropriate.
2 05 02 01
Skirting Gripper
See Annex 6 figure 3: Skirting
Skirting Gripper is used when, for whatever reason, a fixing cannot be made directly
into or onto the sub-floor. It is fixed to the skirting board with 19-mm ring shank nails.
The carpet is then stretched and hooked onto the steel teeth trimmed and tucked into
the gully in the normal way. A special cutting tool is unnecessary as Skirting Gripper is
scored every 40-mm so that short length can be snapped off as required.
2 05 03
Aluminium Edgings
See Annex 6 figure 4: Aluminium Edgings
This comprehensive range of aluminium edgings caters for carpets fitted with glue or
with underlay having choices from polished aluminium to simbrass, an economical and
attractive alternative to that of a natural brass, aluminium edging with a special
anodised finish simulating a brass effect.
2 05 03 01
Single Edgings
Single edgings are produced from high quality aluminium extrusions. Having a flat
base it makes it an ideal metal edging for the use on solid floor either mechanically
fixed or installed by using adhesive system.
2 05 03 01 01
Standard Single Edge Plain:

Standard Single Edge Plain has a highly polished aluminium finish and provides a
neat attractive edging at doorways and other unprotected carpet edges.
2 05 03 01 02
Standard Single Edge Hammered:

The hammered surface obscures scuff, wear and tear marks whilst giving different
and unusual finish
2 05 03 01 03
Anodised Standard Single Edge Plain:

Manufactured to the same design as Standard Single Edge Plain, this simulated brass
section provides a neat durable finish to the exposed carpet edges.
2 05 03 01 04
Anodised Standard Single Edge Hammered:

Manufactured to the same design as Standard Single Edge Hammered, this simulated
brass section provides a neat durable finish to the exposed carpet edges.
2 05 03 01 05
Fluted Single Edge:

The fluting on the metal edging gives a bold and pleasing appearance with all the
advantages of the edging range.
2 05 01 03 06
Polish Single Edge:

As Standard Single Edge Plain but with the base slotted only. Suitable for foam back
carpet and carpet tiles.
2 05 01 03 07
Foam Grip Single Edge:

The edge of the foam-backed carpet is inserted between the jaws of the extrusion.
The top surface then being tapped down to achieve a secure hold. This section has a
highly polished finish.
2 05 03 02
Double Edgings
Double edgings are produced from high quality aluminium extrusions designed to
eliminate the need for sewing or binding and provide the perfect answer for joining two
different carpets at doorways. Anodised brass finishes are also available.
26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 05 03 02 01
ODAC
Standard double Edging:

The flat brass version of this simulated brass finish Standard double Edge is used to
achieve a neat and attractive join between two carpets.
2 05 03 02 02
Standard (Z) Section:

The (Z) Section offers the ideal transition between a stretch fitted carpet installation
and a smooth floor covering at a different level. After finishing off the carpet the top of
the section can be tapped down using rubber mallets until the two edges of the top
cover fit snugly to the carpet and the smooth floor.
2 05 04
Cover Strips
Range of edgings for joints between floor coverings at the same height. Precision
drilled and countersunk. Screws provided in colours to complement the metal finish.
Designed for use on all carpet and resilient floor finishing.
2 05 05
Seam Strip

Conceals and protects joints between all grades and thickness of resilient and carpet
floor coverings ensuring a continuity of appearance on the finished installation when
different profiles are required.
2 05 06
Stair Rods
See Annex 6 figure 5: Stair Rods
The stair rod collection will add a really distinctive touch to any staircase. It combines
the traditional elegance of individual stair rods with wall-to-wall carpeting or stair
runner.
2 05 06 01
Brass Stair Rods

The classic looks of bright polished brass crafted in solid brass to the highest quality.
This finish has been the standard in decorative home accessories for generations
providing luxurious finish to stairs in all types of public and commercial buildings when
carpet is fitted by the waterfall method either as a runner or across the full width of the
stair.
2 05 06 02
Anodised Aluminium Rods

Constructed from 16 mm quarter round aluminium extrusion with lustrous simbrass
anodised finish.
2 05 06 03
Fixing Eyes and Finials

Crafted from solid brass to the highest quality finish, recommended eye types and
finials for Brass Stair Rods. The ends are supplied as extensions (finials) to be
screwed on the ends of the rod enabling the rods to be trimmed to exact length on
side after the carpet has been fixed in position.
2 05 06 03 01
Hinged Eye:
For rods where stairs are enclosed on either sides or where regular removal of stair
rods is required.
2 05 06 03 02
Plain Eye:
For rods inserted from side of open stairs or where there is enough room to install
rods through eyes on close cover stairs.
27
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 05 06 03 03
ODAC
Solid Brass Brackets:

Polished, die cast, solid brass brackets designed for use with Anodised Aluminium
rods, simbrass quarter round stair rods. Hinged top plate to enable easy fitting and
securing of rods.
28
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
01.0
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
02.0
Verify that floor surfaces are dry smooth and flat within specified
tolerances and are ready to receive work.
Verify that concrete floors are ready for carpet installation by testing for
moisture emission rate and alkalinity. Moisture emission rate to be not
greater than 1,4 kg per 100 m2 per 24 hours when tested using calcium
chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. Alkalinity shall be in the range of 59 pH.
03.0
3 02 Surface Preparation
01.0
Immediately prior to installation of the work of this section clean all

substrata and remove all oil, grease, paint, varnish, hardeners and
other items, which
would adversely affect the bond of adhesive
02.0
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps.
03.0
Fill minor or local spots, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor
filler. Apply, trowel, and float filler or levelling composition to achieve
smooth, flat, hard surface.
04.0
Apply a pre-coat (Anhydrite or Magnesia) in case filler or levelling

composition do not connect sufficiently with sub-floor.
05.0
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
06.0
Vacuum clean prepared sub-floor.
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
Installation of stretched-in-carpet
Install carpet and cushion in accordance with Manufacturers instructions.
Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across
door openings. Use edge strip or combination tackless strip / edge strip where carpet
terminates at other floor coverings.
Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces,
but not more than 9 mm.
Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor.
Lay out cushion so that seam will be perpendicular to or offset at least 150 mm from
carpet seams.
Butt cushions edges together and tape seams with waterproof tape.
Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours.
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
-
Locate seams in area of least traffic and parallel to main traffic.
Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.

29
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same

direction on adjacent pieces.
Locate change of colour or pattern between rooms under door centreline.
Provide monolithic colour, pattern and texture match within any one area.
Install carpet tight and flat on sub-floor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform
appearance.
Double cut seams with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately.
Join seams using heat seam tape. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked,
and free of gaps.
Following seaming, hook carpet onto tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and
hook firmly at other edges. Follow Manufacturers recommendations for method and
amount of stretch.
Extend carpet as base, finish up vertical surfaces to form base. Terminate top of base
with gripper or cap strip.
Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3 03 01 01
Installation of stretched-in-carpet on stairs

Install tackless strips at back of treads, with pins facing riser, and at bottom of riser,
with pins facing tread.
Install cushion on stair treads, butt tight to applied nosing.
Install carpets on stairs with the run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated
traffic to avoid peaking of backings at nosings.
Stretch carpet over stair treads, full width in one peace. Fold carpet less than 40 mm
on each side.
3 03 02
Installation of glued-in-carpet
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
-Locate seams in area of least traffic and parallel to main traffic.
-Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.
-Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on
adjacent pieces .
-Locate change of colour or pattern between rooms under door centreline.
-Provide monolithic colour, pattern and texture match within any one area.
Install carpet tight and flat on sub-floor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform
appearance.
Double cut seams with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately.
Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by Manufacturer. After
sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive.
Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with
seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.
30
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Extend carpet as base finish up vertical surfaces to form base. Terminate top of base
with cap strip.
3 03 02 01
Installation of glued-in-carpet on stairs

Use one piece of carpet for each tread and the riser below. Apply seam adhesive to all
cut edges.
Install carpet with pile direction in the length of the stair.
Adhere carpet tight to stair treads and risers.
3 03 03
Installation of carpet tile

Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in colour match
Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
Install carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel
to building lines or aligned as indicated on shop drawings.
Locate change of colour or pattern between rooms under door centreline.
Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
Adhere carpet tile as base, finish up vertical surfaces to form base. Terminate top of
base with cap strip.
Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
3 03 04
Seams
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
3 03 05
Locate seams only where shown on the approved Shop drawings or

where specifically otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Locate seams to the maximum practicable out of traffic.
Fabricate seams by the compression method, using Heat Seam Tape.
Do not stretch seams.
Use Waterproof Tape for joining underlay and seaming foam backed
carpets in conjunction with seaming cement.
Underlays
Underlays shall be laid in such manner that their joints and seams are staggered in
relation to the joints and seams of the floor covering and that no unevenness or joints
show through on the covering. Underlays and coverings shall be bonded and fixed
with adhesive in such a manner that a uniform bond is obtained over the entire area.
3 03 06
Adhesives
Shall be White Latex or an equal approved by the Engineer and recommended for the
purpose by the manufacturer of the approved carpet.
3 03 07
Accessories
3 03 07 01
Wooden Grippers
See Annex 6, Figure 2
Wooden grippers are designed for ease of installation to concrete floors, prenailed at
every 150 mm with masonry nails 20 mm long for firm fixing.
31
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 07 02
ODAC
Aluminium Edgings
See Annex 6, Figure 4.
01.0
The angle and sharpness of the teeth on the single and double
edgings for stretch installation ensure the firmest grip on the
carpet backing.
02.0
Cover strips are precision drilled and countersunk.
03.0
All edgings have a protective film on the face, which can be
easily removed once installation is complete.
3 03 07 03
Stair Rods
See Annex 6, Figure 5.
04.0
When ordering stair rods for a carpet runner, it is recommended
to measure the full width of the runner and add between 2in.
and 3 in. on either side depending upon personal preference,
the type of rod used and width of the staircase.
05.0
When carpet is fitted across entire width of tread, a stair rod is
required from wall to wall.
06.0
Measure stair width where tread and riser meet in crotch of
stair, be very precise and number treads from the top to the
bottom of stairs.
07.0
Various fixing eyes can be used for this installation depending
upon rod type required, quadrant, barrel eye and spring, side
fixing eyes.
3 03 07 04
Vinyl cove cap strip

For use at top edge of a wall-mounted carpet, in the colour selected by the Engineer
from the standard colours of the company, or shall be an equal approved by the
Engineer and recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the approved
carpet.
3 04
Field Quality Control

The work shall be free from defects mentioned in the following notes to the extent that
reduces its performance efficiency;
3 05
Spot or stain or overall uncleanness
Not evenly constructed to an extent affecting appearance
Objective odour
Discoloured areas affecting appearance (variations in colour due to crushing of pile

shall not be considered)
Unevenness on top surfaces of pile or speck of colour other than specified
Streak length wise or widthways
Marks across textile floor covering
Back coating skips or wrinkles
Tufts missing in the pile
Any hole or tear through to back
Poor colour match

Refer to Section 01700, Contract Closeout: cleaning installed work
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage.
32
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Vacuum clean carpet surfaces.
3 07 Protection
Protect all carpet surfaces to ensure that they are without damage or uncleanness at
time of handing over by providing a heavy non-staining paper or plastic walkway as
required over carpeting in direction of foot traffic, maintaining intact until carpeted
space is accepted by the owner.
3 08 Schedules
Prior to commencing of installation, contractor shall provide finish schedules of his
works, co-ordinated with other trades, and defining what category of use as well what
category of carpet is planned to be laid out where.
33
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 4:
Method of Measurement
4 01
General
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for void less than 1.0
m2 .
4 02
Textile floor coverings according to type, material, thickness and finish will be
measured by m2.
Skirting will be measured according to type by length (m).
Division strips, expansion or movement joints, edgings, cover strips, seam strips, stair
rods and the like will be measured according to type by length (m).
Work to treads and risers are grouped together.
Work is measured the area or length in contact with the base.
34
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 5:
ODAC
Basis of Payment
5 01 General
Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all materials, equipment,
tools, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples and co-ordinating work
with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and
protecting.
The unit prices shall include for all labour and work in narrow widths, cutting and fitting
around door frames, pipes and the like, cutting and fitting at boundaries.

Securing the works against undesired trespass until the surface can no longer be
damaged.
Forming and filling of screed expansion joints with elastic or plastic material
except structural movement joints.
Preparation of the base in order to obtain a good bonding ground.
Underlays
Laps, seams and treatment of joints
Extra labour and material in patterned work
Carpet clips and grippers
Retaining spare covering material, suitable for patching, and handing to the
Employer
35
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01 Tables
6 01 01
Carpet categories
Carpets shall be categorised L, M or N in accordance with the following table.

Category L is therefore applicable to thick, heavy carpets, category M is an
intermediate category and category N describes all other carpets (in accordance with
EN 1307).
Pile thickness
Mass of pile
in accordance with
ISO 1766
per unit area above

substrate in
accordance with
ISO 8543
mm
G / m2
< 500
500 + < 600
<5
5 +< 6
6 01 02
600 +< 900
900
L
L
Levels of use
Carpets are classified as suitable for different levels of use as shown in the
following table (in accordance with EN 1307)
Level of use class
Use intensity
Examples of use
Domestic
6 01 03
Light use
Light domestic
General use
Normal domestic
Heavy use
Heavy domestic
Extra-heavy use
Commercial
General contract
Heavy contract
Durability
The assessed overall change of appearance is the difference between a fatigued and
an unfatigued specimen. Changes in structure, thickness, colour and/or pattern of a
textile floor covering may contribute to overall change in appearance. It is not always
36
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
possible to distinguish clearly between the factors since each may have an interaction
with others.
Carpets shall be tested in accordance with ISO/TR 10361 in either the Hexapod or the
Vettermann apparatus, using the following number of cycles for short and long-term
use according to carpet categories:
01.0 Category M and N carpets shall conform to the following

change of appearance requirements:
Category M and N
Short Term
Class
Long Term
5.000 cycles Vettermann or
4.000 cycles Hexapod
2,0
1,0
2,5
2,0
3,0
3,0
4,0
3,5
02.0 Category L carpets having pile fibre content 100% wool or

80% wool / 20% Polyamide shall conform to the following
change of appearance requirements:
Category L
Short Term
Long Term
5.000 cycles
Vettermann or
22.000 cycles
Vettermann or
2,0
1,0
2,5
2,0
Class
DSP =
Surface pile density
in g / cm3
Patterned carpets
2,5
0,10
Plain carpets and tonal

effects carpets
0,12
4
Patterned carpets
2,5
Plain carpets and tonal

effects carpets
37
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
03.0
Category L
Category L carpets, other than those having pile

fibre content 100% wool or 80% wool / 20%
Polyamide shall conform to the following change of
appearance requirements:
Short Term
Class
Long Term
2,0
1,0
2,5
2,0
3,0
2,5
4,0
3,0
6 01 04
Fibre characteristics
Fibre
Fineness
Resilience
Abrasion
Resistance
Wool
Fine to coarse
Very good
Moderate
Polyamides
Fine to coarse
as required
Very good
Polyesters
Fine to coarse
as required
Polypropylene
Acrylics
Flammability
Main Use
Advantage
Soil
Resistance
Does not burn

easily
Good handle,
drape and
tailoring
Good to
excellent
Excellent
Burns and
melts
Strong, tough,
can be heat-set
and is drip-dry
Fair
Very good
Very good
Burns and
melts
Similar to Nylon
Fair
Fine to coarse
as required
Poor
Very good
Burns and
melts
High waterrepellent
Excellent
Fine to coarse
as required
Good
Fairly good
Does not burn

easily
Wool-like in
texture
Fair
38
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
39
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 01 05
ODAC
Compatibility of carpet type with method of installation
Textile floor covering type
Stretched - In
Direct Glued - In
Woven (Non foam-backed)

Wilton
Yes
Yes
Axminster
Yes
Yes
Secondary-backed
Yes
Yes
Mono-backed
Yes
Yes
Foam-backed
Yes
Yes
Fiber-bonded
No
Yes
Stitched-bonded
No
Yes
Bonded
No
Yes
Bonded (secondary-backed)
Yes
Yes
Flocked
No
Yes
Knitted
No
Yes
Melded
No
Yes
Tiles
No
Yes
Tufted
Non-woven
40
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 02
ODAC
Figures
Fig. 1: Carpet Construction Modes
41
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 2: Wooden Grippers
42
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 3: Skirting
43
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 4: Aluminium Edgings
44
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 5: Stair Rods
45
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
46
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 6: Installation Types
47
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

7 01 Introduction
7 01 01
General
Textile floor coverings are finished products laid out on prepared ground. Carpets are exposed to
mechanical, thermal and chemical strains. At the same time they are important for human environment
with effectiveness to sensory perception and consequently to the well being.
7 01 02
Design
7 01 02 01
Domestic design
Floor layout and specification should be based on the building type and occupational uses, e.g.:
-
Numbers and ages of occupants,
Numbers and types of pets,
Resilience characteristics required ,
Unusual requirements and/or use conditions
Domestic installations will on average be reasonably small, however it is still necessary to draw up
adequate plans for the areas to be dealt with before laying commences. It is important to include details
of landings and stairs with the number of treads, where the directions of seams or lay of the pile is outside
normal practice, and method of installation and seaming.
7 01 02 01
Commercial design
Floor layout and specification should be based on the building type and occupational uses, e.g.:
-
Type and density of foot and/or wheeled traffic,
Resilience characteristics required,
Acoustic absorption levels required,
Particulars of wet, corrosive or potentially abrasive or damaging

condition.
Adequate plans for the total area should be available including:
Landings and stairs with the number of treads, where the direction of
seams or lay of the pile is outside normal practice, or when stairs and
landings are to be covered,
Methods of installation and seaming,
Types and locations of performed nosing and finishing strips, which

should be specified if these are to be used.
7 02 Carpet Construction Mode

7 02 01
Textile floor covering with pile
7 02 01 01
Woven pile carpet
Pile carpet produced on a loom in one or more operations like:

48
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
7 02 01 02
ODAC
01.0
Pile carpet woven over wires (Velour): Pile carpet produced in a single
operation on a loom in which steel rods are used to form the pile and to
determine its length.
02.0
Plain weave carpets: Woven pile carpet with uniform pile length,
containing generally a single colour.
03.0
Jacquard weave carpet (Velvet, Tourney): Pile carpet produced on

a Jacquard Loom and having a design obtained by the use of creels
(frames) each supporting the bobbins of pile yarns of different colours
the successive selection of the appropriate frames during weaving forms
the required design. Although the simplicity of the loom does not permit
patterned design, beautiful yarns colour combination can be used to
produce tweed effects.
04.0
Jacquard weave carpet two or three shot (Wilton): Basic Velvet

loom produced on a Jacquard loom having two or three insertions for
each weaving cycle.
05.0
Axminster carpets: Cut pile carpet produced by inserting during

weaving successive rows of tufts having colours arranged according to a
predetermined order. Axminster carpets have a smooth cut pile surface
with almost all of the yarn appearing on the surface. Only the number of
tufts in the carpet limits colour and patterns. Identifying feature is the
heavy ribbed backing that only allows the carpet to be rolled length wise.
Tufted pile carpet
Carpet either cut or looped in which the pile yarns are fixed in a previously manufactured base
and then secured by coating or an adhesive.
7 02 01 03
Knitted pile carpet
Carpets made either on warp knitting machines (Raschel type) or weft knitting machines
(Wildman type). Latex is applied to the back for stability and tuft. An additional backing may
also be attached. Knitted carpets usually have solid or tweed colours with level-loop textures.
7 02 01 04
Bonded pile carpet
Pile carpet in which the pile consists for example of a pleated sheet of textile yarns or fibres
secured to a support by a coating or adhesive or directly to an adhesive, which forms the
support.
7 02 01 05
Flocked carpet
Made by propelling short strands of pile fibre usually Nylon electrostatically against an
adhesive coated prefabricated backing sheet. As many as 18.000 pile fibres per square inch
become vertically embedded in the adhesive before a secondary backing is laminated to the
fabric and the adhesive cured. The pile fibres can either be dyed prior to flocking or the
finished surface can be printed after fabrication.
7 02 01 06
Knotted pile carpet
Carpet obtained by knotting the pile forming yarns by hand or automatically using either
Persian or Turkish knots.
7 02 02
Textile floor covering without pile
7 02 02 01
Woven carpet without pile
Textile floor covering without pile made on a loom
49
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
7 02 02 02
ODAC
Textile floor covering, formed of bonded textile materials
Textile floor covering in which the use surface is composed of entangled textile materials
bonded together by a mechanical, physical or chemical process or by a combination of two or
more of these processes.
7 02 02 03
Needle bonded textile materials
The consolidation of a bat of fibres through entanglement by multiple penetration of barbed

needles.
7 03 Carpet Fibres
7 03 01
Wool
Vegetable fibre nowadays often combined with other fibres especially nylon (often 80% wool /
20% nylon). Its preferences lay on its natural shine, high resilience and its excellent ability to
recover from crushing combined with good resistance to dirt and wear and its capability to selfextinguish when burnt. Through its capability to absorb humidity to one third of its own weight
it balances the indoor climate. At the same time, it becomes less electrostatically charged. The
abrasion resistance is less satisfying.
7 03 02
Nylon, Perlon
A chemical material made out of synthetic fibres (polyamide). Its virtue is its very high strength
and abrasion resistance. Added carbonisation makes the material nearly antistatically.
7 03 03
Acrylic
Acrylic (Dralon, Orlon) is the nearest substitute for wool. It is of high resilience and quite puffed,
has a good recover from crushing and an excellent fastness to light. However its abrasion
resistance is significantly lower than that of polyamide materials. Otherwise it is similar to
Nylon or Perlon.
7 03 04
Viscose
A chemical material made out of cellulose fibres. Viscose rayon has many inferiors to wool but is
used because of its low cost.
7 03 05
Polypropylene
Chemical material like Hostalen, Meraklon, Olefin made out of polypropylene fibres through
hydrocarbonisation. It has high water-repellent qualities ( therefore suitable for moist rooms),
high abrasion resistance, however less qualities to recover from crushing. It is mainly worked
into fleece material.
7 03 06
Polyester
High tensile strength material like Diolen, Trevira made out of polyester fibres through
esterification of ethyl glycol. It has high resistance to abrasion and soiling and good ability to
recover from crushing and wool-like finish. It is acid resistant and has easy care and waterrepellent qualities.
7 03 07
Vegetable Fibres
Vegetable fibres such as jute and sisal are used to make low-cost looped pile carpets.
7 03 08
Mineral Fibres
Mineral fibres are now used in a small percentage to dissipate electric charges, which are a
problem encountered in dry atmospheres.
50
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
7 05 Installation
7 05 01
Site conditions
Before starting to lay any textile floor covering materials, the position and depth of cables,
water pipes etc. should be ascertained and all preliminary work should be completed. The
base should be firm and dry and floors should be cleared of all debris. Dusty concrete should
be swept.
7 05 02
Product condition
Prior to installation, the textile floor covering materials, underlay and adhesives should be allowed
to become acclimatised to the site conditions in the laying area.
7 05 03
Direction of pile-lay
Where two or more pieces of the same textile floor covering are adjacent in the same area, the
direction of the pile-lay should be the same. Where a textile floor covering is being installed in
more than one area and/or level, the direction of pile may vary and full discussion be made
with all parties to decide pile directions essential at all times.
7 05 04
Direction of pattern
When patterned textile floor coverings are being installed it is recommended that wherever
possible they should be laid in accordance with the following;
The line of pattern should be installed with reference to datum lines, e.g. the longer walls of
perimeter of an area;
Patterns should be accurately matched and held in permanent register throughout interconnected
areas, including hall, stairs and landings;
If the pattern has a natural direction, it should relate to the major viewpoint, the stair-foot,
doorway or entrance to an area.
7 05 05
Domestic installations
It is essential that the need for extra materials to ensure pattern matching is made clear. At the
planning stage care should be taken to advise on the use of the optimum width of textile floor
covering in order to avoid wastage and also the introduction of unnecessary seams into the
floor covering.
7 05 06
Commercial installations
At an early stage a clear understanding should be reached with the client regarding the
amount of extra material that is necessary for pattern matching, centring of major motifs and
fitting purposes and the dimensional variations that exist or may occur in textile fabrics.
7 06 Methods of Installation
7 06 01
General
It is wholly flat and at even tension, this tension being such that it will not be displaced by the
movement of people or objects on its surface to the point where permanent slackness, racking
up or rippling is caused;
The hemmed, turned, trapped, whipped or sealed edges are accurately and closely fitted to all
skirting, architrave or other site perimeters;
At doorways, any necessary joints are made within the thickness or closure of the door;
Doorway terminations are secured by sealing, whipping or binding prior to seaming or finishing
with the appropriate edging or dividing strip, particularly if the materials are dissimilar or
mismatched;
51
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Cross-joints and raw edge seams are correctly matched, strengthened with cross-straps and
secured by sealing, whipping or binding prior to seaming;
If textile floor coverings are continued up the wall to skirting height, adequate provision is made
for covering and for protecting the exposed top edge of the materials, where necessary;
Wherever a base has to be drilled and plugged for the purpose of installing textile floor coverings,
carpet grippers, finishing strips, nosing or pins, the interval between plugs should not be
greater than 100 mm and the depth should not be greater than 32 mm.
7 06 02
Stretched-in-carpet (Carpet Gripper Method)
Small angled pins projecting from a performed strip that is itself fixed to the sub-floor anchor the
textile floor covering. The length and number of pins required depend on the type of textile
floor covering being installed but normally should be 4mm above the carpet underlay. The
gripper should be fixed around the perimeter of the area close to the wall so that it leaves a
gap. For most textile coverings, a gap of 6 8mm is appropriate, and nothing should obstruct
the void so formed. The edges of the carpet are pushed down into the void so that they are
securely trapped between the gripper and the vertical surface. The points of the pins should
always lie towards the wall. Foam backed textile floor coverings require a special type of
carpet gripper with longer pins. It is essential that the grippers are firmly fixed to the floor.
When using stretched-in or carpet gripper method, the textile floor covering should always be
fitted under tension. In large areas and particularly those installations over 5 m long or wide
stretching should be achieved by use of power stretcher. When heavy contract textile floor
coverings are used, architectural carpet grippers or double strips of normal grippers fixed in
parallel should be employed. It is essential that stretching is in both directions and the textile
floor covering should not lift when it is fixed and in use under tension. It is important that the
underlay abuts the edge of the carpet gripper.
7 06 03
Direct-Glued-In-Carpet (Full Adhesion Method)

When using the full adhesion method, the following recommendations are applicable:
The floor should be sound, dry and free from contaminants, which will prevent adhesion.
The textile floor covering should be cut oversize (50 mm) to allow for trimming at the perimeter of
the area.
All edges to be seamed should be cut straight and square before adhesion.
The carpet should be adhered in accordance with the adhesive manufacturers instructions, the
choice of adhesive depending upon the type of textile floor covering being installed and upon
the base.
A flooring trowel notched and spaced should be used to spread the flooring adhesive evenly. The
adhesive should be applied only to an area that can be bonded within the open time of the
adhesive.
Carpets other than foam-backed materials should be rolled in both directions with a 68kg roller, or
in accordance with the adhesive manufacturers instructions.
The textile floor covering should be trimmed at the perimeter before the adhesive dries.
The carpet once fully adhered should be left for 24h before normal traffic and/or installation of
furniture.
7 06 04
Carpet tiles
7 06 04 01
Floor preparation
The sub-floor should be clean, dry, level and free from foreign matters, grease, wax etc.
52
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
7 06 04 02
ODAC
Installation
Before cutting and installation carpet tiles should be allowed to condition for at least 24h in the
atmospheric conditions which will prevail during use. This is particularly important if the carpet
tiles have been stored or transported in conditions of extreme temperature or humidity.
Arrows on the back of the tiles usually indicate the pile direction in carpet tiles.
It is important that the tiles in the completed installation are correctly butted together.
Continual checks should be carried out to ensure that the tiles are placed together with correct
firmness, neither so loose as to allow gaps, nor so tight as to compress the tiles and cause
them to buckle.
Tiles cut into the walls should be as near as possible the same width on all four sides in order
to balance the installation.
All unprotected edges open to traffic should be protected using tile edging strip.
53
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09900 - Painting
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this Section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and
materials, and performing all operations in connection with painting.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
Painting of concrete / masonry
02.0
Painting of plaster
03.0
Painting of gypsum-boards
04.0
Painting of steel surfaces
05.0
Painting of aluminium surfaces
06.0
Painting of wood surfaces
Related Sections
08200
Wood and Plastic Doors
08600
Wood and Plastic Windows
09550
Wood Flooring
15050
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
16050
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 03
1 02 01 03 01
1 02 01 06
ISO 4618 - 1: 98
Paints and varnishes - Vocabulary Part 1: General terms
ISO 4618 - 2: 99
Paints and varnishes - Vocabulary Part 2: Terminology relating to initial defects and to
undesirable changes in films during ageing
ISO 8501 - 1: 98
Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints

and related products - Visual assessment of surface
cleanliness - Part 1: Rust grades and preparation grades of
uncoated steel substrates and of steel substrates after overall
removal of previous coatings
British Standards
BS 2015: 92
Paint and related terms
BS 3416: 91
Specification for bitumen-based coatings for cold application

suitable for use in contact with potable water
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
BS 4652: 95
Specification for zinc-rich priming paint
BS 4756: 98
Specification for ready-mixed aluminium priming paints for

woodwork
BS 4842: 84 (91)
Specification for liquid organic coatings for application to

aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections for
external architectural purposes, and for the finish on
aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections
coated with liquid organic coatings
BS 5082: 93
Specification for water-borne priming paints for woodwork
BS 5358: 93
Specification for solvent-borne priming paints for woodwork
BS 6496: 84 (91)
BS 6497: 84 (91)
Specification for powder organic coatings to galvanized Steel
BS 6949: 91
Specification for bitumen-based coatings for cold application

excluding use in contact with potable water
BS 6952
similar to BS EN 927
BS 6952 -1: 88 similar to BS EN 927 - 1
BS EN 927
Paints and varnishes. Coating materials and coating systems

for exterior wood
BS EN 971
materials
BS EN 971 - 1: 96
Paints and Varnishes. Terms and definitions for coating

General terms
BS EN 1062
Paints and varnishes. Coating materials and coating systems

for exterior masonry and concrete
BS EN 1062 - 1: 97 Classification
1 02 02
Codes
BS 6150: 91
Code of practice for painting of buildings
UBC
Uniform Building Code
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Adhesive strength - the sum total of the forces of attachment between a dry film and its
substrate
Binder - the non-volatile part of the medium which forms the film
Built the thickness, either real or apparent, of the dry film of a coating material
Coating material - a product, in liquid or in paste or powder form that, when applied to a
substrate, forms a film possessing protective, decorative and/or other specific
properties
Coating system - the sum total of the coats of coating materials, which are to be applied, or
which have been applied to a substrate
Curing the process of condensation or polymerisation of a material by heat or chemical means
resulting in the full development of the desired properties
Film a continuous layer resulting from the application of one or more coat(s) to a substrate
Film formation the process by which coating materials, when applied to a substrate, are
transformed into a cohesive layer
Gloss - the optical property of a surface, characterised by its ability to reflect light specialarity
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Hiding power - the ability of a coating material to obliterate the colour or the colour differences of
a substrate
Opacity see hiding power!
Sagging a downward movement of a coat between application and setting, that results in an
uneven area of coat having a thick lower edge
Solvent a liquid, usually volatile, that is used in the manufacture of a coating material to
dissolve or disperse the constituents responsible for film formation and that
evaporates during drying
Thixotropic paint a coating material that, while free-flowing and easy to manipulate under the
brush, sets to a gel within a short time when it is allowed to remain at rest; because
of this property the material is less likely to drip from the brush and can be applied in
rather thicker films without running or sagging
Undercoating the layer applied after priming and filling, or after the preparation of a previously
painted surface and before application of the final coat
Varnish a transparent coating material based essentially on resins and/or drying oil and is
exclusively drying by oxidation
1 03 02
Abbreviations
deg.
degree (angle)
deg. C degree Celsius
max.
maximum
min.
minimum
QUV
value indicating the quality of a paint to resist ultra-violetradiation
RH
Relative Humidity
Sa
Designation of a surface preparation grade of a steel
surface treated by
localised blast-cleaning
St
Designation of a surface preparation grade of a steel surface
treated by localised hand and power-tool cleaning (except
machine abrading)
UL
WFT
Wet Film Thickness
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification Section
01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each material proposed to be used, including manufacturers
technical
information,
label
analysis
and
application
instructions.
List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system and application.
Identify each material by manufacturers catalogue number and general classification.
referenced Standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Submit samples for initial colour selection in form of manufacturers colour charts to the
Engineer.
After colour selection, the Engineer will furnish a list of colours for the respective surfaces to
be coated.
Samples for verification: Provide samples of each colour, material and texture on
representative samples of the actual substrate of indicated size. Provide a list of material and
application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Resubmit until the required sheen, colour and texture are achieved.
The Engineer may request to prepare the samples on selected locations of the actual
structure.
1 05 04

Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor(s).
Records and reports of Contractors Internal Q.C..
Records and reports of Contractors External Q.C..
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
engaged in this work, with a history of successful production acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
methods
needed
for
proper
performance
of
work.
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced Standards and at least five
(5) years of documented experience.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Contractors internal Quality Control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking of suppliers certificates of compliance to conform to specification and referenced
Standards prior to application or installation.
1 06 04 02
see 1 06 03 Certifications

1 07 01

Deliver materials to site originally packed by manufacturer. Protect materials during delivery to
comply with manufacturers directions. Damaged materials shall be replaced at Contractor's
cost.
1 07 02

Store materials at building site strictly according to manufacturers instructions. Store products
in a dry and ventilated place.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 2:
ODAC
Products
2 01 Emulsion Paints - Waterborne

2 01 01
Interior Flat Emulsion Paint
Interior flat emulsion paint shall comply with BS 6150 : 91 or an equivalent Standard.
Gloss shall be < 10 % (60 deg. Angle).
Solids weight shall be min. 50 % .
Scrub resistance shall be min. 400 cycles.
Contrast ratio (Opacity) shall be 0,94 at 150 m WFT .
Application: By brush, roller or spray
Uniform surface finish when applied at 100 m WFT and allowed drying
Low odour
2 01 02
Exterior Flat Emulsion Paint
Gloss shall be < 10 % (60 deg. Angle).

Solids weight shall be min. 50 %.
Weather resistance shall be 300 hrs QUV (no defects).
Scrub resistance shall be min. 800 cycles.
Contrast ratio (Opacity) shall be 0,94 at 150 m WFT.
Application: By brush, roller or spray
Uniform surface finish when applied at 100 m WFT and allowed drying
Low odour
2 01 03
Interior / Exterior Semi-Gloss Emulsion Paint
- Gloss shall be 25 - 40 % (60 deg. Angle).

- Solids weight shall be min. 40 %.
- Weather resistance shall be 300 hrs QUV (no defects).
- Scrub resistance shall be min. 800 cycles.
- Contrast ratio (Opacity) shall be 0,90 at 150 m WFT.
- Application: By brush, roller or spray
- Uniform surface finish when applied at 100 m WFT and allowed drying Low odour
2 01 04
Interior / Exterior Gloss Emulsion Paint
- Gloss shall be >55 % (60 deg. Angle).

- Scrub resistance shall be min. 800 cycles.
- Application: By brush, roller or spray
-Uniform surface finish when applied at 100 m WFT and allowed drying Low odour
2 01 05
Textured Emulsion Paint

-Textured emulsion paints shall be for interior and exterior use with a smooth texture finish.
-Scrub resistance shall be min. 800 cycles.
-Application: Thixotropic consistency (non-drip) Low odour
-Various effects shall be possibleIt shall be re-coatable with other emulsion or solvent-borne
paints
2 01 06
Aggregated (Textured) Emulsion Paint

Aggregated (Textured) emulsion paints shall be for interior and exterior use, capable of hiding
imperfections in the substrate.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
- It shall have good flexibility.

- Application: Thixotropic consistency (non-drip)
-Low odourIt shall be re-coatable with other emulsion or solvent-borne paints
2 02 Physically-Drying (solvent-based) Paints

Physically drying paints shall have the following properties:
- Excellent washability
- Good wear resistance
- Scratch resistance 1000 g min.
- Semi-gloss finish 50 75 units (60 deg. angle) .
- Good flexibility: it shall pass 3 m at 100 microns WFT.
- Application: Quick drying, smooth, uniform finish
2 03 Chemically Curing Paints

2 03 01
Oxidative Drying, Alkyd Paints
2 03 01 01
Interior / Exterior Flat Finish
- Gloss shall be <10 % (60 deg. Angle).

-,Scratch resistance shall be min. 1000 g.
- Application: Easy application by brush, roller or spray
- Good flow characteristics
2 03 01 02
Interior / Exterior Semi-Gloss Finish
- Gloss shall be 35 - 50 % (60 deg. Angle).

- Scratch resistance shall be min. 800 g.
2 03 01 03
Interior / Exterior Gloss Finish
- Gloss shall be min. 80% (60 deg. Angle).

- Scratch resistance shall be min. 800 g.
2 03 01 04
Alkyd-Based Undercoating
Alkyd-based undercoating paints are mainly used as a medium coat after the primer for a
following gloss or semi-gloss finish coat.
Alkyd-based undercoating paints shall comply with SASO 818 or an equivalent Standard. The
paint shall have a homogeneous consistency by normal manual stirring. Coating shall be
easy with a brush or a roller. In case of spraying the paint may be diluted at a ratio not
exceeding 10 % by volume with thinner recommended by the manufacturer.
01.0
Drying time: Surface dry after 4 hours; hard dry after 24 hours;
02.0
Opacity shall be not less than 90 %.
03.0
coat.
The colour of the applied undercoating shall be close to that of the final
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 03 01 05
ODAC
Alkyd Varnish
Alkyd varnish shall be a transparent coating, which gives a gloss or semi-gloss finish.
It shall be washable and have a good wear resistance.
2 03 01 06
Modified Alkyds
2 03 01 06 01
Urethane-Alkyd Varnish
Urethane-alkyd varnish shall be a transparent coating, which gives a gloss or semi-gloss
finish.
It shall be washable and have a high wear resistance.
2 03 02
Chemically Curing Paints
2 03 02 01
Epoxy Coating
Epoxy coating shall be for interior and exterior use and shall have the following
properties:
- alkali resistance
- good abrasion resistance
- chemical resistance
Application by brush and spray
2 03 02 02
Polyurethane Coating
Polyurethane coating shall be for interior and exterior use and shall have the following
properties:
- superior weather resistance
- good abrasion resistance
- good colour and gloss retention.
2 04 Special Paints
2 04 01
Aluminium Paint
Aluminium paint is mainly used for painting fuel tanks. It reflects a good portion of the
suns radiation.
01.0
It shall be composed of aluminium powder, varnish resin and / or alkyd

medium of low acid and ready for use.
02.0
The paint shall, with stirring readily, form a smooth uniform mixture
suitable for application by brush, roller or spray. The paint shall not be
diluted for spraying by more than 5 % by volume.
03.0
Drying time: It shall be surface dry within 4 hours and hard dry within 24
hours.
04.0
Opacity: It shall not be less than 99 %.
05.0
Weathering: The paint shall show no colour fading or cracking at 60

deg.C and 50 to 55 % humidity for a duration of 500 hours.
06.0
Petroleum resistance: The paint shall show no blisters or flexibility signs

when tested according to GS 561, compared to a non-exposed paint.
07.0
Colour: The dry paint shall have an aluminium/metal appearance.
2 04 02
Bituminous Paints
2 04 02 01
Bituminous Paint Suitable for Potable Water

According to BS 3416 bituminous paints are classified in two types:
Type 1 without fillers
Type 2 with fillers
The dry-film thickness of type 2 will be about double of type 1
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Bituminous paint, suitable for the storage of potable water shall comply with BS 3416 or
an equivalent Standard.
2 04 02 02
Bituminous Paints Excluding Potable Water

According to BS 6949 bituminous paints are classified in two types:
Type 1 without fillers
Type 2 with fillers
The dry-film thickness of type 2 will be about double of type 1.
Bituminous paint, excluding the application for the storage of potable water shall comply
with BS 6949 or an equivalent Standard
2 04 03
Road Marking Paint

The paint may be alkyd- or acrylic/vinyl-based.
01.0
The paint shall have a homogeneous consistency by normal manual

stirring. Application shall be easy with a brush or a roller and in case of
spraying the paint shall be diluted at a ratio of 10 to 20% by volume, with
a thinner recommended by the manufacturer.
02.0
Drying time: One thin coating layer shall be surface dry after 15 minutes
and shall be hard dry after 24 hours when tested according to GS 561.
03.0
Opacity shall be not less than: 80 % for yellow paint

90 % for white paint
100 % for black paint
04.0
Resistance to artificial weathering: When tested according to GS Draft

Effect of Weathering on Paints, for 500 h, the coating shall not show
any signs of blistering, checking, cracking or flaking. The luminance
factor after the test shall be at least as follows: White 75 %
Yellow 55 %
2 04 04
Special Wood Paints (Exterior)
2 04 04 01
Primer
2 04 04 02
01.0
Primer with anti-fungus OS, applied by immersion process, shall comply

with BS 5589 or an equivalent Standard.
02.0
Standard primer, water or solvent-borne shall comply with BS 5082 or

BS 5358 respectively.
Semi-Transparent Stain Finish

Semi-transparent stain finish shall meet the following properties:
- Good flexibility
- Resistant to UV
- Water repellent
2 04 04 03
01.0
Semi-transparent stain finish, water or solvent-borne, low built (5 - 20

micrometer).
02.0
Semi-transparent stain finish, water or solvent-borne, medium built (20 60 micrometer).
Opaque Stain Finish

Opaque stain finish, shall be water or solvent-borne, medium built (20 - 60 micrometer),
of indicated colour and shall meet the following properties:
- Good flexibility
- Resistant to UV
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
- Water repellent
- Good hiding power
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 3:
ODAC
Execution
Examine structure where work of this Section will be applied. Correct conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work. Verify that materials to be used for the work
comply with requirements in specifications and schedules. Do not proceed until
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
General
Surfaces to be painted shall be stable, firm, dry and free from dust, sand, loose old paint,
laitance, dirt, grease and oil. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make sure that these
conditions are established by adequate cleaning procedures.
Whatever type of paint, procedures of application, pre-treatment and number of coatings are
specified, it is the Contractor's responsibility to check the actual conditions and state in
writing to the Engineer any incompatibility with the specified painting system.
Do not apply any coat if the climatic conditions are not within the temperature range or
humidity limits given by the manufacturer.
All adjoining areas not to be painted shall be masked and all necessary precautions taken to
prevent contamination of same.
3 03 02
Painting of Concrete / Masonry / Plaster / Gypsum boards
3 03 02 01
External Painting
Substrates of concrete, masonry or cement-based rendering shall receive a primer or sealer,
water- or solvent-borne, depending on the subsequent coats. The primer/sealer shall have
alkali resistance, good binding and sealing properties and shall be from the same
manufacturer as the subsequent coats.
Apply intermediate and final coat of paint indicated. Follow strictly manufacturer's guidelines
for application method, standard film thickness, coating intervals etc. Use same application
method as has been used for the samples and approved by the Engineer.
If a textured coat has to be applied, there shall be only one coat unless otherwise indicated.
Make sure, that the used application method results in a film thickness similar to
manufacturer's data.
Before application of paints with no or low vapour permeability make sure that the substrate
is fully cured and has reached a moisture content of less than 4%.
3 03 02 02
Internal Painting
Substrates of concrete, masonry, plaster or gypsum board shall receive a primer/sealer if
required to establish a uniform absorptive capacity.
Gypsum boards, unless otherwise indicated, shall receive a coat of waterborne filler before
the application of a primer or final coats. It shall be applied by steel trowel and result in a
smooth and even finish. For wet rooms use only fillers which are recommended by the
manufacturer for this purpose (e.g. acrylic based fillers).
Apply two coats of paint indicated. Follow strictly manufacturer's guidelines for application
method, standard film thickness, coating intervals etc. Use same application method as has
been used for the samples and approved by the Engineer.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 03
Painting of Steel
3 03 03 01
Primed Steel
ODAC
Steel which has previously been primed, e.g. shop primed, shall be thoroughly checked for
any defects. Surface preparation shall include degreasing and removal of contaminants.
Damaged and rusted areas shall be sanded off and re-primed with the same primer used in
first place.
Apply intermediate and final coat of paint indicated. Make sure that these coats are
compatible with the primer applied previously. Use application method which best fits the
purpose and the requirements of the final finish, and make sure that it is also recommended
by the manufacturer.
3 03 03 02
Galvanized Steel
3 03 03 02 01
Spray-painting
Carry out surface preparation as recommended by manufacturer of primer. Apply one coat of
primer recommended by the manufacturer for galvanized surfaces. Apply intermediate and
final coat of paint indicated. Make sure that these coats are compatible with the primer.
Spray- painting, airless or air-spray, are the preferred application methods for steel, unless
the actual circumstances do not allow using these methods.
3 03 03 02 02
Powder-Organic Coating
Powder organic coating of galvanized steel shall be shop-applied and meet the requirements
of BS 6497 or an equivalent Standard.
3 03 03 03
Untreated Steel
3 03 03 03 01
Cleaning
The most important measure for reaching a long service life for painting on steel is cleaning.
ISO 8501 defines several preparation grades of un-coated steel.
Clean steel substrates to a cleaning degree as indicated, based upon the methods and
consequent results designated in ISO 8501.
Where appropriate, ensure that manufacturers recommended surface profile is achieved.
3 03 03 03 02
Painting
Apply painting system of one manufacturer consisting of a primer and two finishing coats of
type and quality indicated.
3 03 04
Painting of Aluminium
Aluminium building components like windows, doors etc. shall generally be delivered to site
with the final paint finish. They shall therefore be handled carefully to avoid any damage. Any
repair by patch painting on site has to be approved by the Engineer.
3 03 04 01
Spray-Painting
Painting of aluminium shall generally be shop-applied, by either airless- or air-spraying
method with type of painting system indicated, and meet the requirements of BS 4842 or an
3 03 04 02
Powder-Organic Coating
Powder organic coating of aluminium shall be shop-applied and meet the requirements of BS
3 03 05
Painting of Architectural Woodwork

Alkyd varnish should be used only internally. External applied painting should give the wood
a minimum ultra-violet protection that means certain opacity should be reached.
Any architectural woodwork shall not be delivered to site before a priming coat of indicated
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
type has been applied, or if not, as recommended by the manufacturer of the indicated
painting system.
01.0
Alkyd gloss paint system shall be applied in two coats; preferably

sprayed. The dried paint shall be highly vapour permeable if used on
external surfaces.
- one alkyd undercoat as specified in Part 2 of this Section
- one alkyd finish coat of indicated gloss and colour
02.0
Alkyd varnish shall be applied in two coats on the primed substrate,

preferably sprayed unless the circumstances do not allow it.
03.0
Joinery wood stain of indicated type and colour shall be applied in two
coats on the primed substrate. Transparent wood stain shall not be used
on external surfaces.
3 03 06
Special Applications
3 03 06 01
Aluminium Paint
Aluminium paint shall be applied on the appropriately primed surface, depending on the type
of substrate to be painted and the recommendations of the paints manufacturer. For steel
substrates follow the requirements under Painting of Steel, unless otherwise indicated.
Apply two coats of specified paint by brush, roller or spray. Do not dilute the paint more than
5 % by volume for spray application.
3 03 06 02
Bituminous Paint
3 03 06 02 01
Cementitious Substrate
3 03 06 02 02
3 03 06 03
01.0
Clean surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, mould release agents, and any other
contamination. Avoid washing these substrates surfaces must be
thoroughly dry before application of paint.
02.0
Apply one thinned coat of the unfilled bituminous paint indicated as

primer.
03.0
Apply two coats of bituminous paint indicated.
Steel Substrate
01.0
Previously primed steel shall be cleaned of dust, dirt and grease.
02.0
For untreated steel follow the specifications under Painting of Steel,

clean to the indicated level and apply a primer of indicated type.
03.0
Apply two coats of bituminous paint indicated
Road Marking
Areas of application shall be cleaned thoroughly to be free from oil, grease and dirt. Apply
road-marking paint of indicated colour. Follow manufacturers guidelines for application
procedure and make sure that the recommended dry-film thickness is met.

For cleaning of painted surfaces use only water with mild detergents and rinse thoroughly.
Do not wash areas coated with flat emulsion paints. Follow manufacturers instructions.
Remove debris from site upon completion.
3 06 Demonstration
3 07 Protection
Protect completed work from dust, dirt and damage as appropriate until handing over.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 08 Schedules
Contractor shall provide schedules of his works, co-ordinated with other trades, prior to
commencing with painting.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
Where work on walls and ceilings is measured by area no deductions will be made for voids
<2,0 m2.
Decorative trim work (e.g. mouldings, cornices etc.) will be measured over and additionally
measured separately.
Frames, beams etc. within areas of walls and ceilings, which are painted with a different
paint system and/or colour, will be measured over up to 30 cm single width and additionally
measured separately
.
2
Reveals of voids > 2,0 m will be measured separately.

The rear sides of recesses will be measured additionally, whatever size they are.
Doors measured by m2 will be measured both sides.
Window grilles, rolling shutters (grilles), railing with mainly vertical rods, grits, fences will be
measured one side only.
Surfaces of profiles, corrugated sheets etc. will be accounted according to manufacturers
tables, or the overall surface will be measured in case such tables do not exist.
Where work on floors is measured by area, no deductions for voids <1,0 m2.
2
Painting on walls, ceilings and floors will be measured by m , separate for different
substrates and paint systems.
Reveals of openings > 2,0 m2 will be measured by m2.
Doors will be either measured by m2, or enumerated for different sizes and paint systems.
Door frames will be measured by m2 with the girth of the surface, or enumerated for each
type, size and painting system.
Window grilles, rolling shutters (grilles), railing with mainly vertical rods, grits, fences will be
measured by m2.
Surfaces of profiles, corrugated sheets etc. will be measured by m2.
Railings construct out of pipes will be measured by m length separate for different diameters.
Stair stringers will be measured by m length separate for different sizes
Road marking will be measured by m length, separate for different width and colour.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples, co-ordinating work with
other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting of
finished work.
Unit rate for painting shall include primer, intermediate and finish coats.

The following ancillary works shall be included in the unit rate and will not be measured
separately:
Any preparation and cleaning of substrates prior to commence with painting, including
cleaning of untreated steel.
Internal and external work
Work of any girth
Work at any height above floor level
Preparatory work, including preparing existing decorated surfaces
Method of application
Rubbing down between coats
Work required to be carried out before fixing, whether on or off site
Priming backs of frames, edges of rebates and beads and bottoms of doors
Work in multi-colours, defined as the application of more than one colour on an individual
surface or in one room
Gloss, semi-gloss, eggshell or flat finish
Extra girth of edges, mouldings, panels, sinkings, corrugations, flutings, carvings,
enrichments and the like
Panes of any size in work to glazed surfaces
Work to edges of opening lights and surrounding frame caused by opening lights, cutting in
next to glass, work on beads, hinges and fastenings in work to glazed surfaces
Work on hinges and fastenings to doors, frames and linings in work to general surfaces
Removing ironmongery from surfaces to be decorated and refixing
Masking adjacent surfaces.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

7 01 Paint Classification
Physically
Chemical
oxidative
e.g. emulsion paints

solvent
paints
Chemically
e.g. epoxy
sensitive to
solvents in
general incl.
their own
solvent;
yet emulsion
paints cannot
be dissolved
by water after
drying oils take

up oxygen and
by that change
their chemical
generally
consisting of
7 02 ISO 8501 Cleaning Designations

Sa 3
Blast-cleaning to visually clean steel

When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible
oil, grease and dirt, and shall be free from mill scale, rust, paint coatings
and foreign matter. It shall have uniform metallic colour.
Sa 2
Very thorough blast-cleaning

oil, grease and dirt, and from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign
matter. Any remaining traces of contamination shall show only as slight
stains in the form of spots or stripes.
Sa 2
Thorough blast-cleaning
oil, grease and dirt, and from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign
matter. Any residual contamination shall be firmly adhering (see note 2).
Sa 1
Thorough blast-cleaning
oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint
coatings and foreign matter (see note 2).
St 3
Very thorough hand and power tool cleaning

As for St 2, but the surface shall be treated much more thoroughly to
give a metallic sheen arising from the metallic substrate.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
St 2
ODAC
Thorough hand and power tool cleaning

When viewed without magnification, the surfaces shall be free from
visible oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint
coatings and foreign matter (see note 1).
St 1
Not quite suitable for painting.

Notes:
1.
The term foreign matter may conclude water-soluble salts and welding
residues. These contaminants cannot always be completely removed
from the surface by dry blast-cleaning, hand and power tool or flame
cleaning; wet blast-cleaning or hydro-jetting may be necessary.
2.
Mill scale, rust or paint is considered to be poorly adhering if it can be

removed by lifting with a blunt putty knife.
17
09910 PAINTING & DECORATION
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 09910 PAINTING & DECORATION
PAGE
1.
GENERAL .................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.
PRODUCTS ................................................................................................. 7
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3.
SCOPE ................................................................................................. 2
REFERENCES ........................................................................................ 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................ 5
SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................... 5
PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORING .................................................... 6
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ............................................................... 6
SAFETY AND HEALTH ............................................................................. 7
GENERAL.............................................................................................. 7
EXTERIOR PAINT ................................................................................... 7
INTERIOR PAINT .................................................................................... 7
PUTTY .................................................................................................. 8
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................. 8
PAINT SCHEDULES ................................................................................ 8
EXECUTION ................................................................................................. 9
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
PROTECTION OF AREAS NOT TO BE PAINTED........................................... 9

SURFACE PREPARATION ........................................................................ 9
MIXING AND THINNING ......................................................................... 11
APPLICATION ...................................................................................... 12
SCAFFOLDING ..................................................................................... 14
PROTECTION....................................................................................... 14
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
SECTION 09910 PAINTING & DECORATION

1.
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
The specifications cover paint work to exposed concrete and
rendered surfaces, wood work and metal in accordance with the
Finish Schedule, Drawings, and as directed by the Engineer.
All painting, works shall be applied by skilled workmen experienced
in this work.
The extent for painting work is shown in the drawings and schedule
and is as specified herewith.
The work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior
exposed items and faces throughout the entire project, except as
specified herewith.
The surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in
addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other
Sections, except as otherwise specified
Paint all exposed surfaces, whether or not colors are designated in
""schedules", except where the natural finish of the material is
obviously intended and specifically noted as a surface not to be
painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned paint
these the same as adjacent signaler materials or areas. If colour or
finish is not designated, the Engineer will select these from standard
colors available for the materials systems as specified.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified all new surfaces to be
painted shall receive not less than one shop, or one site prime coat
and two finishing coats of an appropriate paint.
1.2
References
Federal Specifications (FS)
FS P-W- 155
(Rev C; Int Am 1) wax, floor, water- Emulsion
FS TT-C-535
(Rev B; Am 2) coating, Epoxy, Two

component, for Interior use on metal, wood
wallboard, painted surfaces concrete and
masonry.
FS TT-C-542
(Rev E) coating,
moisture curing.
FS TT-C-555
(Rev B; Am 1) coating, Textured (for Interior

and Exterior Masonry surfaces).
FS TT-E-487
(Rev E; Am 1) Enamel : Floor and Deck..
polyurethane,
oil-free,
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
FS TT-E-489
(Rev H) Enamel, alkyd, gloss low voc

content.
FS TT-E-496
(Rev B; Am 3) Enamel : Heat Resisting

(400 degrees F), Black.
FS TT-E-505
(Rev B) Enamel (odorless, alkyd, interior,

semigloss.
FS TT-E-506
(Rev K; Am 1) Enamel, alkyd, gloss, Tints

and white (for interior use).
FS TT-E-508
(Rev C; Am 1) Enamel, interior semigloss,

tints and white.
FS TT-E-509
(Rev C) Enamel, odorless, alkyd, interior,

semigloss, white and tints.
FS TT-E-545
(Rev C) primer (Enamel-Undercoat, alkyd,

odorless, interior, flat, tints and tints and
white)
FS TT-F-1098
(Rev D) Filler, block, solvent-thinned, for

porous surfaces (concrete block, cinder
block, stucco, etc)
FS TT-P-19
(Rev D; Am 1) paint, latex (acrylic emulsion,

exterior wood and masonry).
FS TT-P-24
(Rev E) paint, oil (exterior concrete and

masonry)
FS TT-P-28
(Rev g) paint, aluminum, heat resisting (1200

degrees F)
FS TT-P-29
(Rev K) paint, latex.
FS TT-P-30
(Rev E; Am 1) Paint, Alkyd, Odorless,

Interior, Flat, White and Tints.
FS TT-P-31
(Rev D) Paint, Oil: Iron-Oxide, Ready-Mixed,

Red and Brown.
FS TT-P-37
(Rev D; Am 4 Reinstatement Notice) Paint,

Alkyd Resin: Exterior Trim, Deep colors.
FS TT-P-38
(Rev E) Paint, Aluminum (Ready-Mixed)
FS TT-P-91
(Rev D; Am 2) Paint, Rubber-Base, for

Interior Use (Concrete and Masonry Floors)
FS TT-P-95
(Rev C; Am 1) Paint, Rubber: for Swimming

Pools and other Concrete and Masonry
Surfaces.
FS TT-P-102
(Rev F) Paint, Oil, (Alkyd) Modified, Exterior,

Low VOC)
FS TT-P-645
(Rev B) Primer, Paint, Zinc-Molybdate, Alkyd

Type.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
FS TT-P-650
(Rev D) Primer Coating, Latex Base, Interior,

White (for Gypsum Wallboard, or Plaster)
FS TT-P-1510
(Rev A; Am 1) Paint, Latex, Exterior, for

Wood Surfaces, White and Tints.
FS TT-P-1511
(Rev B) Paint, Latex (Gloss and Semigloss,

Tints and White) (for Interior Use)
FS TT-P-001984
(Basic) Primer Coating, Latex Base, Exterior,

(Undercoat for Wood), White and Tints.
FS TT-P-002119
(Basic) Paint, Latex Base, High Traffic Area,

Flat and Eggshell Finish (Low Lustre), For
Interior Use)
FS TT-S-176
(Rev E; Am 1) Sealer, Surfaces, Varnish

Type, Floor Wood or Cork.
FS TT-S-708
(Rev A; Am 2) Stain, Oil; Semi-Transparent,

Wood, Exterior.
FS TT-S-711
(Rev C) Stain, Oil type, Wood, Interior.
FS TT-S-001992
(Basic) Stain, Latex, Exterior for Wood

Surfaces.
FS TT-V-51
(Rev F) Varnish: Asphalt
FS TT-V-85
(Rev C; Int Am 2 Varnish, Oil, Low Sheen,

Brush or spray Application.
FS TT-V-86
(Rev C; Am 1) Varnish: Oil, Rubbing (for

Metal and Wood Furniture)
FS TT-V-109
(Rev C) Varnish, Interior, Alkyd-Resin
FS TT-V-119
(Rev D; Am 2) Varnish, Spar, Phenolic-Resin
FS TT-V-121
(Rev H) Varnish, Spar, Water-Resisting

Military Specifications (MS)
MS MIL-C-83286
(Rev B; AM 2, Notice 1) Coating, Urethane,

Aliphatic
Isocyanate,
for
Aerospace
Applications
MS MIL-P-24441/GEN (Rev B; AM 1, Supple 1) Paint, EpoxyPolyamide

MS MIL-P-26915
(Rev C) Primer Coating,

Pigmented, for Steel Surfaces
Zinc
Dust
MS MIL-P-28577
(Rev B) Primer, Water Reducible, Corrosion

Resistant, for Metal Surfaces.
MS MIL-P-28578
(Rev B) Paint, Water Reducible, Semi-Gloss

Exterior and Interior.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1.3
ODAC
MS MIL-P-28582
(Basic; Notice 1) Primer Coating, Exterior,

Lead Pigment-Free (Undercoat for Wood,
Ready Mixed, White and Tints)
MS MIL-S-12935
(Rev D) Sealer, Surface; for Knots.
Quality Assurance
1.3.1 Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing
quality paints and finish products with three (3) years
experience.
1.3.2 Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and
finishing with three (3) years documented experienced and
accepted by product manufacturer.
1.3.3 Arrange with the paint manufacturers representative to visit
the site prior to the commencement of the painting operation
to discuss the painting and finishing procedures to be used
and to analyze the surface conditions in order that alternative
recommendations may be made to the Engineer, should
adverse conditions exist.
1.3.4 Arrange with the paint manufacturer to visit the site at intervals
during the surface preparation and painting operations to
insure that the proper surface preparation has been
completed, the specified paint products are being used, the
proper number of coats are being applied and the agreed
finishing procedures are being used, and that the paint
manufacturer regularly submits written reports to the Engineer.
1.3.5 Apply samples of finishes in the testing area in the presence of
the Engineer, Contractor and paint manufacturer. Apply the
samples with the correct material, number of coats, colour,
texture and degree of gloss required. Refinish if required, until
acceptance of the Engineer is obtained.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1 Mixing and thinning;
Manufacturers current printed product description, material safety
data sheets and technical data sheets for each coating system.
Detailed mixing, thinning and application instructions, minimum and
maximum application temperature, and curing and drying times
between coats for epoxy, moisture curing polyurethane, and liquid
glaze coatings. Detailed application instructions for textured coatings
shall be provided.
1.4.2 Certificates
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Certificate stating that paints for interior use contain no mercurial

mildewcide or insecticide. Certificate stating that paints proposed for
use contain not more than 0.06 percent lead.
1.4.3 Samples
i)
Moisture-curing polyurethane
A complete moisture-curing polyurethane system applied to a
panel of the same material as that on which the coating will be
applied in the work and for each color specified. The sample
panels will be used for quality control in applying the system.
ii)
Paint
While the material is at the site or source of supply, and at a
time agreeable to the contractor and the Engineer, a I liter
sample of each color and batch except for quantities of 200
liters or less, shall be taken by random selection from the
sealed containers. The contents of the containers to be
sampled shall be thoroughly mixed to ensure that the sample is
representative. Samples shall be identified by designated name,
specification number, manufacturer name and address, batch
number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity
involved.
1.5
Packaging, Labeling, and Storing

Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the designated
name, formula or specification number, batch number, color,
quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturers formulation number,
manufacturers directions including any warnings and special
precautions, and name of manufacturer. Pigmented paints and shall
be furnished in containers not larger than 20 liters Paints and thinner
shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturers written
directions and as a minimum stored off the ground, under cover, with
sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors and
at temperatures between 4 and 35 degrees C. Paints shall be stored
on the project site or segregated at the source of supply sufficiently in
advance of need to allow 30 days for testing.
1.6
Environmental Conditions
Unless otherwise recommended by the paint manufacturer, the
ambient temperature shall be between 7 and 35 degrees C when
applying coatings other than water-thinned, epoxy, and moisturecuring polyurethane coatings. Water-thinned coatings shall be
applied only when ambient temperature is between 10 and 32
degrees C. Epoxy, and moisture-curing polyurethane coatings shall
be applied only within the minimum and maximum temperatures
recommended by the coating manufacturer. Moisture-curing
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
polyurethane shall not be applied when the relative humidity is below

30%.
1.7
Safety and Health

Work shall comply with applicable local laws and regulations.
1.7.1 Worker Exposures
Exposure of workers to chemical substances shall not exceed limits
as required by applicable regulation.
1.7.2 Toxic Compound
Toxic compounds having ineffective physiological properties, such as
odor or irritation levels, shall not be used unless approved by the
Engineer.
1.7.3 Coordination
Work shall be coordinated to minimize exposure of building
occupants, other Contractor personnel, and visitors to mists and
odors from preparation, painting and clean-up operations.
2.
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
Paint includes vinyl, emulsions, enamels, paints, stains, varnishes,
sealers, cement-emulsion filler, and other coatings, whether used as
prime, intermediate, or finish coat.
2.2
Exterior Paint
Vinyl emulsion based rough textured finish impregnated with quartz
and aggregates for exterior facades providing a tough, highly durable
long lasting weather resistant finish, giving a special scratch effect
and fast drying finish with no disagreeable odor. Paint can be applied
directly to fair-faced concrete, cement plasters, masonry surfaces.
Porous surfaces shall be sealed by primer before painting.
2.3
Interior Paint
-
Acrelic paint with a durable high quality smooth matt finish,

washable water and mild detergents. Paint can be applied on
interior dry walls, plaster and concrete surfaces. Porous
surfaces shall be sealed by primer before painting.
Oil paint and finish materials to be of highest grade, first line
quality of the manufacturer.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2.4
ODAC
Putty
Already to use Acrelic and oil based putty for filling holes and cracks
and for making surfaces even on interior and exterior drywalls,
plaster, concrete and wooden surfaces.
2.5
Additional Requirements
i) Colors and Tints
Colors shall be as selected from manufacturers standard colors,
as indicated. Manufacturers standard color is for identification of
color only. Tinting of epoxy, and urethane paints shall be done by
the manufacturer. Stains shall conform in shade to manufacturers
standard color. The color of the undercoats shall vary slightly from
the color of the next coat.
ii) Lead
Paints containing lead in excess of 0.06 percent by weight of the
total nonvolatile content shall not be used.
iii) Chromium
Paints containing zinc chromate or strontium chromate pigments
shall not be used.
2.6
Paint Schedules
The following painting schedules identify the surfaces to be painted
and prescribe the paint to be used and the number of coats of paint
to be applied.
2.6.1 Exterior Paint Schedule
i)
Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry

Vinyl base paint: Two coats over primer.
ii) Metal
Flat, Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over rust-inhibitive primer.
Semi gloss Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over rust inhibitive
primer.
iii) Zinc-Coated Metal
Gloss/Semi gloss Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over galvanized
metal primer.
2.6.2 Interior Paint Schedule
i)
Concrete Masonry units, Gypsum board, plaster;

8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Acrelic paint, emulsion (non hughable) and all paint shall be

antistatic.
ii) Concrete and screed.
-
Epoxy paint: Two coats over primer.
iii) Metal
Full Gloss, Alkyed Enamel: Two coats over coater and primer.
iv) Zinc Coated Metal
Semi gloss, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer.
3.
EXECUTION
3.1
Protection of Areas not to be painted

Items not to be painted which are in contact with or adjacent to
painted surfaces shall be removed or protected prior to surface
preparation and painting operations. Items removed prior to painting
shall be replaced when painting is completed. Following completion
of painting, workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall
removed items. Surfaces contaminated by coating materials shall be
restored to original condition.
3.2
Surface Preparation
Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of foreign matter
before application of paint or surface treatments. Oil and grease shall
be removed with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to
mechanical cleaning. Cleaning solvents shall be of low toxicity with a
flashpoint in excess of 38 degrees C. Cleaning shall be programmed
so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted
surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact
with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be spotprimed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of
preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for
the adjacent areas.
3.2.1 Concrete, Stucco and Masonry Surfaces
Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to dry at
least 30 days before painting, except concrete slab on grade which
shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting. Glaze,
efflorescence, laitance, dirt, grease, oil, asphalt, surface deposits of
free iron and other foreign matter shall be removed prior to painting.
Surfaces to receive polyurethane, chlorinated rubber or epoxy
coatings shall be acid-etched or mechanically abraded as specified
by the coating manufacturer, rinsed with water, allowed to dry, and
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
treated with the manufacturers recommended conditioner prior to

application of the first coat.
3.2.2 Metal Surfaces
Ferrous surfaces including those that have been shop-coated, shall
be solvent-cleaned. Surfaces that contain loose rust, loose mill scale,
and other foreign substances shall be cleaned mechanically with
hand tools according to SSPC SP 2, power tools according to SSPC
SP 3 or by sandblasting according to SSPC SP 7. Shop-coated Metal
surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by treating and touching
up corroded areas immediately upon detection.
3.2.3 Nonmetallic Surfaces
Galvanized, aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead copper, and other
nonferrous metal surfaces shall be solvent-cleaned in accordance
with SSPC SP 1.
3.2.4 Gypsum Board Surfaces
Gypsum board surfaces shall be dry and shall have all loose dirt and
dust removed by brushing with a soft brush, rubbing with a cloth, or
vacuum-cleaning prior to application of the first-coat material. A
damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water-based.
3.2.5 Mastic-Type Surfaces
Mastic-type surface shall be prepared by removing foreign material.
3.2.6 Plaster Surfaces
Plaster shall age at least 30 days before painting. Plaster shall be
clean and free from loose matter and shall have an instrumentmeasured moisture content not exceeding 8 percent.
3.2.7 Wood Surfaces
Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter. Wood surfaces
adjacent to surfaces to receive water-thinned paints shall be primed
and/or touched up before applying water-thinned paints. Small, dry
seasoned knots shall be scraped, cleaned, and given a thin coat of
knot sealer, before application of the priming coat. Pitch on large,
open, unseasoned knots and all other beads or streaks of pitch shall
be scraped off, or, if it is still soft, removed with mineral spirits or
turpentine, and the resinous area shall be thinly coated with knot
sealer. Finishing nails shall be set, and all holes and surface
imperfection shall be primed. After priming, holes and imperfections
in finish surfaces shall be filled with putty or plastic wood filler,
colored to match the finish coat if natural finish is required, allowed to
dry and sanded smooth. Putty or wood filler shall be compatible with
subsequent coatings. Interior wood surfaces to receive stain shall be
sanded. Oak and other open-grain wood to receive stain shall be
given a coat of wood filler not less than 8 hours before the application
of stain; excess filler shall be removed and the surface sanded
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
smooth. Floors of oak or similar open-grain wood shall be filled with

wood filler recommended by the finish manufacturer and the excess
filler removed. Moisture content of the wood shall not exceed 12
percent as measured by a moisture meter, unless otherwise
authorized.
3.2.8 Previously Painted Surfaces
Previously painted surfaces damaged during construction shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter.
Blistering, cracking, flaking and peeling or other deteriorated coatings
shall be removed. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Damaged area
such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips, and spalls shall
be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged
areas. Edges of chipped paint shall be feather edged and sanded
smooth. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC
requirements. Solvent, mechanical, or chemical cleaning methods
shall be sued to provide surfaces suitable for painting. New,
proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings. If
existing surfaces are glossy, the gloss shall be reduced.
3.3
Mixing and Thinning

When thinning is approved as necessary to suit surface,
temperature, weather conditions, or application methods, paints may
be thinned in accordance with the manufacturers directions. When
thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to
application with not more than 0.5 liter of suitable thinner per liter.
The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining
complete hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall
not cause the paint to exceed local limits on volatile organic
compounds. Paints of different manufacturers shall not be mixed.
3.3.1 Cement-Emulsion Filler coat
Cement and aggregate shall be dry-mixed so that uniform distribution
and intermixing are obtained. Mixing liquid and one-half of the total
amount of water shall be premixed and added gradually to the white
Portland cement and aggregate with constant stirring until a thick,
smooth material is obtained. Emulsion paint shall then be added to
the mixture and stirred until uniformity is obtained. The blend shall
have a thick, creamy consistency. The remainder of the water shall
be added if necessary to obtain a material with adequate application
properties. Blending resin emulsion or emulsion paint with any other
component shall be done with caution; too rapid an agitation will
cause air entrapment and foaming.
3.3.2 Two-Component Systems
Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with
manufacturers instructions. Any thinning of the first coat to ensure
proper penetration and sealing shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for each type of substrate.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3.4
ODAC
Application
Painting practices shall comply with applicable state and local laws
enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards.
Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint
manufacturer, paint may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. At the
time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration. Uniform
suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application. Each
coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness
and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other voids,
laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. Hiding
shall be complete. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of
a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be
coated. Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to
that of adjacent painted surfaces. Paints, except water-thinned types,
shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of moisture
as determined by sight or touch.
3.4.1 Ventilation
Affected areas shall be ventilated during paint application so that
workers exposure to chemical substances shall not exceed limits ofapplicable regulation. Interior work zones having a volume of 280
cubic meters or less shall be ventilated at a minimum of 2 air
exchanges per hour. Ventilation in larger work zones shall be
maintained by means of mechanical exhaust. Solvent vapors shall be
exhausted outdoors, away from air intakes and workers. Return air
inlets in the work zone shall be temporarily sealed before start of
work until the coatings have dried.
3.4.2 Respirators
Operators and personnel in the vicinity of operating paint sprayers
shall wear respirators.
3.4.3 First Coat
The first coat on plaster, gypsum wallboard, and other surfaces shall
include repeated touching up of suction spots or overall application of
primer or sealer to produce uniform color and gloss. Excess sealer
shall be wiped off after each application. The first coat on both faces
of wood doors shall be applied at essentially the same time. Glazed
doors and sashes shall be given the specified coating system within
3 weeks of the time they are glazed, but not before the glazing
material has set. Each varnish coat shall be sanded lightly prior to
application of subsequent coats.
3.4.4 Timing
Surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, and otherwise
prepared for painting shall be given a coat of the specified first coat
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
as soon as practical after such pretreatment has been completed, but

prior to any deterioration of the prepared surface. Sufficient time shall
elapse between successive coats to permit proper drying. This period
shall be modified as necessary to suit weather conditions. Oil-based
or oleoresinous solvent-type paints shall be considered dry for
recoating when the paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate pressure of the thumb, and the application of
another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose
adhesion. Manufacturers instructions for application, curing and
drying time between coats of two-component systems shall be
followed.
3.4.5 Stains
On smooth exterior wood surfaces such as the planed face of bevel
siding, the stain shall be applied at a spreading rate of 9.8 to 12.3
square meters per liter. On rough surfaces such as an un-planed or
scarred face of bevel siding, the stain shall be spread at the rate of
4.9 to 6.1 square meters per liter or as recommended by the
manufacturer. Oil-type stain shall be applied by brushing with the
grain for the full length of the board or course of siding.
3.4.6 Fillers
Concrete and masonry surface voids shall be filled; however, surface
irregularities need not be completely filled. The dried filler shall be
uniform and free of pinholes. Filler shall not be applied over caulking
compound.
i)
Cement-Emulsion Filler
Immediately before filler application, surfaces shall be dampened
uniformly and thoroughly, with no free surface water visible, by
several applications of potable water with a fog spray, allowing
time between the sprayings for water to be absorbed. Cementemulsion filler shall be scrubbed into the surface vigorously with
a stiff-bristled brush having tampico or palmyra bristles not longer
than 63mm. At least 24 hours shall elapse before applying
exterior emulsion paint over cement-emulsion filler. When he
ambient temperature is over 29 degrees C, cement-emulsion
filler surfaces shall be dampened lightly with a fog spray of
potable water immediately prior to application of the subsequent
paint coat.
ii) Solvent-Thinned Filler

Solvent-thinned filler, FS TT-F-1098, shall be applied to dry
surfaces only and may be applied by brush or roller. Filler shall
be allowed to set for 3 to 5 minutes or until the filler becomes
tacky, and the excess material shall then be removed with a
rubber squeegee. Surface voids shall be filled; however, surface
irregularities need not be completely filled. Surfaces to which
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
solvent-thinned filler has been applied shall be given the

specified topcoat as soon as practical but before the filler
material starts to discolor or chalk.
iii) Latex Filler
Latex filler, shall be applied according to the manufacturers
instructions. Surface voids shall be filled and the filler allowed to
dry the length of time specified by the manufacturer prior to
applying successive coats of paint.
3.4.7 Textured Coating
Application of textured coating, FS TT-C-555, shall be as specified in
the manufactures printed directions at a rate of 1.1 to 1.3 square
meters per liter in one coat.
3.4.8 Ferrous-Metal Primer
Primer for ferrous-metal shall be applied to ferrous surfaces to
receive paint other than asphalt varnish prior to deterioration of the
prepared surface. The semitransparent film applied to some pipes
and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat, but shall be
over-coated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior to
application of finish coats.
3.5
Scaffolding
All scaffolds, staging and rigging required for work shall comply with
all applicable laws and codes, as further specified in the Contract
Documents.
3.6
Protection
Furnish and lay suitable plastic sheets and canvas cloths, in all areas
where painting is executed to protect floors and all other surfaces
from damage during the work.
lighting
Ironmongery applied to doors. Cabinets, etc. accessories, plates,

fixtures.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09950 Wall coverings
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and materials, and
performing all operations in connection with providing and hanging of wall coverings.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
Wallpaper
02.0
Textile wall coverings
03.0
Wall vinyl and plastic wall coverings
Related Sections
09200
09250
09680
Lath and Plaster

Gypsum Board
Carpet
1 02
References
1 02 01
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)
1 02 01 05
ASTM E 84: 01
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials
ASTM F 793:93
Standard Classification of Wall covering by Durability

Characteristics
ASTM F 1141:98
Standard Specification for Wall covering
European Standards
EN 235: 89
1 02 01 06
Wall coverings in Roll form Vocabulary and Symbols
British Standards
BS 1248: 90
Wall coverings in Roll Form

Part 1: Terms and Symbols
Part 2: Specification for finished Wall coverings
BS 1494-1: 64
Fixings for Sheet, Roof and Wall Coverings, Part 1
BS 8000-12: 89
Workmanship on Building Sites: Code of Practice for Decorative

Wall coverings and Painting
BS EN 233: 97
Wall coverings in Roll Form - Specification for Finished

Wallpapers, Wall Vinyls and Plastic Wall coverings
BS EN 234: 89
Wall coverings in Roll Form - Specification for Wall coverings for

subsequent Decoration
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 02
ODAC
BS EN 259: 87
Wall coverings in Roll Form - Specification for Heavy Duty Wall

Coverings
BS EN 266: 92
Wall coverings in Roll Form - Specification for Textile Wall

coverings
Codes
UBC 805: 97
1 03
Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
1 03 01 01
General Terms
Uniform Building Code: Interior Finishes
Base web: That part of a multi-layer wall covering intended to contact the support.
Finished wall covering: Wall covering that is not intended to be decorated after hanging.
Impact resistance: Ability of a heavy-duty wall covering to maintain its surface intact under the
effect of impacts. A wall covering may be claimed to be impact resistant if it satisfies the
impact resistance requirements of EN 259, the appropriate symbols to accompany such a
claim is serial 7.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Means of application: Method by which the wall covering is to be attached to the support
during hanging, i.e. the surface(s) to which a suitable adhesive has to be applied, or has
already been applied and requires activation. The appropriate symbols to indicate means
of application are serials 5.1 to 5.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Overlap and double cut: Method by which the edges of adjoining lengths of wall covering can
be made to butt together. The adjoining edges of adjacent lengths of wall covering are
overlapped on the support during application and both thickness are cut through in a
continuous movement with a sharp knife. The joint is opened and surplus wall covering
material removed before the adjoining edges are realigned. The appropriate symbols to
indicate advice to overlap and double cut is serial 7.1 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Spongeability: The property of a wall covering to wipe off the hanging adhesive whilst it is still
damp from the front face of the wall covering with a damp cloth or sponge without causing
visible damage. Accordingly the wall covering when tested in accordance with EN 233
annex C shall exhibit no damage or change, in comparison with the reference piece, that
would detract from its appearance as a wall covering on a wall. The symbol to be used to
indicate this degree of spongeability is shown as serial 1.1 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Support: Surface to which the wall covering is applied, e.g. wall or ceiling. This is indicated by a
thick solid line in appropriate symbols (see table 1 Annex 6 01 01).
Wall covering: All forms of flexible webs supplied in strips in roll form for hanging onto walls or
ceilings by means of an adhesive covering the whole of the interface between the wall
covering and the support. Tapestries and other similar wall hangings are excluded.
Wall covering for subsequent decoration: Wall covering intended for decoration after
hanging, for example, by the application of paint. They are normally relief or ingrain wall
coverings. These wall coverings do not, in general, have as good a washability and colour
fastness to light before their subsequent decoration as have finished wall coverings.
Wall lining: Wall covering intended to serve as a preparatory layer on the support prior to the
application of a finished wall covering or a wall covering for subsequent decoration.
Washability: A wall covering is claimed to be washable during its life after hanging, according
to its grade of washability, it shall be termed washable, extra-washable or scrubbable.
Accordingly the wall covering when tested in accordance with EN 233 annex C shall exhibit
no visible damage or change, in comparison with the reference piece, that would detract
from its appearance as a wall covering on a wall. The symbol to be used to indicate this
degree of washability is shown as serial 2.1 to 2.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 03 01 02
ODAC
Terminology
Generic types of wall covering

Wallpaper: Finished wall covering made of paper, the front face of which is decorated.
Vinyl wall covering on paper: Finished wall covering comprising a paper base web with a
layer of material based on polyvinyl chloride or another polymer on its front surface. The front of
the web or its vinyl coating is decorated. The coating is of such thickness and strength that it
can be removed from its base web as a continuous self-supporting film.
Vinyl wall covering on textile or non-woven: Finished wall covering comprising a textile or
non-woven type base web with a layer of material based on polyvinyl chloride or another
polymer on its front surface. The front of the web or its vinyl coating is decorated. The
coating is of such thickness and strength that, if it could be removed from its base web, it
would form a continuous self-supporting film.
Plastic wall covering: Finished wall covering made entirely of plastics, the front face of which
is decorated.
Heavy-duty wall covering: Finished wall covering claimed to have high mechanical resistance
and cleanability. Normally these wall coverings are used in areas of heavy traffic or in
commercial premises.
Textile wall covering: Finished wall covering, the front face of which consists of natural or
synthetic fibrous or filament materials such as yarns, woven fabrics, knitted fabrics,
threads, ropes, braids, felts, etc. which may be attached to a base web. A textile wall
covering should have adequate strength such that it may be hung satisfactorily in
accordance with the instructions given by the supplier and using the recommended
adhesive.
Sub-Types of wall covering
Coated wallpaper: Wallpaper with a thin transparent coating based on polyvinyl acetate or a
similar plastics material applied over the top of the decoration; the coating having
insufficient thickness to be removable as a continuous self-supporting film.
Flocked wall covering: Finished wall covering the surface of which has been decorated by cut
textile fibres, bonded at one end to the surface by adhesive and standing more or less
perpendicular to the surface.
Ingrain wall covering: Wall covering consisting of paper structured by the incorporation of
wood particles for use as a base for a finished wall covering or for use as a wall covering
for subsequent decoration.
Metal foil wall covering: Finished wall covering in which a rolled film of metal is bonded to a
base web to give a decorative effect.
Metallized wall covering: Finished wall covering which metallized plastic film is bonded to a
base web to give a decorative effect.
Metallic effect wall covering: Finished wall covering with a coated or printed surface that
incorporates a metal powder or a powder giving a metallic effect in the coating or on the
surface.
Mural: Finished wall covering with a pictorial motif, which is non-repetitive. It may extend over
more than one width.
Prepasted wall covering: ready pasted wall covering: Wall covering that carries its own
factory-applied adhesive that normally has to be activated by water at the time of hanging. .
The appropriate symbol to indicate that a wall covering is prepasted is serial 5.3 of table 1
(see annex 6 01 01).
Relief wall covering: Wall covering with a pronounced three-dimensional design or structure
((raised and/or depressed) on the surface formed mechanically by the application of
pressure, with or without heat, or chemically in conjunction with a foaming process.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
01.0
Mechanically embossed: Finished relief wall covering on which the

three dimensional design or structure is mechanically formed by the
application of pressure, with or without heat.
02.0
Ink embossed wall covering: Finished relief wall covering, which has
been simultaneously printed and mechanically embossed.
03.0
Duplex embossed wall covering: Mechanically embossed relief wall

covering made from two webs, which have been laminated, with an
adhesive at the mechanical embossing stage. The appropriate symbol
to indicate a duplex embossed wall covering is serial 7.2.of table 1 (see
annex 6 01 01).
04.0
Blown vinyl, printed: Finished relief wall covering where the three
dimensional design or structure is made by foaming a layer and/or
deposit of polyvinyl chloride or other polymeric material.
05.0
Chemically embossed and/or textured wall covering: Finished relief

wall covering where the three-dimensional design or structure is made
by a chemical process of embossing a layer and/or deposit of polyvinyl
chloride or other polymeric material.
Textured wall covering: Finished wall covering where materials like grass, cork or granulates
of organic or inorganic material are fixed onto a base material.
Terms for Cleanability
Spongeable wall covering: Wall covering from which the hanging adhesive may be wiped off
the front face with a damp cloth or sponge at the time of hanging without causing visible
damage providing it is done whilst the adhesive is still damp. No subsequent washability is
claimed or implied. All wall covering may be claimed to be spongeable if it satisfies the
requirements of clause 5 of EN 233, the appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is
serial 1.1 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Washable wall covering: Finished wall covering from which dirt and some domestic water
based stains may be cleaned carefully from the front face with a damp cloth and soapy
water. Oils, fats and solvent-based stains are not expected to be removable. All wall
covering may be claimed to be washable if it satisfies the requirements of clause 6 of EN
233, the appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is serial 2.1 of table 1 (see Annex
6 01 01).
Extra-washable wall covering: Finished wall covering from which dirt and most domestic
water based stains may be cleaned from the front face with a wet cloth and soapy water.
Oils, fats and solvent-based stains are not expected to be removable, but some greasy
stains may be removed if action is taken immediately after contamination. All wall covering
may be claimed to be extra-washable if it satisfies the requirements of clause 6 of EN 233,
the appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is serial 2.2 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01
01).
Scrubbable wall covering: Finished wall covering of superior cleanability from which dirt and
most domestic water based stains may be cleaned from the front face with a sponge or soft
brush and a mild detergent or a mild abrasive. Oil, fats and certain solvent based stains
may also be removed if tackled immediately after contamination.. All wall covering may be
claimed to be scrubbable if it satisfies the requirements of clause 6 of EN 233, the
appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is serial 2.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Extra-scrubbable wall covering: Finished wall covering of superior cleanability from which dirt
and all domestic water based stains may be cleaned from the front face by intensive
treatment with a sponge or a soft brush and a mild detergent or a mild abrasive. Oil, fats
and certain solvent-based stains may also be removed if tackled immediately after
contamination. All wall covering may be claimed to be extra-scrubbable if it satisfies the
washability requirements of EN 259, the appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is
serial 2.4 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Terms for Match and pattern

Batch number; serial code: Code, alongside the pattern number, identifying products having
consistently the same texture, shade, gloss and visual appearance
Free match: A wall covering has free match when the pattern on the face is not intended to be
matched in any specific regard to matching. The appropriate symbol to indicate that a wall
covering has free match is serial 4.1 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Offset match: A wall covering has offset match when the pattern details are such that adjacent
lengths are intended to be hung with longitudinal displacement in order to give the correct
side join matching. The appropriate symbol to indicate that a wall covering has offset match
is serial 4.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01) with the dimensions of the design repeat, in cm,
and the distance offset, in cm, added after it.
Pattern number: Code uniquely identifying a specific design, effect and colour.
Repeat: Longitudinal distance between recurrent pattern details on the face of a wall covering.
Reverse alternate lengths: Method of hanging a wall covering whereby adjacent lengths are
reversed. The appropriate symbol to indicate that it is appropriate or necessary to reverse
alternate lengths is serial 4.4 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Shading: Checking, by visual inspection, that all rolls of the wall covering of the same shade
before hanging to ensure that there are no unacceptable variations in appearance.
Side Join: Relationship between portions of the design pattern on adjacent lengths of a wall
covering that have to be matched together when hung to create the overall pattern.
Straight match: A wall covering has straight match when the pattern details are such that
adjacent lengths are intended to be hung without any longitudinal displacement in order to
give the correct side join matching. The appropriate symbol to indicate that a wall covering
has straight match is serial 4.2 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01) with the dimensions of the
design repeat, in cm, added after it.
Terms for Removability

Strippable wall covering: Wall covering that may be removed manually in a dry state,
substantially in one piece, by pulling it away from the support on which it was hung. The
appropriate symbol to indicate that a wall covering is strippable is serial 6.1 of table 1 (see
Annex 6 01 01).
Peelable wall covering: Wall covering from which the decorative or protective surface may be
removed manually from its base web in a dry state substantially in one piece. The base
web remains on the support on which it was hung. The appropriate symbol to indicate that
a wall covering is strippable is serial 6.2 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Wet removable wall covering: wall covering that requires to be removed from the support on
which it was hung by soaking it with water or a proprietary stripping agent or by steaming it
and then scraping off the soaked material. The appropriate symbol to indicate that a wall
covering is strippable is serial 6.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Terms for Colour fastness to Light

Colour fastness to light: Ability of a wall covering to maintain its original shade or colour under
the effect of light.
Moderate colour fastness: Colour fastness to light of numerical rating 3 when this property is
determined by the method given in annex D of EN 233. The appropriate symbol to
accompany a claim of moderate colour fastness to light is serial 3.1 of table 1 (see Annex 6
01 01).
Satisfactory colour fastness: Colour fastness to light of numerical rating 4 when this property
is determined by the method given in annex D of EN 233. The appropriate symbol to
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
01 01).
Good colour fastness: Colour fastness to light of numerical rating 5 when this property is
01 01).
Very good colour fastness: Colour fastness to light of numerical rating 6 when this property is
01 01).
Excellent colour fastness: Colour fastness to light of numerical rating 7 when this property is
01 01).
1 05
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification according to
Section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
1 05 01 01
Finished wall coverings

accordance to EN 233: 89.
1 05 01 02
01.
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
Colour
Spongeability
Washability
Colour fastness to light
Pattern structure and pattern matching
Means of application
Method of removal
Wall coverings for subsequent decoration

01.
Commercial identification references
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
Colour
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
03.
1 05 01 03
Method of removal
Materials recommended for subsequent decoration
Heavy-duty wall coverings

1 05 01 04
01.
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
Colour
Impact resistance
Washability
Method of removal

1 05 01 05
01.
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
Colour
Method of removal
Wall vinyl and plastics wall coverings

01.
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 05 01 06
ODAC
Colour
Spongeability
Washability
Method of removal
Adhesive
Provide product data and Manufacturers instructions for each type of adhesive.
Give sufficient information in order the products can be used safely and without risk to health.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
Provide shop drawings when indicated including seaming layout.
1 05 03
Samples
Submit at least 3 samples for initial purposes illustrating colour, finish, and texture.
Provide panel of 5m2, full height, illustrating installed covering, joint seaming technique and locate
where directed.
1 05 04
Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor (see ref.: 1 06 01 02).

Reports and records of Contractors internal quality control.
Reports and records of Contractors external quality control
Certificates for all components indicated showing compliance with referenced standards and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturer
Products used in the work of this section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged
in manufacture of wall coverings and with a history of successful production acceptable to the
Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installer
methods needed for proper performance of work.
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least five (5)
years of documented experience.
1 06 02 01
Fire Behaviour
Conform to Uniform Building code 805 or other applicable code for flame and smoke ratings.
Test results shall be provided by an approved testing agency to show surface burning
characteristics and to show that materials when fastened in place become detached when
subjected to temperature of 149o Celsius for 25 minutes.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
When used as interior wall finish, textile wall coverings, including materials such as those having
a napped, tufted, looped, non-woven, woven or similar surface, shall have Class 1 flame spread
(in accordance to UBC 805) and shall be protected by automatic sprinklers.
Foam plastics shall not be used as interior finish.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Checking suppliers / manufacturers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform
to specification and referenced standards prior to application or installation.
Checking Suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification.

1 07 01

Deliver materials to site originally packed by Manufacturer in unopened containers. Protect
materials during delivery to comply with Manufacturers directions.
Unload and handle materials with care to avoid crushing, tearing or damage to packaging, and
denting or unsealing of containers.
Do not allow wall coverings to become dirty or wet.
Damaged materials shall be replaced at contractor's cost.
1 07 02

Store materials at building site strictly according to Manufacturers instructions.
Store products in a dry and ventilated place.
Store all materials so that they can readily be used in order of delivery and issued from store
before the expiry of any shelf period stated by the manufacturer.
Keep wall coverings out of direct sunlight.
Keep them in their boxes or wrappings until required for use.
Avoid Damage to the ends of rolls.

1 08 02
Environmental Requirements
Use ecologically desirable solvent free adhesives if type of wall covering and surface of the
support allow doing so.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the adhesive or vinyl covering product manufacturer.
Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during and after installation of adhesive and
covering.
The migration of some heavy metals, in mg / kg of wall covering, in accordance with Test A
specified in prEN 12149 shall not exceed the following values:
-
Antimony
20
Arsenic
Barium
500
Cadmium
25
Chromium
60
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Mercury
20
Lead
90
Selenium
163
The Limit for Antimony does not apply for fire-resistant coverings with a rating test report.
The vinyl chloride monomer content, in mg / kg of wall covering, in accordance with Test B
specified in prEN 12149 shall not exceed 0,2.
The Formaldehyde content, in mg / kg of wall covering, in accordance with test C specified in
prEN 12149 shall not exceed 120.
Provide 5 10% of total area to be covered as spare wall covering of each type, colour and
pattern specified where indicated in the B.o.Q.
Package and label each roll by manufacturer, colour and pattern, and destination room
number.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 2:
ODAC
Products
2 01 Finished Wall covering

2 01 01
2 01 01 01
2 01 01 02
Wallpaper for general use

01.
Provide colour from the Manufacturers standard colour range as

02.
Provide pattern and surface pattern from the Manufacturers standard

pattern range as selected by the Engineer.
03.
Provide wallpaper roll stock. The area of the roll shall be 5,326 m2
04.
The nominal width of the rolls shall be not less than 32,50 or 60 cm.
05.
Total thickness: Give Manufacturers data per mm.
06.
Total weight: Give Manufacturers data per g / m2.
07.
Spongeability at the time of hanging: Wallpaper shall satisfy the

appropriate cleanability requirement (designation character A) in
accordance with EN 233.
08.
The grade of washability shall be washable (designation character B) in

09.
The colourfastness to light shall be moderate with a numerical rating not

less than 3 (in accordance with EN 233).
10.
Fire-resistance shall be 25 (in accordance with UBC 805).
11.
The pattern of wallpaper shall be straight matched.
12.
The adhesive shall be applied to the support to be decorated.
13.
The wallpaper shall be hanged overlapped and double cut.
14.
The edges of adjoining lengths of wallpaper shall be made to be butt

together.
15.
The wallpaper shall be wet removable.
Adhesives
01.
Use paste or lining paper type recommended by manufacturer if applied

on plaster as substrate.
02.
Use paste type recommended by manufacturer if applied on exposed

concrete.
03.
Use paste or priming coat type recommended by manufacturer if

applied on gypsum board.
Termination trim
Use wooden, metal or extruded plastic battens, as selected by the Engineer.
2 01 01 03
Substrate filler
Use filler compatible with substrate as recommended by covering manufacturer.
2 01 01 04
Substrate primer and sealer
Alkyd enamel or primer to be recommended by Manufacturer shall be used.
2 01 02
Wall paper for subsequent decoration

01.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 02 01
2 01 02 02
ODAC
02.
The nominal width of the rolls shall be not less than 50 cm unless
otherwise indicated by the Engineer.
03.
04.
05.
06.
The pattern of wallpaper shall be free matched.
07.
08.
The wall paper shall be hanged overlapped and double cut.
09.

together.
10.
The wall paper shall be wet removable.
11.
The migration of some heavy metals, in mg / kg of wall covering, in

accordance with Test A specified in prEN 12149 shall not exceed the
following values:
-
Antimony
20
Arsenic
Barium
500
Cadmium
25
Chromium
60
Mercury
20
Lead
90
Selenium
163
12.
The vinyl chloride monomer content, in mg / kg of wall covering, in

accordance with Test B specified in prEN 12149 shall not exceed 0,2.
13.
The Formaldehyde content, in mg / kg of wall covering, in accordance

with test C specified in prEN 12149 shall not exceed 120.
Adhesives
01.

02.

concrete.
03.

Substrate filler
2 01 02 03
2 01 03
Heavy-duty wall coverings

01.

02.

12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
03.
Provide wallpaper roll stock. The area of the roll shall be declared.
Deviation from declared values shall be not more than
04.
The nominal width of the rolls shall be not less than 50 or 60 cm.
05.
06.
07.
The grade of washability shall be extra-scrubbable (designation

character E) in accordance with EN 259.
08.
The colourfastness to light shall be excellent with a numerical rating not

The impact resistance shall be not less than 1 J.
2 01 03 01
2 01 03 02
10.
11.
12.
13.
The adhesive shall be applied to the wall covering.
14.

together.
15.
The wallpaper shall be strippable.
Adhesives
01.

02.

concrete.
03.

Termination trim
2 01 03 03
Substrate filler
2 01 03 04
2 01 04

01.

02.

03.
Provide wallpaper roll stock. The area of the roll shall be declared with a
permitted deviation from the declared value not more than 3%.
04.
05.
06.
The colourfastness to light shall be very good with a numerical rating

not less than 6 (in accordance with EN 233).
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 04 01
2 01 04 02
ODAC
07.
Textile wall covering shall have Class 1 flame spread (in accordance
with UBC 805)
08.
09.
10.
11.

together.
12.
The wallpaper shall be strippable.
Adhesives
01.
Use paste, priming coat or hydraulically cured filler type recommended

by manufacturer if applied on plaster as substrate.
02.
Use paste or bonding coarse type recommended by manufacturer if

applied on exposed concrete.
03.

Termination trim
2 01 04 03
Substrate filler
2 01 04 04
2 01 05
Wall vinyl and plastic wall coverings

01.

02.

03.
Over-coating shall be stain resistant, polyvinyl fluoride over-coating,

0,01 mm thick.
04.
05.
The nominal width of the rolls shall be not less than 50 and not greater
than 53cm.
06.
07.
Vinyl finish weight: Give Manufacturers data per g / m2.
08.
Spongeability at the time of hanging: Wallpaper shall satisfy the

appropriate cleanability requirement (designation character A) in
09.
The grade of washability shall be extra washable (designation character

C) in accordance with EN 233.
10.
The colourfastness to light shall be good with a numerical rating not

11.
12.
The pattern of wallpaper shall be free matched.
13.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 05 01
2 01 05 02
ODAC
14.
The adhesive shall be applied to the wall covering.
15.

together.
16.
The wallpaper shall be peelable.
Adhesives
01.
Use priming coat or hydraulically cured filler type recommended by

manufacturer if applied on plaster as substrate.
02.
Use priming coat or hydraulically cured filler type recommended by

manufacturer if applied on exposed concrete.
03.
Use priming coat type recommended by manufacturer if applied on

gypsum board.
Termination trim
2 01 05 03
Substrate filler
2 01 05 04
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 3:
ODAC
Execution
3 01 Examination
In general, follow the manufacturers sitework instructions for all proprietary materials used in
the preparation of surfaces.
Verify that wall surfaces are dry smooth and flat within specified tolerances and are ready to
receive work.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
coverings unless moisture content of surfaces is below recommend maximums.
If, during the course of work, any surface or substrate is found to be unsound obtain
instructions immediately.
3 02 01
General surface preparation

Clean and rub down the surfaces generally with appropriate materials such as cloth, brush,
abrasive paper or pad, or scraper, either dry, or wet with water and soap powder or detergent
or with proprietary emulsion cleaner, as appropriate to the particular surface.
Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler. Sand smoothly.
Where an abrasive has been used to rub down surfaces ensure that the surfaces are
thoroughly cleaned to remove dust and particles.
Surface appurtenance: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and
fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
Marks: Seal with shellac those, which may bleed through surface finishes.
Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.
3 02 02
Preparation for concrete, brick, block, plaster or render surfaces

Brush undecorated surfaces with a stiff, but not wire, brush to remove dirt and loose particles;
if necessary wash with warm detergent solution.
If heavy oil or grease layers or concrete release agent residues are to be removed, use
proprietary emulsion cleaners in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Rinse the surfaces with clean water and allow drying.
Apply primer, sealer or size if and as required.
3 02 03
Preparation for previously decorated surfaces

Ensure all loose and defective material is removed to leave a firm edge.
Cut out, reprime rebates, and allow drying and re-puttying to match the existing work.
Wash down overpainting with warm detergent solution. Where previous paint has been
weathered away, rub down and apply primer, make good imperfections with an appropriate
internal or external grade filler and/or stopper.
Apply two thin coats of knotting to all resinous areas and knots after paint has been removed.
Wash down with soap powder or detergent and warm water solution to remove grease and
dirt.
In case of stain finished surfaces, brush down to remove loose dust and dirt. Clean with cloth
moistened with soap powder or detergent and warm water solution. Wipe with cloth moistened
with clean water and allow drying.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
General
Do not commence hanging until: the work of all tradesmen, which might affect the surfaces to
be covered, is completed; the surfaces to be covered have dried out; efflorescence has
ceased; the painting of adjacent surfaces is complete and dry.
As far as practicable, before, during and after hanging, maintain the temperature and humidity
at levels approximating to those which will prevail after the building is occupied.
Do not use accelerate drying after hanging decorative wall coverings.
Use wall coverings in roll number sequence.
If wall coverings are delivered untrimmed, trim off the selvedge neatly to give a true straight
edge, unless manufacturers hanging instructions require joints to be formed by overlapping
and cutting through.
Razor trim edges on flat worktable. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces.
Apply covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure
full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight.
Do not seam within 50 mm of internal corners or within 150 mm of external corners.
Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors in sequence from roll.
3 03 02
Priming and sealing

Apply one coat of alkali resisting primer / sealer in accordance with manufacturers sitework
instructions to new concrete, new lime plaster and thin coat plaster.
Seal alkaline surfaces so that the alkali will not be drawn out by the application of adhesive.
Ensure that the surfaces of plasterboard dry linings that are not finished with plaster are
primed with one coat of primer according to the plasterboard manufacturers sitework
instructions.
In case of sizing use one containing a fungicide and apply one coat or two to porous surfaces.
3 03 03
Adhesives
Use only adhesives stated by the wall coverings manufacturer to be suitable for the type of
wall covering to be hung.
Prepare adhesives in accordance with the manufacturers sitework instructions.
Use fungicidal adhesives in accordance with the manufacturers sitework instructions
wherever the wall covering is to be hung on a surface previously affected by mould; for
impermeable wall coverings like vinyl wall coverings; for all wall coverings to concrete or
plaster containing lime and for wall coverings in areas that may be humid.
Paste adhesive evenly over the whole surface of the wall covering and / or the wall, as
directed by the manufacturers sitework instructions.
Allow sufficient time, as recommended by the wall covering manufacturers sitework
instructions, between pasting and hanging.
Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next covering sheet.
Wipe clean with dry cloth.
3 05

Refer to Section 01700, Contract Closeout: cleaning installed work
Clean coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.
Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 07 Protection
Do not permit work at or near finished covered areas..
3 08 Schedules
Prior to commencing of installation, contractor shall provide finish schedules of his works, coordinated with other trades, and defining where the wall coverings are be laid out.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 4:
Method of Measurement
4 01
General
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for void less than 1m2.
4 02
Wall coverings according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by m2.
Termination trims will be measured according to type by length (m).
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all materials, equipment, tools,
storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples and co-ordinating work with other
trades, checking, examination, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
5 02 Ancillary Works to be Included in the Unit Rate

01.
Cutting, fitting and hanging around door frames, windows, pipes and the
like.
02.
Preparation of the surface in order to obtain a good bonding ground.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01 Tables
6 01 01
Table 1: Symbols for Marking Purposes
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 09 : FINISHES
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Foreword
The internationally recognized framework known as Masterformat released by the Construction

Specifications Institute (CSI) has been adopted in order to organize the sorting and numbering in the new
edition of the specifications in a manner that insures the easy flow and exchange of information among
specialists and the community of the building industry at large. The new edition involves 12 main
divisions. These divisions are:
Division 01:
General Requirements
Division 02:
Site work
Division 03:
Concrete
Division 04:
Masonry
Division 05:
Metals
Division 06:
Wood and Plastics
Division 07:
Thermal and Moisture Protection
Division 08:
Doors and Windows
Division 09:
Finishes
Division 14:
Conveying Systems
Division 15:
Mechanical
Division 16:
Electrical
Each Division comprises a number of related Sections. For example: Division 08 includes eight sections.
They are:
08100
Doors and Frames
08200
Wooden and Plastic Doors
08300
Special Doors
08400
Entrances and Storefronts
08500
Metal Windows
08600
Wooden and Plastic Windows
08700
Hardware
08800
Glazing
Further, each Section incorporates seven Parts as follows:

Part 1:
General: This is mainly concerned with the references, quality control, submittals, programs,
and maintenance.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 2:
ODAC
Products: This gives a breakdown of material used in addition to their properties and place of
installation.
Part 3:
Execution: The most significant items in this Part are the execution and installation of the
works, field quality control, as well as cleaning and protection methods.
Part 4:
Methods of Measurement: This indicates the measurement units and the measuring methods
that shall be used for the Bills of Quantities.
Part 5:
Basis of Payment: This indicates the work that shall be completed for each item of the Bills of
Quantities. It also indicates the ancillary works to be included in the unit price rate.
Part 6:
Annex: Tables and Figures: Those relevant to the individual Section.
Comments and Recommendations may be forwarded to the following address:
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
DIVISION 09
FINISHES
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
INDEX
Division 01: General Requirements

Division 02: Sitework
Division 03: Concrete
Division 04: Masonry
Division 05: Metals
Division 06: Wood & Plastics
Division 07: Thermal & Moisture Protection
Division 08: Doors & Windows
Division 09: Finishes
09200
Lath and Plaster
09250
Gypsum Board
09300
Tile
09400
Terrazzo
09450
Stone Facing
09500
Acoustical Treatments
09545
Special Ceiling Surfaces
09550
Wood Flooring
09650
Resilient Flooring
09680
Carpet
09900
Painting
09950
Wall Coverings
Division 14: Conveying Systems

Division 15: Mechanical
Division 16: Electrical
5

Division 09 Finishes Final

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Division 09 Finishes Final

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY

TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS

SINGLE LAYER FABRIC COVERING SYSTEM - Type ES1

CONTRACTOR DESIGN PROPOSALS

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED AFTER ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF TESTING

TESTING FABRIC MATERIAL

INTEGRITY: CONTRACTOR DETERMINED PARAMETERS

DESIGN LIFE OF TENSILE FABRIC ROOF ASSEMBLY

SOLAR AND LIGHT CONTROL

PACKING AND SHIMS

SETTING OUT OF FABRIC COVERINGS

FABRICATING CABLE CUFFS

FACTORY SEAMING OF PANELS

HANDLING AND STORAGE

SUITABILITY OF SUPPORTING STRUCTURE

FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION

PROJECT TESTING (LABORATORY)

PROJECT TESTING (SITE)

Completed coverings: Protect against damage from adjacent or high level

H92 RAINSCREEN CLADDING

CERAMIC RAINSCREEN CLADDING : Type CW6

ALUMINIUM PANEL RAINSCREEN CLADDING: Type CW7

HONEYCOMB RAINSCREEN SYSTEM

Internal skin finish

White liner (nominal thickness) coating of pre finished

Internal skin colour

Commercial grade aluminium honeycomb designed to

Standard core thickness 28mm

Nominal 15mm recessed Horizontal.

P2.8 SYSTEM TOLERANCES

CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. PSP Ltd DO NOT ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN

Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures.

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF TESTING

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

CWCT 'STANDARD FOR SYSTEMISED BUILDING ENVELOPES'

Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2 appropriate to location, exposure, height,

THERMAL MOVEMENT - SERVICE TEMPERATURE RANGES

VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

PROJECT TESTING (SITE)

WIND LOAD FATIGUE TEST, SMALL SPECIMEN

Requirement: To CWCT Standard for systemised building envelopes, Standard

SITE SPRAY BAR TEST

SITE HOSE TEST

ALUMINIUM ALLOY FRAMING SECTIONS

ALUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET

CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/ REINFORCEMENT

CARBON STEEL SHEET

Grade: To BS EN 10088-2, austenitic 1.4301 (304) generally, 1.4301 (316) when

FIXINGS AND FASTENERS

VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER

PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/

PROTECTIVE COATING OF CARBON STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS

Polyvinylidene fluoride (pvdf) coating

FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES APPLICATION

PRELIMINARY RAINSCREEN CLADDING INSTALLATION

RAINSCREEN CLADDING INSTALLATION

PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS

TYPES OF DRY LINING

METAL STUD PARTITION SYSTEM.

- Primary grid centres: 1200mm.

NEW WET LAID BASES